DISTRICT LIMITS
DISTRICT NO. #
544 of 1291
DUNSMORE AV
BOSTON AV
ZOE ANNE WY
EL MORENO STEL CAMINITO PL
FRANKLIN ST
FAIRESTA ST
LOWELL AV
ABELLA ST
ALTURA AV
GROMER TER GROMER TER
HENRITETTA AV
MEVEL PL
BROOKHILL ST
HENRITETTA AV
CHERYL AV
EL CAMINITO ST
PONTIAC ST
FAIRESTA ST
ALTURA AV
LAUDERDALE AV
NEW YORK AV
MARYANN ST
KENTUCKY
WASHINGTON PL
QUAIL CANYON RD
MARKRIDGE RD RIMHILL RD
FRANCES AV
MARYLAND AV
CHERYL AV
PONTIAC ST
FAIRESTA ST
SANTA CARLOTTA ST
EL CAMINITO ST
CAROLYN WY BROOKHILLTREND TER
BURRITT WY
PARAISO WY
PARAISO WY
EL CAMINITO ST
LOS ANGELES ST
EL MORENO ST
LOS OLIVOS LN
FRANKLIN ST MOORE ST
FOOTHILL BLVD
DANNY ST
VISTA CT
LAUDERDALE AV
VIRGINIA ST
FIRST AV
SECOND AV THIRD AV
FOURTH AV
FIFTH AV
SECOND AV BOSTON AV
BETH PL
LIRIO LN
WILEY LN
MAYFIELD AV
ANDERSON AV
LEHMAN LN
HONOLULU AV
LOWELL AV
OAKGROVE CT
HONOLULU AV
MONTROSE AV
BOSTON AV
ANDERSON AV
POYNETTE ST
DUNSMORE AV
CEDARBEND DR FORESTGLEN DR
BEECHGLEN DR
FERNTREE
TANBARK
EL LADO DR
LAUDERDALE AV
WILLALLE AV
FREDERICK ST
ENCINAL AV
MONTROSE AV
ALTURA AV
PROSPECT AV
COMMUNITY AV
MARYANN ST
PROSPECT AVE
FAIRCHILD ST
FOOTHILL BLVD
FAIRMONT AV
MELANIE
FREDERICK ST
FAIRESTA ST
LOS OLIVOS LN
ALABAMA ST
STEVENS ST
WILLALEE AV REBECCA
DANNY DR
RETA ST
SANTA CARLOTTA ST
EL CAMINITO
PONTIAC ST
CLOUDSDALE AV
PARAISO WY
BURRITT WY
BROOKHILL ST
HENRITETTA AV
FREDERICK AV
GLENCOVE AV
COMMUNITY AV
ABELLA ST
MEVEL PL
FINEHILL AV
PL
PL
TER
AV
LN
ST
PL
12 CITY OF LOS ANGELESCITY OF GLENDALE
FOOTHILL FWY (I-210)
CITY OF GLENDALECITY OF LA CRESCENTA
PENNSYLVANIA AV
NOT TO SCALE
EXHIBIT 1: PROJECT LOCATION MAP
FISCAL YEAR 2023 SLURRY SEAL AND
CRACK SEAL PROGRAM
CITY LIMITS
LEGEND
CRACK SEAL
DISTRICT LIMITS
DISTRICT NO. #
545 of 1291
GLENDALE FWY (CA-2)
PARKVISTA PL
MANHATTAN AV
MANHATTAN AV
LOCKERBIE LN
HILLWAY DR
MANOR LN
PIEDMONT AV
PIEDMONT AV
PIEDMONT AV
OAK CIRCLE DR
DR STEPHENS CIR
DEER CREEK LN PETERS CIR
GLENCREST TER
GLENCREST DR
BEAUDRY SAN GABRIEL AV SHADY GLEN
LEE CIR
DAILY CIR
BARNES CIR
DORA VERDUGO DR
GREENMONT DR
STARVIEW DR
VALANE DR
BEAUDRY BLVD
CANADA BLVD
CLUB
SAN GABRIEL AV
HERMOSITA DR
VERDUGO RD
EL VISTA CT
MENLO DR
EL TOVAR DR
EL ARBOLITA N VERDUGO RD
MENLO DR
RD
STANCREST FRONTAGE RD
ROSECREST DR
STANCREST DR
EMANUEL DR
CAMANN ST
EILINITA AV DOLORITA AV
SHIRLYJEAN ST
MALAFIA DR
OAKMONT VIEW DR
MILDINE DR COUNRTY CLUB DR
URQUIDEZ AV
VALVERDE CT VALVERDE PL ROSELAWN AVE
EAGLE POINT DR
STONECREST DR
ANGELUS AV
VERDUGO BLVD N VERDUGO RD
HONOLULU AV WICKHAM WY
MONTROSE LN
VALDERAS DR
BROADVIEW DR
BROADVIEW DR
SPARR BLVD
SUNVIEW DR
PARK PL
VALIHI WY
CLIFFTON PL
THOMPSON CT
MARKET ST
SIERRA VISTA AV
LAS PALMAS AV
OCEANVIEW BLVD
ROSEMARY AV
BUENA VISTA AV DOWNING AV
EL CINO PL
ARLINGTON AV
PALOMA AV TRIANGLE PL
DOWNING AV
LA CRESCENTA AV
SIERRA GLEN RD
HIDDEN RANCHO PL
GLENCOE WY
OAK VALLEY RD
VICKERS DR
VICKERS DR
CASTERA AV
SPARR BLVD
MENLO DR
DR MAR
DEL
HARMON PL
BAGDAD PL
EL ARBOLITA DR
EL ARBOLITA
LOCKWOOD RD
AMARILLO DR
RAFAEL TER
BAY BERRY DR SPARR BLVD
VERDUGO RD
HONOLULU PL
AVE LIBERTY
PINEWOOD LN
PENNSYLVANIA AV
EL LADO DR CLOUD AV
WHITING WOODS RD
MESA LILA RD
DEER PASS RD MESA LILA RD PICKENS ST RAYMOND AVE
MONTROSE AV
RAMSDELL AV
GLENWOOD AV
OAKENDALE PL
GLENWOOD AV
INVALE DRLA CRESCENTA AV
MANHATTAN AV
PIEDMONT AV
HERMOSA AV
HONOLULU AV
OAKSIDE LN
PLEASURE WY
AGNER AV
SYCAMORE AV
OAK CIRCLE DR
SUNSET AV ORANGEDALE AV
MONTROSE AV
HONOLULU AV
MILLS AV
PARKVISTA DR
NEW YORK AV
VERDUGO WOODS HWY VERDUGO WOODS HWY WEST
CELITA WOODS HWY
VERDUGO WOODS HWY EAST
OAKGLEN
N
DR
DR
WHITING
OAKMONT VIEW
BLVD
VERDUGO RD
STANCREST DR
VISTA
COUNTRY
SAN GABRIEL
EL LADO DR
SYCAMORE AV
GLENWOOD AV
6 12
FOOTHILL FWY (I-210) NOT TO SCALE
EXHIBIT 1: PROJECT LOCATION MAP
FISCAL YEAR 2023 SLURRY SEAL AND
CRACK SEAL PROGRAM
CITY LIMITS
LEGEND
CRACK SEAL
DISTRICT LIMITS
DISTRICT NO. #
546 of 1291
OPECHEE WY CAPISTRANO AV
HERMOSITA DR
CAMULOS AV
EL RITO AV
RISA DR
BROOK
CORO TER
CATHAY ST
HILLSIDE DR
VERDUGO KNOLL PL
LOMA VISTA DR
LOMA VISTA DR
TAMBOR DR
SHERER LN
VIRDEN DR
HILLFAIR DR
CRESTSHIRE DR
CM SAN RAFAEL
CL CANTA
CL CANTA
CL LA COSTA CL SIRENA
CL FORTUNA CL SUENOS CL LA PRIMAVERA
CL DEL SOL
CMTO DE LA NARCISA CMTO DE LA PLAYA CMTO DEL CIELO MONTANA
CMTO DE LA VALLE CMTO DE LA LUNA CMTO DE LA ESTRELLA CMTO DEL PILAR
CL SIMPATICOCL BELLA
CL SONRISA
CM SAN RAFAEL
CL CONTENTO
CL AZUL
CL DEL PACIFICO
CL ALLEGRE
CL AMABLE
KNOLL PL
FLINTRIDGE DR
EMERALD ISLE DR
ARUNDLE PL
KENNINGTON DR
CASCADIA DR
GLENFLOW CT
VALLE VISTA DR HOLLISTER TER
MOUNT CARMEL DR
E GLENOAKS BLVD
SUNSHINE DR
SUNSHINE DR
BALMORAL DR
TRAFALGER DR
KIRKTON PL
PEBBLESHIRE RD CATALINA DR
ESMERALDA DR
PUEBLA DR
GLENMORE BLVD CORWIN AV
ACADEMY PL
KIMLIN DR
LILAC LN
ELEANORE DR
LILAC LN
EDEN AV
EDEN AV HARVEY DR
HILL DR
OAK VISTA DR
SOLWAY ST
PENNERTON DR GARDNER PL
E GLENOAKS BLVD
PERSKIN CIR
HAVERKAMP DR
FERGUS DR
GARDNER LN STORY PL
ARCADE PL
DELCOURT PL
SUNCOURT TER
BRADEN DR GARDNER PL
ARCH PL
HOLLISTER TER HOLLISTER TER WALTONIA DR
ELVINA DR
SCHOLL DR
TRYON PL
CORLINGTON RD
WYNDALE PL
ASHBURTON PL
DEVONSHIRE LN
COUTIN LN
GLENOAKS CANYON
ORCHARD AV
HOLLY DR CALIFORNIA AV
CARLA DR
MILDRED DR FAY DR
GLENMORE BLVD
MOUNTAIN ST
FOXKIRK RD
PARCHER PL
SOLWAY ST
EASTEDGE DR
CHEVY
ARUNDLE PL
ANNITA DR
SHERIDAN RD
BELLEAU RD
BELLEAU RD
THURLENE RD BOUQUETE ST
CORNWALL DR
HOLLYWELL PL
ST GREGORY RD
EDGEWICK RD
PADDINGTON RD
GOLF CLUB DR
CHEVY KNOLL DR
GOLF CLUB DR
PARWAY DR
GRACELAND WY
CHEVY OAKS CR
RIDGE DR
CHEVY OAKS
HAWKDEN CT
PENHILL CT NORSSALL CT BARMORE CT
FAIRCLIFF CT MAYGREEN CT ALLER CT
GLENFLOW CT
CAPROCK CT
EDMONTON RD
LAIRD DR
CHANCERY LN OLYMPIC DR
KENNINGTON DR
GREENWICH RD
CHEVY CHASE DR
GRACELAND WY
STUART WK SOMERSET RD
MARTIN
LARKSTONE LN
OUTLOOK LN
ST ANDREWS DR
RAMSAY DR
BARNETT DR
CASCADIA DR LEITH RD DRURY LN
CHEVY CHASE DR
CHEVY CHASE DR
WELSH WY
ERIN CT
DUBLIN DR
ERIN WY
LENORE DR
CRAIL WY
CM SAN RAFAEL
FLINTRIDGE DR
ASHINGTON DR
RD GRANGEMOUNT RD
CHADNEY DR KINGRIDGE WY
KIRKHAM DR HAMPSTEAD RD
DELISLE CT
EASTGATE PL
CARRIE LN
POSITAS RD
WESTON PL
DEL VALLE AV
VERDUGO
BLANCHARD DR
ARMOUR PL
LA VISTA
OPECHEE WY
HERMOSITA DR
RISA PL
RISA DR
FERN LN
CONCITA ST
CALAFIA STRISA DR
BARA RD
BONITA DR
JUNE LN
OPECHEE WYSYLVAN LN
EL RITO AV
CAPISTRANO AVE
SELVAS PL
ANDENES DR
DESCANSO
FREEMONT PL
OPECHEE WY
SAN LUIS REY DR
SUNSHINE CT
COLINA DR
BONITA DR
COLINA DR
CAMULOS AV
BONITA DR
ROSITA DR HAVEN ST
HILLSIDE DR
WABASSO WY SIERRA PL
HILLSIDE DR
POLARIS DR
HILLSIDE DR
HILLSIDE DR BRANTA DR
FERNBROOK PL
HIAWATHA DR
COLINA DR
ESSEX LN
SANDRINGHAM DR
NIODRARA DR
OAKMONT TER
SAMARKAND PL TAMERLANE DR
VERDUGO KNOLL DR
OAK KNOLL
CRESTMONT CT
SHERER LN
ARVIN DR
KIRKBY RD
VERDUGO VISTA DR VERDUGO LOMA DR THE MIDWAY
ALCALDE WY
ALCALDE DR
PL
TER
CT
CANADA BLVD
SINCLAIR AV
WOODBURY RD
WOODBURY RD
GALLER PL
N VERDUGO RD
LAS FLORES DR
IMPERIAL DR
N VERDUGO RD
VERDUGO CIRCLE DR
SINCLAIR AVN CHEVY CHASE DR
McHENRY RD
NARANJAI DR NARANJAI DR
E DORAN ST
GROVE PL WOODBURY RD
HERBERT AV
CORWIN AV ATKINS DR
TRENTON AV
RICHARD AV LEERIDGE TER
LYNGLEN DR
AVONGLEN TER
MERRILL AV E GLENOAKS BLVD
LORINDA DR
MILLAR DR
LUTON DR CANYON DR
LA LOMA RD
RICHARD PL
SYLVANOAK DR GLENVISTA DR
BRIARWOOD LN
AVONOAK TER
PRINCIPIA DR
FURMAN PL GLADYS DR
AVONOAK TER
SWARTHMORE DR
SWEETBRIAR DR
INA DR LURING DRGLAN AV ATKINS DR
GLENANDALE TER
CANADA BLVD N VERDUGO RD
DELMONTE DR
MOUNTAIN ST
ALAMO DR
LAS FLORES DR
PRINCES DRAROBLES DRMORENO DR
PUEBLA DR OROSCO DR
IMPERIAL DR MAJESTIC WY
ROYAL BLVD
TOLEDO DR
TORRES DR GREENBRIAR RD
LA ZANJA DR
LORETO DR
ROSEMOUNT RD
MONCADO DR
DON JOSE DR
HILLCROFT RD
HILLCROFT RD
MOUNTAIN ST
VISCANO DR
VERDUGO CIRCLE DR
N ADAMS ST
E GLENOAKS BLVD
KIRKBY RD
TOWNE ST
LN
RD
4 5
6 E GLENOAKS BLVD
GLENDALE FWY (CA-2)
VENTURA FWY (CA-134)
EDWARDS PL
SLEEPY HOLLOW TER
BAILEY PL
BYWOOD DR HARLOW DR
SLEEPY HOLLOW DR
VALLE VISTA DR
SLEEPY HOLLOW PL
WYNDALE PL
DR
EDWARDS PL
VALLE VISTA DR
E GLENOAKS BLVD
E GLENOAKS BLVD CITY OF GLENDALE CITY OF LOS ANGELES
NOT TO SCALE
EXHIBIT 1: PROJECT LOCATION MAP
FISCAL YEAR 2023 SLURRY SEAL AND
CRACK SEAL PROGRAM
CITY LIMITS
LEGEND
CRACK SEAL
DISTRICT LIMITS
DISTRICT NO. #
547 of 1291
ORDINANCE NO.
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, ADDING CHAPTER –
30.16 ENTITLED “TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS”, AND AMENDING SECTIONS 30.10.010, 30.30.010, 30.30.020, 30.30.030, 30.31.020,
30.32.030, 30.32.040, 30.32.050, 30.32.070, 30.32.090, 30.32.171, 30.32.172,
30.32.173, 30.33.120, 30.33.140, 30.33.150, 30.33.180, 30.33.190, 30.33.200,
30.33.210, 30.33.215, 30.33.220, 30.34.090, 30.34.100, 30.34.120 OF TITLE 30 OF THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995, RELATING TO THE TROPICO TRANSIT
ORIENTED DISTRICT ZONING AND OBJECTIVE DESIGN STANDARDS PROJECT (CASE NO. PZC-0007-2023)
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
SECTION 1. A new zoning chapter, 30.16, entitled “Transit Oriented Development Districts”, is hereby added to the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, as follows:
Chapter 30.16 Transit Oriented Development (TOD) Districts
30.16.020 TOD District Land Uses and Permit Requirements
30.16.030 TOD District General Development Standards
30.16.040 TOD District TOD District Additional Development Standards
30.16.050 TOD District Site Planning
30.16.060 TOD District Massing and Scale
30.16.070 TOD District Architectural Elements
30.16.080 TOD District Open Space and Landscaping
30.16.010 TOD Purpose.
A. TOD I (Transit Oriented Development I) Zone. The Transit Oriented Development (TOD)-I district is the City’s historic industrial base and a growing mixed-use and residential neighborhood generally located between the westerly border of the City and the Brand Boulevard of Cars and the easterly border of the City, south of Cypress Street, and within a five-minute walking distance of the Glendale Transportation Center. The primary intent of the TOD-I district is to facilitate diverse employment options and a range of housing opportunities – compatible in scale and form with a pedestrian oriented public realm and accessible to Tropico’s high quality public transportation offerings, and walkable neighborhoods at densities up to 100 units per acre.
B. TOD II (Transit Oriented Development II) Zone. The TOD-II district builds on the goals of TOD-I, and includes hospital uses and neighboring properties east of Central Avenue, south of Los Feliz Road, west of the Brand Boulevard of Cars and north of Cerritos Avenue. The primary intent of this zone is to allow for future hospital expansion that includes building heights up to 200 feet and encourages uses which support the hospital, such as medical offices, treatment facilities, and 548 of 1291
special needs housing, as well as residential development at densities up to 100 units per acre.
30.16.020 TOD District Land Uses and Permit Requirements.
A. Permitted Primary Uses and Structures. No building, structure or land shall be used and no building, structure or use in the Transit Oriented Development districts shall be erected, structurally altered, enlarged, or established except the following permitted uses, buildings and structures identified with a “P” in Table 30.16.020-A.
B. Conditional Uses and Structures. The following uses and structures identified with a “C” in Table 30.16.020-A may be permitted in the Transit Oriented Development districts subject to approval of a conditional use permit (Chapter
30.42). The development standards of this zone shall apply except as otherwise provided herein.
C. Administrative Uses and Structures. The following uses and structures identified with an “A” in Table 30.16.020-A may be permitted in the Transit Oriented Development districts subject to approval of an administrative use permit (Chapter
30.49). The development standards of this zone shall apply except as otherwise provided herein.
D. Temporary Uses. Temporary uses (identified with a “T” in Table 30.16.020-A), allowed subject to approval and compliance with all applicable provisions of this Zoning Code.
E. Permitted Accessory Uses and Structures. Accessory uses, buildings and structures shall be permitted in zones identified with a “P” in Table 30.16.020-A.
F. Wireless Telecommunications Facilities. Wireless telecommunications facilities, identified with a “W” in Table 30.16-A, may be permitted subject to the approval of a wireless telecommunications facility permit as set forth in Chapter 30.48 of this code.
G. Standards for Specific Uses. Where the last column in the following tables (“See Standards in Section or Chapter”) includes a section number, the regulations in the referenced section apply to the use; however, provisions in other sections of this Zoning Code may apply as well.
Table 30.16.020-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS AND PERMIT
REQUIREMENTS
PERMIT REQUIREMENT BY
ZONE LAND USE (1)(2)
TOD I TOD II
See
Standards in
Section or
Chapter
Accessory Buildings, Structures and Uses
Accessory dwelling unit (ADU), and/or junior
accessory dwelling unit (JADU) on a lot developed
with one residential dwelling unit
P P 30.34.080
549 of 1291
Table 30.16.020-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS AND PERMIT
REQUIREMENTS
PERMIT REQUIREMENT BY
ZONE LAND USE (1)(2)
TOD I TOD II
See
Standards in
Section or
Chapter
Accessory dwelling unit (ADU), on a lot developed with
one residential dwelling unit P P 30.34.080
Accessory uses P P
Accessory buildings and structures P P
Antennas (pole type) and flagpoles P P
Carts (freestanding, non-motorized, portable type) P P 30.34.040 Dish antennas P P 30.34.050
Home occupation P P 30.45
Home-sharing P P 5.110
Reverse Vending Machines P P 30.12.040
Signs P P 30.33
Solar energy equipment P P 30.30.050
Institutional Uses
Hospitals P
Places of worship C
Schools, physical instruction P C
Schools, private C
Schools, private specialized education, and training P C Recreation
Arcade establishment P P
Billiard establishments P
Community gardens P 30.34.045
Gyms and health clubs P
Indoor recreation center C
Outdoor commercial recreation C
Private clubs and lodges C
Public dances P
Taverns C
Theaters P P
Manufacturing and Processing
Backlots/outdoor facilities – production C
Broadcasting studios and indoor support facilities –
production P
Heavy manufacturing, if existing prior to October 10,
2023 P P
Laundries and dry cleaning plants, if existing prior to October 10, 2023 P P
Light manufacturing P(3)(4)
Medical and dental laboratories P P
Printing, publishing, and lithographic services P(3)(4) Research and development P(4)
Soundstages – production P
550 of 1291
Table 30.16.020-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS AND PERMIT
REQUIREMENTS
PERMIT REQUIREMENT BY
ZONE LAND USE (1)(2)
TOD I TOD II
See
Standards in
Section or
Chapter
Warehousing P
Wholesaling, including wholesaling of alcoholic
beverages P
Residential Uses
Domestic violence shelters P P
Conversion of a live/work unit to entirely residential or entirely business use A
Emergency shelter C
Multiple residential dwelling units P(5) P(5)
Residential congregate living, Limited (subject to the
provisions of one residential dwelling per lot) P P
Residential congregate living, Medical P P
Residential congregate living, Non-medical P(5) P(5)
One residential dwelling per lot subject to the
provisions of the R-1250 zone P
Senior housing P(5) P(5)
Mixed-Use Developments
Live/work units P(6) 30.34.090
Live/work units with conditionally permitted uses C 30.34.090 Mixed-use development provided that all uses are
permitted in zone which the project is located P P
Mixed-use development where at least one use is
conditionally permitted C C
Retail Trade Uses
Alcoholic beverage sales A(8) A(8)
Automobile supply store P
Banquet halls C
Building materials, supplies, sales and service P
Christmas tree sales lots, when maintained between
November 1st and January 9th T T 5.44
Jewelry stores P
Liquor stores A
Nurseries and garden supplies P
Paint and wallpaper stores P
Pawnshops, if existing prior to October 10, 2023 P
Pharmacy P P
Pumpkin sales lots, when maintained between
October 15th and November 1st T T 5.44
Restaurant, counter service with limited seating P P
Restaurants, fast food P(7) P(7)
Restaurants, full service P P
Retail stores, general merchandise P P
551 of 1291
Table 30.16.020-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS AND PERMIT
REQUIREMENTS
PERMIT REQUIREMENT BY
ZONE LAND USE (1)(2)
TOD I TOD II
See
Standards in
Section or
Chapter
Supermarkets P P
Vehicle sales, leasing and rental agencies, including
new and used automobiles, motorcycles, light trucks,
recreational vehicles and boats existing prior to
October 10, 2023, including a one-time expansion on
the same lot of up to 20 percent of floor area.
P 30.34.160
Expansion of vehicle sales, leasing and rental
agencies, including new and used automobiles,
motorcycles, light trucks, recreational vehicles and
boats existing prior to September 12, 2006, when
proposed expansion is on the same lot as the existing
facility and is greater than 20 percent of the floor area existing prior to September 12, 2006, or for any new
facilities on separate or non-contiguous lots.
C 30.34.160
Service Uses
Banks and financial institutions P
Body shops and painting booths, if existing prior to
October 10, 2023 30.34.150
Business support services P
Day care centers A A
Equipment rental yards, if existing prior to October 10, 2023 P
Gas station P 30.34.020
Heating and air conditioning sales and service
(HVAC), if existing prior to October 10, 2023 P 30.34.070 Hotels and motels P
Kennel, animal boarding and daycare P(9)
Massage establishment C 5.64
Medical and dental laboratories P P
Mortuaries and funeral homes A
Moving and storage services, if existing prior to
October 10, 2023 P
Personal Services P P
Pet grooming P
Repair and maintenance, consumer products P(4)
Tire stores, if existing prior to October 10, 2023 30.34.140 Vehicle repair garage, if existing prior to October 10, 2023 P 30.34.150
Office Uses
Contractors office and/or storage, temporary T T
Medical and dental offices P P
Office P P
552 of 1291
Table 30.16.020-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS AND PERMIT
REQUIREMENTS
PERMIT REQUIREMENT BY
ZONE LAND USE (1)(2)
TOD I TOD II
See
Standards in
Section or
Chapter
Office, consumer services C
Veterinary offices, including hospitalization services P Transportation and Communications Uses
Parking lot/structure facilities C P
30.32,
30.51.020
Utility and transmission facilities C C
Wireless telecommunications facilities W W 30.48
Key to Permit Requirements Symbol See Chapter
Permitted use P
Administrative use—Administrative use permit required A 30.49 Conditional use—Conditional use permit required C 30.42 Temporary use T
Wireless telecommunications facilities permit required W 30.48 Use not allowed
Notes:
(1) See Section 30.03.010 regarding uses not listed.
(2) See Chapter 30.70 for definitions of the land uses. (3) If gross floor area of the building is 10,000 sq. ft. or less and use is indoors; if greater than 10,000 sq. ft. and/or use is outdoors, a conditional use permit is required. (4) Requires a conditional use permit when combined in a mixed-use development which includes residential.
(5) When fronting San Fernando Road, Central Avenue, or Los Feliz Road, only allowed as mixed-use projects with commercial uses located along the street frontage as required in Section 30.34.100. (6) For lots having frontage along San Fernando Road, Central Avenue, or Los Feliz Road, manufacturing and processing uses shall not be on the ground floor fronting these streets. (7) No drive-thru facilities permitted.
(8) Supermarkets only require an AUP for on-site consumption of alcoholic beverages. CUP not required for wholesaling.
(9) Not to be located nearer than 200 feet to the R1, R1R, ROS, R-3050, R-2250, R16-50 and R-1250 zones if use includes outdoor facilities.
30.16.030 TOD District General Development Standards.
Table 30.16.030-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS GENERAL DEVELOPMENT
STANDARDS
Development Feature Requirement by Zoning District
553 of 1291
TOD I TOD II
Minimum Lot Size Minimum lot area and width required for new parcels Area 10,000 square feet
Width 60 feet
Maximum Residential
Density
100 dwelling units per acre when not
abutting the R-3050, R-2250,
R-1650, or R-1250 zone; 87 dwelling
units per acre when abutting the R3050, R-2250, R-1650 and R-1250 zones
100 dwelling units per acre
Minimum Setbacks
Required (3) See Section 30.16.050.B.1 for setback exceptions Street Front and Street
Side
Public realm minimum setback of 12 or 15 feet, see Section 30.16.040 (TOD District Site Planning)
Interior None
Distance Between
Dwellings N/A
Maximum Height Limits
(1), (2), (3) Buildings
and Structures
60 feet 200 feet
Landscaping
See Section 30.16.070.A (Publicly Accessible Open Space Standards); Also see Sections 30.16.040 (TOD Site Planning) and 30.16.070.B (Residential Open Space Standards)
Fences and Walls See Section 30.16.060 (TOD District Architectural Elements) Rooftop Equipment See Section 30.16.060 (TOD District Architectural Elements) Lighting See Section 30.16.060 (TOD District Architectural Elements) Trash Collection Areas See Section 30.16.060 (TOD District Architectural Elements) Parking and Loading As required by Chapter 30.32 (Parking and Loading); Also see Section 30.16.040 (TOD District Site Planning) Design Review As required by Chapter 30.47 (Design Review) Notes:
(1) Enclosed or screened rooftop equipment not exceeding five feet in height above the roof of a building shall not be computed as part of the height of the building. Elevator shafts and rooftop stairwells not exceeding 15 feet in height above the roof of a building shall not be computed as part of the height of the building. See Chapter 30.70 (Definitions). (2) For exceptions to height limits for wireless telecommunications facilities, see Chapter 30.48 (Wireless Telecommunications Facilities Permits).
(3) For setback and height requirements related to solar energy equipment, see Section 30.30.050 (Solar Energy Equipment).
30.16.040 TOD district additional development standards.
A. Limitations and exceptions to permitted uses and structures. Notwithstanding any other provisions of this chapter, the following limitations shall apply to the conduct of any use permitted in the TOD districts as applicable:
1. All uses except outdoor eating areas, parking, growing plants, cut flowers, Christmas tree lots, pumpkin sales lots, incidental or temporary uses, vending machines (vending machines shall not include coin-operated amusement 554 of 1291
devices, rides, scales, or similar devices), and provision and storage of shopping carts, subject to specific standards contained within this chapter, backlots/outdoor facilities (production), car washes, incidental or temporary uses, service stations, storage yards, vehicle storage or display, tire store uses, kennels, animal boarding and day care, and vending machines (vending machines shall not include coin-operated amusement devices, rides, scales, or similar devices) shall be conducted entirely within a completely enclosed building which is attached to a permanent foundation. There shall be no outside storage of tools, equipment, supplies or materials, except as provided in GMC
30.16.040.A.
2. The display of new and used merchandise shall be allowed outside a building on not more than four (4) occasions during any calendar year for the purpose of conducting a sale of said merchandise. A permit to conduct such a sale shall be issued by the City Clerk if the following conditions are shown to exist:
a. A written application for said permit shall be filed with the City Clerk not less than ten (10) calendar days before commencing any outside sale. b. The maximum length of time for conducting such a sale shall be seventytwo (72) hours.
3. For uses existing prior to October 10, 2023 with incidental outdoor storage, all incidental outdoor storage shall be conducted wholly within an area completely enclosed by a masonry wall not less than five and one-half (5½) feet in height, with all entrances and exits enclosed with opaque gates equal in height to the wall. Outdoor storage shall not project above the wall.
4. Shopping cart storage shall be located adjacent to the entry of a building and shall be screened with a minimum three-foot, six-inch high solid wall/fence or combination of fence and landscaping to obscure the visibility of shopping carts from the adjacent public rights-of-way. Where the director of community development, in their discretion, determines that screening interferes with the cart removal/retrieval “opening” given the unique location of the building (e.g., corner structure where cart storage may be visible from two (2) or more intersecting public rights-of-way), the director of community development shall exempt the “opening” from the screening requirement and shall determine the orientation, location, size and configuration of the unscreened “opening.” Shopping cart storage shall not intrude into any required pedestrian passageway or public right-of-way. See Section 30.16.040.A.5 regarding shopping cart containment and control.
5. All shopping carts shall be contained or controlled within the boundaries of store premises, in accordance with the standards set forth in Section 30.12.040.A.1.h.
6. One (1) outdoor reverse vending machine shall be permitted for each three thousand (3,000) square feet of site area up to a maximum of eight (8) such reverse vending machines per site. Reverse vending machine shall be limited to a maximum area of one hundred (100) square feet, including any protective enclosure and a maximum height of eight (8) feet. Reverse vending machines 555 of 1291
shall be attached to or located immediately adjacent to a building and shall be accessible and shall not encroach into any required pedestrian access or walkway. All signs on a reverse vending machine shall be regulated by Chapter 30.33 of this title. The hours of operation of the reverse vending machine shall be consistent with the operating hours of the primary use.
B. Performance Standards. In accordance with the goals and precepts of the comprehensive general plan of the City, environmental performance standards are hereby established to protect the community from hazards, nuisances and other negative factors; to ensure that land uses are not operated in such a manner as to cause a detrimental effect on adjacent land uses or the community environment; and to preserve and enhance the lifestyle of Glendale residents through the protection of the public health, safety and general welfare. In the TOD districts, the following guidelines shall be evaluated on the basis of whether or not the activity is obnoxious to a person of normal sensitivity.
1. General provisions. No land, building or structure shall be used or occupied in any manner so as to create or maintain any dangerous, injurious, noxious or otherwise objectionable condition caused by fire, explosion or other hazards; noise or vibration; smoke, dust or other form of air pollution; liquid or solid refuse or wastes; or any other substance, condition or element used in such a manner or in such amount as to adversely affect the surrounding area or adjoining premises.
2. Air quality. Any activity, operation, or device which causes or tends to cause the release of air contaminants into the atmosphere shall comply with the rules and regulations of the South Coast Air Quality Management District and with the following:
a. Visible emissions. No visible emissions of air contaminants or particulate matter shall be discharged into the atmosphere. No combustible refuse incineration shall be permitted.
b. Dust. Windborne dusts and debris across lot lines shall be prevented by planting, wetting, compacting, paving or other suitable treatment of land surface; storing, treating or enclosing materials; controlling sources of dust and debris by cleaning; or such other measures as may be required. c. Odors. No odorous material shall be permitted so as to be obnoxious to persons of normal sensitivity as readily detectible at the property line or at any point off-site where the odor is greater.
3. Waste and contaminants. No wastewater, radioactive material or other potential groundwater contaminant shall be discharged into or under the ground surface except for such groundwater recharge operations as may be conducted by or under the supervision of the Los Angeles County Flood Control District, and/or city of Glendale. Any discharge into a public sewer, private sewer, private sewerage disposal system or into the ground of any materials that may contaminate any water supply, interfere with bacterial processes in sewerage treatment, or otherwise cause the emission of dangerous or offensive elements is prohibited. All industrial uses shall comply with the provisions of this code 556 of 1291
pertaining to refuse, weeds, sewer construction and sewer use. Liquid wastes shall be disposed of only by authorized discharge to a public sewer system or by transport to an acceptable disposal facility. Burning, dumping, or littering of solid wastes is prohibited. Solid wastes shall be disposed of only by transport to an acceptable disposal facility, except that inert solid materials may be utilized in landfills and construction when specifically authorized by a grading permit or building permit, and organic materials may be utilized in connection with normal and customary landscaping and agricultural activities providing that such activities meet all the requirements of the Glendale Municipal Code and these environmental performance standards; and do not endanger groundwater quality.
4. Vibration. No activities shall be permitted which cause objectionable vibration to adjoining property except for construction activities in connection with an effective building permit.
5. Noise. No noise shall be generated which causes the maximum sound level to exceed the noise levels specified in chapter 8.6 of this code. Further, in a mixed use project, no increase in the ambient noise base level for non-residential uses shall be permitted. Such noise measurements shall be taken at the residential zone property line, or at any point within an abutting residential zone, or at a point within the residential portion of the mixed use project, where the noise level from the non-residential use is greater. No steady impulsive noise (such as hammering or riveting) or steady audible tone components (such as whines, screeches or hums) shall be detectible from any residential use which is part or adjacent to the mixed use project.
C. Dwelling Unit Size. The gross floor area of any dwelling unit in the TOD districts shall be not less than provided herein. For the purpose of this section, dens, studies or other similar rooms which may be used as bedrooms shall be considered as bedrooms. Living rooms, dining rooms, kitchens or bathrooms shall not be considered as bedrooms, except that separate dining rooms in efficiency units or rooms that could be converted into additional bedrooms shall be considered as bedrooms. A minimum of ninety (90) cubic feet of private storage space, fully enclosed and lockable, with a minimum horizontal surface area of twenty-four (24) square feet, shall be provided for each dwelling unit outside such unit.
Table 30.16.C
Unit Type Minimum Size Requirement
Efficiency and one (1) bedroom units Six hundred (600) square feet Two (2) bedroom units Eight hundred (800) square feet
Three (3) or more bedroom units One thousand (1,000) square feet Senior units Five hundred forty (540) square feet
557 of 1291
30.16.050 TOD District Site Planning.
A. Site Planning: Public Realm Standards.
The public realm consists generally of the publicly owned street rights-of-way and other publicly accessible open spaces such as parks, squares, plazas, paseos, courtyards, and alleys. The public realm defines the visual character and function of an area through a framework of public street rights-of-way that provide circulation, access, and open space.
1. Public Realm Setback. All new development, or any addition over greater than ten thousand (10,000) square feet to an existing building, in the TOD district shall comply the following minimum ground floor setbacks measured from the face-of-curb, excluding curb extensions and bio-retentions, to the build-to line on public streets. The build-to line is defined as a line parallel to the street at which the vertical plane of the front building elevation may be located. No building elevation shall be located closer than the build-to line as specified in Figure 30.16.050-A.
a. A public realm easement is required on private property if the distance between the existing face-of-curb and the property line is less than 15 feet for sites fronting Los Feliz Road, San Fernando Road, Central Avenue and Brand Boulevard, and 12 feet for sites fronting all other streets in the TOD district. A public realm easement is not required if the distance between the existing face-of-curb and the property line is 15 feet or 12 feet, or greater, respectively.
b. Existing or proposed curb extensions shall not be included in the measurement used to determine the required public realm setback. c. Habitable building projections (balconies, etc.) shall not extend over the required public realm.
2. Public Realm Zones. The intent of the Tropico TOD public realm is to generate a pedestrian-oriented street network that supports and enhances access to transit and consists of three distinct and contiguous zones. a. Parkway Zone. Where a public realm setback is required, there shall be a parkway zone width measured from the face-of-curb to the sidewalk zone of five feet for public realm setbacks of 15 feet and four feet for public realm setbacks of 12 feet, as specified in Figures 30.16.050-A. Existing parkway zones greater than five feet or four feet, respectively, must be maintained. i. Street trees (minimum 24-inch box shade trees) shall be installed in the parkway at a maximum of 25 feet on center, per the City’s Arborist’s specification, or at a spacing determined per the City Arborist’s specifications for the species being planted. Existing street trees shall be maintained unless removal is required by the City. ii. All parkway zones shall be landscaped a minimum of 20 percent, except for driveways and corner intersections. Tree grates may be 558 of 1291
included up to 50 percent of the required landscaping for parkway zones.
iii. Street furniture, landscaping, street trees, bike parking, light and utility poles, utility boxes, traffic control devices, benches, and trash cans are permitted in the parkway zone.
iv. The property owner shall maintain the street trees and landscaping in the parkway zone in an orderly and healthy condition, free of weeds and debris.
b. Sidewalk Zone. Where a public realm setback is required, there shall be a minimum six-foot sidewalk zone width measured from the parkway zone to the building adjacent zone, as specified in Figures 30.16.050-A. i. The required public realm width shall remain clear of all obstructions to maintain universal access.
ii. Seating, poles, temporary or permanent signs, bike racks, bicycle sharing facilities, benches, permanent or temporary seating, temporary or permanent fences or enclosures, utility boxes, landscaping, planters, pots, or steps are prohibited in the sidewalk zone.
iii. Awnings and canopies may project over the sidewalk zone with an encroachment permit.
iv. Where the sidewalk width requirement exceeds the width of the public right-of-way the development must provide a setback to achieve the required width. If additional area is required on private property to satisfy the minimum requirement, an easement shall be required. c. Building Adjacent Zone. Where a public realm is required, there shall be a minimum four-foot building adjacent zone width measured from the sidewalk zone to the building frontage for public realm setbacks of 15 feet, and a two-foot building adjacent zone for public realm setbacks of 12 feet.
This area exists between the sidewalk and the building-to-line, as specified in Figures 30.16.050-A.
i. Landscaping, permanent or temporary seating, and low fences and walls (no greater than three feet in height), shall be permitted in the Building Adjacent Zone, except when prohibited by GMC
30.30.16.050.B.4.a.
ii. Accessory ground signs shall be permitted in the Building Adjacent Zone.
iii. Building floors above the first floor may project over the Building Adjacent Zone.
iv. Walls and stairs greater than three feet in height are prohibited in the Building Adjacent Zone, except for above-grade first residential floors (see Section 30.16.050.B.4.b.iii).
559 of 1291
v. Subterranean parking garages may be located within the Building Adjacent Zone below grade. If landscaping is required within the Building Adjacent Zone, the subterranean parking garage shall be depressed a minimum of two feet from the adjacent sidewalk grade for the Building Adjacent Zone to allow for adequate landscaping planting soil depth.
FIGURE 30.16.050-A
PUBLIC REALM STANDARDS
560 of 1291
561 of 1291
B. Site Planning: Building Setbacks.
1. Street Front and Street Side Setback Exceptions. No person shall construct, locate, or maintain within the space between the required public realm area and the build-to line established by ordinance or by this Title, any building, wall, fence, other improvement, or structure with the following exceptions:
a. Driveways and walkways, provided that a driveway shall be limited to that area reasonably necessary to provide safe and efficient ingress to and egress from off-street parking spaces located behind a setback area; b. An awning or canopy.
c. Flagpoles, limited to one per site;
d. Footings and public utility vaults if fully subterranean; e. Accent lighting for landscaping and buildings not to exceed 18 inches in height;
f. Necessary railings adjacent to stairways;
g. Retaining walls, planters or curbs which are not more than 24 inches in height above the ground surface existing at the time of construction; h. Subterranean parking garages including equipment, service, utility and storage areas may extend to the street property line provided such areas do not have any door or other opening to the outside along the street property line.
2. Ground Floor Non-Residential Street Setbacks. The following setback standards from the build-to line apply to all non-residential street frontages, and ground floor non-residential portions of mixed use buildings, in all TOD districts, as specified in Figures 30.16.050-B and 30.16.050-C, except for portions of a building fronting areas dedicated as Publicly Accessible Open Space (see GMC 16.050.A.1). The setback is measured from the build-to-line to the ground floor face of the building wall.
a. There is no minimum setback required from the build-to line. The maximum setback allowed is ten feet, except for publicly accessible open space adjacent to the public realm.
b. If a setback is provided, this area shall only be used for landscaping, active pedestrian areas (e.g., plazas, outdoor dining) and required circulation. c. Setback areas shall be accessible to the public at all hours on all days. d. Non-subterranean parking, loading, or storage areas are prohibited in the street setback.
e. Any setback area greater than two feet in width shall be composed of landscaping, planting beds, lawns, or decorative paving for walkways, driveways and outdoor seating areas.
f. Permanent screening walls or fences greater than three feet in height are prohibited within the setback.
562 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-B
NON-RESIDENTIAL USE SETBACK
563 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-C
NON-RESIDENTIAL USE SETBACK
3. Non-Residential Setbacks Above the Ground Floor. There is no additional setback requirement.
4. Ground Floor Residential Setback Standards. These standards are applicable for all ground floor residential uses adjacent to the public realm.
Setback requirements do not apply to façades that are directly adjacent to publicly accessible open space fronting the public realm. If a setback is required, the setback is measured from the build-to line to the ground floor face of the building wall.
a. At-Grade Ground Floor Residential Uses. These standards are applicable where the finished ground floor elevation of fronting residential uses is within 30 inches of the existing finished grade of the adjacent public realm, as specified in Figures 30.16.050-D and 30.16.050-E. 564 of 1291
i. A minimum five-foot average setback from the build-to line is required.
Pilasters, columns, or other architectural articulation projections, not exceeding 12 inches wide, may project a maximum of 12 inches from the adjacent building wall into the ground floor setback. The maximum setback allowed for at-grade ground floor residential uses is 10 feet. ii. The ground floor residential setback shall be fully landscaped with a combination of live plant material with varied heights, except for driveways, required walkways and private patio areas. Decorative paving shall be required for all walkways and driveways in this setback area.
iii. Not more than 50 percent of the required ground floor residential setback, excluding driveways and walkways, may be used towards private residential open space. Such private patios shall be a minimum of four feet in depth and 40 square feet. Walls and fences not greater than 42 inches in height shall be permitted for private residential open space patios within the street setback. A minimum 12-inch wide landscaping buffer with landscaping of various heights shall be provided between the build-to line and any private residential open space or patio.
iv. All Building Adjacent Zone areas directly adjacent to at-grade ground floor residential units shall be landscaped at-grade or within planters less than two feet in height, except for required walkways and building entrances.
565 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-D
AT-GRADE RESIDENTIAL USE SETBACK
566 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-E
AT-GRADE RESIDENTIAL USE SETBACK
567 of 1291
b. Above-Grade Ground Floor Residential Uses. These standards are applicable where the finished ground floor elevation of fronting residential units is between a minimum of 30 inches to a maximum of 48 inches above the existing adjacent public realm.
i. No setback is required from the build-to line for above-grade residential uses fronting the adjacent public realm. Such above-grade ground floor residential uses shall include stoops, porches, terraces, balconies, or a combination of these elements.
ii. The Building Adjacent Zone and any setback provided in front of steps, stoops, porches, terraces, or balconies for above-grade ground floor residential uses shall be landscaped at-grade or include decorative planters less than two feet in height except for required walkways, building entrances, stairs and ramps.
568 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-F
ABOVE-GRADE RESIDENTIAL USE SETBACK
569 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-G
ABOVE-GRADE RESIDENTIAL USE SETBACK
5. Allowed Setback Projections for Residential Uses Above At-grade Ground Floor Residential Uses.
a. Upper residential floors are permitted to project, cantilever, or extend above the first floor residential setback a maximum of 50 percent of the minimum five-foot average setback for at-grade ground floor uses (see GMC
30.16.050.B.4.a.i).
570 of 1291
C. Site Planning: Publicly Accessible Open Space. All new projects in any TOD Zoning District shall provide publicly accessible open space in compliance with the following standards:
1. Publicly accessible open space is required for development sites with frontage widths 60 feet or greater.
2. Development sites shall comply with the open space requirements in Table
30.16.050-A to provide a minimum percentage of publicly accessible open space based on gross site area.
a. Exceptions: For projects where a public easement is required in order to comply with the public realm setback standard, the area for the public easement may be excluded from the development site area to calculate the minimum required publicly accessible open space. For residential projects where a setback is required, the area for the required setback may be excluded from the development site area to calculate the minimum required publicly accessible open space.
b. Exclusions. The following shall not be included in the publicly accessible open space calculation:
i. Building Adjacent Zones.
ii. Pedestrian circulation areas (paths of travel, etc.) that exceed 10 percent of the total contiguous open space area.
iii. Private outdoor dining areas, separated by physical barriers such as railing or fencing, that exceed 25 percent of the publicly accessible open space area.
iv. Area occupied by subterranean garage ventilation or utilities (back flow preventers, electric meters, etc.).
3. A minimum of 85 percent of the required publicly accessible open space shall be in a contiguous space, either in the form of courtyard, plaza or paseo, which shall comply with the following dimension standards:
a. Publicly accessible open space courtyards and plazas shall have a minimum area of 1,200 square feet and minimum dimensions of 30 feet by 40 feet, except if the required area is less per Section 30.16.040.C. In such instances, the length of the courtyard or plaza shall be approximately the same as its width.
b. Paseos shall maintain a width of at least 20 feet but no greater than 30 feet. The directly adjacent building walls framing the paseo may not be greater than three times in elevation height than the width of the paseo.
The building above this height must be setback a minimum of 20 feet.
4. Courtyards, plazas and paseos shall be at the same elevation as the adjacent public realm and shall comply with the following accessibility standards:
a. Courtyards and plazas shall be adjacent and open to a public street and sidewalk of a primary building façade, on one or two-sides (courtyard or 571 of 1291
plaza) with an unobstructed opening dimension of 30 feet on any open side, unless as noted. An alley shall not be considered a public street. b. Paseos shall abut the public right-of-way, be physically and visually accessible from the public realm, and shall connect a public street with a different public street or alley. Vehicular access, loading, and parking uses shall be prohibited within the paseo during hours of public accessibility.
5. A minimum of 90 percent of all publicly accessible open space courtyards and plazas shall be open to the sky. Paseos, provided as publicly accessible open space, shall be open to the sky a minimum of 75 percent. No permanent building projections, including cantilevered overhangs or balconies, may occupy or project more than 24 inches into this space at any level of the building.
6. All publicly accessible open space shall comply with the design standards in Section 30.16.080.A.
Table 30.16.050-A
TRANSIT ORIENTED DEVELOPMENT DISTRICTS
PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Street Frontage or Site Acreage
Publicly Accessible Open Space
Requirement as Percentage of
Gross Site Area
Greater than 60 feet 10
Greater than two acres 15
572 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-H
PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACE
573 of 1291
D. Site Planning: Parking Design and Access Standards. This section regulates the location, ingress and egress, screening, and the total lot area allowed for parking.
Parking, loading, and vehicular circulation should be located to minimize its visibility from the public realm. All required parking shall comply with the standards in Chapter 30.32 (Parking and Loading). All off-street parking and loading areas located in the TOD zones shall be designed and developed consistent with the following standards contained in this section.
1. At-Grade Parking. The amount of at-grade parking permitted is determined by total street frontage length.
a. At-Grade Parking Area Calculation.
i. 100 feet or less of total street frontage. On development sites with 100 linear feet or less of street frontage, a maximum of 80 percent of the development site area may be occupied by at-grade parking. ii. More than 100 feet of total street frontage. On development sites with more than 100 feet street frontage, up to 60 percent of the development site area may be occupied by at-grade parking. b. Maximum permitted at-grade parking area shall include:
i. Stalls for vehicular parking and loading and circulation lanes. ii. Internal or covered parking access driveways.
iii. Parking related facilities such as those that provide ventilation for exhaust or mechanical equipment.
iv. Bicycle parking areas or facilities less than 200 square feet shall not be included in the maximum permitted at-grade parking area calculation.
c. Required screening for at-grade parking: Refer to Section 30.16.050.D.3.
2. Driveway Locations. Driveways for vehicular ingress and egress shall comply with the standards in this section. The number, width, and frequency of curb cuts and vehicular entries shall be limited to promote street wall continuity and reduce conflicts with pedestrians. Vehicular access should be designed such that it does not discourage or inhibit the pedestrian experience and circulation. a. All Development Sites.
i. The driveway shall be located no more than 25 feet from an interior lot line for properties located at street intersections to allow for adequate queuing and visibility.
ii. Shared or combined vehicular entries for parking and loading are permitted and shall not be wider than 22 feet to allow access in and out of a development site or building. Loading activities may not encroach on or interfere with the use of sidewalks, drive aisles, queuing areas, or parking areas.
574 of 1291
iii. All driveway entries shall comply with the screening requirements per Section 30.16.050.D.3 (At-Grade Parking Screening and Parking Garage Openings).
b. Parking Access from Alley. Vehicular access to a parking area shall be provided from an alley if the alley has an adequate width to provide such access in compliance with the Department of Public Works standards for alley width and capacity. For development sites without adequate alley access, see Section 30.16.050.D.2.c for parking access standards. i. For sites greater than one acre and with alley access and street frontage along San Fernando Road, an additional driveway may be permitted on San Fernando Road if required by the Director of Public Works.
575 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-I
PARKING ACCESS - DEVELOPMENT SITE WITH ALLEY ACCESS
c. Parking Access from Street for Lots without Alley Access. The following standards are applicable to all development sites where no adjacent, adequate alley is present:
576 of 1291
i. On mid-block development sites without an alley and with only one street frontage, parking access shall be from the street. ii. On through-block development sites without an alley and with two street frontages, parking access shall only be from one street frontage.
iii. On corner development sites without an alley and which have two street frontages, and which have less than one acre in total gross lot area and less than 200 feet of street frontage on either side, a single driveway is permitted on only one street frontage of the development site.
iv. On corner development sites without an alley and which have two street frontages, and which are greater than one acre in total gross lot area and have 200 feet or more of street frontage on either side, a driveway shall be permitted on each street frontage.
v. On corner development sites without an alley and which have three or more street frontages, a maximum of two driveways shall be permitted. Driveways on the same street frontage shall be separated a minimum of 120 feet between interior driveway edges.
577 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.050-J
PARKING ACCESS - DEVELOPMENT SITE WITHOUT ALLEY ACCESS
578 of 1291
3. Parking Screening and Parking Garage Openings.
a. Parking Screening. Except for parking structures for hospitals, all off-street parking and loading areas shall be fully integrated into the design and form of a project and shall be fully screened from public streets and publicly accessible open space to limit the visual and environmental impact of vehicular use areas on the public realm. The following screening standards are applicable to all new developments, except for parking structures for hospitals:
b. Active Ground Floor Use Screening for At-grade Parking. i. At-grade parking and loading on the ground floor level of new buildings shall be located behind active ground floor uses fronting the street, except for driveway areas and screening walls in compliance with Section 30.16.050.D.3.c, so that no portion of the parking facility shall be visible from adjacent public sidewalks or publicly accessible areas.
Active ground floor uses shall include residential and/or commercial uses, including building lobbies.
ii. All active ground floor uses along street facing building elevations used for parking screening shall have a minimum depth of 20 feet, as measured perpendicular to the street wall of a building, except for driveway areas and screening walls in compliance with Section
30.16.050.D.2.
iii. Active ground floor uses may include the following: utility rooms, stairs, elevators, storage, bike rooms, or service areas such as trash rooms, laundry, etc. and such areas shall not comprise more than 20 percent of the ground floor façade along the street frontage and the façade of these areas shall be integrated with the overall design of the project. c. Building At-Grade Parking Screening Walls.
i. All at-grade parking and loading areas not screened by active ground floor uses shall be screened using an integrated façade design treatment so that the parking and loading areas are not visible from any adjacent public sidewalk or publicly accessible area. ii. Street fronting screening walls shall not exceed 20 percent or 20 linear feet in cumulative length along the street-facing lot frontage, whichever is less, where parking vehicular access is permitted. For sites larger than one acre, only the 20 percent maximum shall apply. The screening wall frontage shall include architectural form, massing, articulation, material, color, and other treatments such as a vertical living green wall that result in a unified façade composition with the building.
d. Screening for Above-Ground Parking.
All above-ground parking shall be fully screened along all street frontages by residential or non-residential architectural facades, except for any future parking structures for Glendale Transit Center and in the TOD II 579 of 1291
zone. Such parking structures shall comply with GMC Sections 30.32.110 and 30.34.120.
e. Parking Garage Openings. All entrances to parking garages shall comply with the following:
i. Garage doors or gates shall be provided at all driveways, except for hospital parking structures.
ii. Garage doors and gates shall be set back a minimum of three feet from the face of a building, except for garage doors fronting alleys, which shall be set back a minimum of five feet from the alley and comply with GMC 30.32.100.F.
iii. Garage doors and gates shall be integrated into the architectural design of the building or wall to reduce the aesthetic impact on the pedestrian realm.
iv. Garage doors and gates shall be a maximum 50 percent opaque. v. Residential garage doors and gates shall be closed at all times when vehicles are not entering or exiting.
vi. Electronically activated garage door or gate access control key pads, intercom, or card reader or security systems shall be located adjacent to ingress and egress drive lanes and shall not obstruct the vehicular or pedestrian path of travel.
vii. Parking garage entrances located on streets frontages shall provide audio alarm systems to warn pedestrians that a vehicle is exiting. f. Parking Structures for Hospital Uses in the TOD II District. All new parking structures for hospital uses in the TOD II District shall comply with the parking structure standards in Sections 30.32.110 and 30.34.120. 580 of 1291
30.16.060 TOD District Massing and Scale.
A. Massing and Scale: Modulation of Height
1. Step-backs. Step-back requirements create an appropriate scale of buildings, reduce building massing, shape transitions between neighborhoods, and support high-quality architecture and urban design through modulation and variation in façade length. Buildings greater than 50 feet in height shall provide a step-back for all floors with finished floor elevations above 50 feet on street-facing elevations. Upper floor step-backs are not required for buildings 50 feet or less in height and elevations directly adjacent to publicly accessible open space. a. The required step-back shall have a minimum average of six feet (see Figure 30.16.060-A).
b. The step-back shall be measured from the adjoining façade of a streetfacing building wall below.
FIGURE 30.16.060-A
UPPER FLOOR STEP-BACKS
581 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.060-B
NO STEP-BACK FOR BUILIDNGS LESS THAN 50 FEET IN HEIGHT AND
BUILDINGS ADJACENT TO PUBLICY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACE
B. Massing and Scale: Façade Modulation.
1. Vertical Modulation. Building layers comprised of a base, middle and top help to break up the massing and clearly express building function and uses. The base is composed of the ground floor. The middle is the portion of the building between the second floor and the upper floor step-back. Middle floors are permitted to step-back. The top is composed of the uppermost floor of a building.
a. Ground floor height. Non-residential ground floors shall have a minimum floor-to-floor height of 15 feet. There is no minimum height for residential ground floors.
b. Each street-facing façade for buildings four floors or greater shall be composed of a clearly distinguishable base, middle, and top. Buildings three floors or less are not required to provide a differentiated base, middle, and top. For buildings six floors or greater, the top two floors may constitute the top of the building.
c. Additional articulation of the base, middle, and top shall be achieved by incorporating at least two of the following:
i. Changes in façade materials as identified in Section 30.16.060.A (Architectural Elements).
ii. Changes in type, size, number, and arrangement of façade doors and windows, permitting no more than two different types, sizes and arrangements of façade doors and windows for each base, middle, and top element of a building.
582 of 1291
iii. Use of functional and/or decorative horizontal façade projections or recesses at transition lines between the base, middle, and top. iv. Changes in floor-to-floor heights at the second floor or above.
FIGURE 30.16.060-C
TRIPARTITE VERTICAL MODULATION
2. Horizontal Modulation. Modulation across a building façade helps to break up the massing horizontally. The following standards relate to required horizontal modulation for both street-facing and interior elevations. a. Street-facing Horizontal Modulation.
i. Each street facing or publicly accessible open space façade for building elevations greater than 60 feet in length shall comply with the horizontal modulation standards below. Horizontal modulation standards apply to all portions of street-facing facades except for upper floor step-backs. Horizontal modulation is not required for street-facing facades less than 60 feet in length.
ii. At least 30 percent of the area of a street-facing facade shall be divided into façade planes that are offset by at least a minimum average depth of 24 inches from the primary façade. Façade area used to meet this standard may be recessed behind, or project out from, the primary façade plane and may be in one continuous section or a combination of sections across the façade. Any stepback of the upper floor required per Section 30.16.050.A.1 (Modulation of Height, Step-backs) shall not be included in the façade plane horizontal modulation calculation.
FIGURE 30.16.060-D 583 of 1291
STREET FACING HORIZONTAL MODULATION
iii. For street-facing facades with building elevations 225 feet or greater in length, a minimum of one building recess or separation shall be provided, in addition to the horizontal modulation required above (ii).
The recess or separation shall be a minimum width and depth of 10 percent of the overall building length and shall extend the height of the building façade from the adjacent grade to the step-back floor, if required.
FIGURE 30.16.060-E
STREET FACING HORIZONTAL MODULATION
584 of 1291
b. Interior Horizontal Facade Modulation For all interior building frontages perpendicular to street facades and greater than 60 feet in length and two stories in height, the following applies:
i. Modulation. The façade facing the interior property line and perpendicular to the street frontage shall be offset from the interior wall facade a minimum of 30 feet in length and a minimum of two feet in depth.
ii. Articulation. Façade treatment and materials of street-facing elevations shall wrap around each interior building corner a minimum depth of 25 percent of the total interior façade length measured from the corner of the building or 30 feet in length, whichever is greater. The wrapped façade materials shall terminate at an interior corner junction to alleviate the appearance of a wallpaper application.
iii. Unbroken, solid, blank walls greater than 30 feet in length along an interior façade elevation are prohibited.
FIGURE 30.16.060-F
INTERIOR HORIZONTAL FAÇADE MODULATION
585 of 1291
c. Corner Elements. Corner elements enhance the aesthetic quality of a building and can provide a visual terminus or prominence at a primary entrance. An enhanced corner creates variation in building massing and provides an opportunity to establish a sense of place within the public realm through the incorporation of key design features.
i. Applicability. For buildings located at the intersections of two or more streets, a corner element shall be required at such intersection. ii. The corner element shall be differentiated by height and design features from the primary massing of the building.
iii. In lieu of the above, plazas may be used to create a unique corner feature and shall be developed per the standards outlined in Section
30.16.070 for publicly accessible open space.
FIGURE 30.16.060-G
CORNER ELEMENTS
586 of 1291
30.16.070 TOD District Architectural Elements. All new developments and all façade remodels shall comply with the following architectural element standards:
A. Architectural Elements: Façade Materials and Colors. Materials are a significant feature of design and are used to establish a unique aesthetic quality and character of a building. Materials are essential to diminish the massing and scale of a building and reinforce the base-middle-top principles of quality design. Materials at the ground floor, or base, shall reinforce the pedestrian character of the public realm and employ materials that are of a human-scale. Except where portions of a building directly abut an existing building on- or off-site, all facades shall comply with the following materials and colors standards:
1. All building elevations, including those walls fronting the public realm, publicly accessible open space, and alleys, shall be treated equally with materials to provide textural and color variation.
2. All exterior wall facades shall have a minimum of two cladding materials. All cladding materials shall terminate at an interior corner junction.
3. All projects shall use more than one finish color. Contrasting colors for windows, doors and trim are highly encouraged.
4. Facades shall include colors or material changes that correlate with massing and scale, and façade modulation standards. Changes at building base, middle, or top divisions or with horizontally articulated façade recesses or projections shall be emphasized.
5. Non-durable synthetic stucco, such as Exterior Insulating Finishing Systems (EIFS), shall be prohibited at the ground floor level for all buildings. Stucco shall be prohibited at the ground floor level for all residential buildings, and a maximum of fifty percent of stucco shall be permitted at the ground floor level for non-residential buildings and mixed-use buildings with non-residential uses at the ground floor.
6. Above the ground floor, no more than 60 percent of any building total façade area shall be clad with synthetic stucco-EIFS or stucco.
7. All vents, gutters, downspouts, flashing, etc., shall be painted to match the color of the adjacent surface. All new buildings shall feature internal leaders for roof drainage and architecturally integrated vents on all street-facing elevations. On street-facing or alley-facing elevations, all exterior vents shall be integrated into soffits or ceilings of balconies, where such features exist.
B. Architectural Elements: Storefront Transparency. All non-residential façades shall be designed to engage the street and generate activity and transparency between the pedestrian realm and businesses. This section does not apply to residential façades, and to broadcasting studio and indoor support facilities (production), warehouse, light manufacturing and heavy manufacturing buildings. All non-residential façades shall comply with the following transparency standards:
1. Façades that face the street or publicly accessible open space are required to provide a minimum of 75 percent transparency along Central Avenue, San Fernando Road, and Los Feliz Road, and a minimum of 60 percent transparency on all other streets, as specified below:
587 of 1291
a. No dark-tinted or opaque glazing for any required wall opening (i.e., doors and windows, except driveways) along street level facades is allowed. Darktinted and opaque windows shall be defined as having less than a minimum visible transmittance of 70 percent, including any tint, treatment, or application on glazing in accordance with standards established by the National Fenestration Rating Council.
b. Spandrel glass, façade mounted public art or living landscaped green walls, or combination thereof, may be used to count towards a maximum of 25 percent of the required transparency standard.
2. The following shall be used to determine the required façade transparency area:
a. The horizontal length of the frontage shall only include the HVACconditioned non-residential portions of the façade that are located on the ground floor and front a street or publicly accessible open space. b. The horizontal length measurement excludes any ground floor residential use frontages, utility rooms, stairs and elevator shafts, loading, parking access driveways, or garage doors.
c. The vertical height of the façade frontage used for calculating the transparency requirement shall be measured between the adjacent finished floor and the finished ceiling.
d. All window and door parts including the frame, jamb, head, sill, mullions, muntins, and glazing shall comprise an opening. Any decorative window or door trim around the window or door frame shall be not included as part of the opening calculation.
3. Where it is infeasible to provide glazing, such as a parking garage building screening wall, trash room, mechanical room, or utility room, landscaping with a minimum dimension of 18-inches in depth and a width equivalent to 75 percent of the wall, where door access is not required, shall be provided to soften the appearance of a blank wall on the ground floor. Landscaping shall have a minimum mature height of four feet within three years of planting or climbing vines to achieve a wall screening with a minimum wall coverage of 75 percent. 588 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.070-A
NON-RESIDENTIAL STOREFRONT TRANSPARENCY STANDARDS
C. Architectural Elements: Building Entries and Lobbies. Building entries and lobbies provide visual cues to building entrances and landmarks for pedestrians.
Entries and lobbies can be used to generate visual interest and modulation in a building façade. Building entries and lobbies shall be designed to create visual reference points that emphasize the building entrance in compliance with the following standards:
589 of 1291
1. All Building Entries and Lobby Entrances. The following standards apply to all ground floors entries of a new building:
a. Entries and lobby entrances shall incorporate at least one design feature such as a canopy, marquee, or other architectural feature that creates visual prominence.
b. The primary entrance path to a building lobby entrance shall be distinct and unique from the adjacent public realm paving.
c. Primary building entries shall be directly accessible from the public realm or publicly accessible open space. Primary entrance(s) that front publicly accessible open space shall have direct sightlines and a path of continuous and unobstructed pedestrian access to the public realm. d. Primary building entries are prohibited from alleys, driveways, at-grade parking lots, or parking structures.
e. Wheelchair ramps or wheelchair lifts (elevator), when required, shall be architecturally integrated into the design of the building and site plan.
FIGURE 30.16.070-B
NON-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING ENTRIES
2. Residential Entries. The following standards apply to the ground floor residential portions of street-facing or publicly accessible open space-facing elevations of residential or mixed-use buildings. For residential uses, the primary entrance of a building is defined as a door or doors which provide primary access to a ground floor residential lobby. Individual entries are also permitted for private residential units.
a. Multi-family residential building lobbies shall be located at the ground floor and directly accessible from the public realm, publicly accessible open space, or residential setback.
590 of 1291
b. Individual unit entries fronting the adjacent public realm shall be setback a minimum of five feet from the build-to line.
c. Individual residential entries are permitted to be accessed directly from the public realm and shall have a minimum walkway, ramp, and/or stairs width of four feet for single unit entries.
d. Entry porches, stoops, and terraces, not including stairs, for individual entries, shall be a minimum of 20 square feet.
591 of 1291
FIGURE 30.16.070-B
RESIDENTIAL ENTRIES
592 of 1291
D. Architectural Elements: Canopies, Awnings and Marquees. Canopies, awnings and marquees function as an extension of the public sidewalk, providing shade, shelter from inclement weather, and a sense of enclosure to the public realm. Such elements also provide a visual reference to entrances or other important facade elements. All new canopy, awning and marquees installations shall comply with the following standards:
1. A minimum of 50 percent of the street elevations for ground floor non-residential uses shall include canopies, awnings or marquees, where the non-residential tenant space is directly abutting the public realm or the publicly accessible open space, except when the non-residential uses are recessed from the floors above by an arcade a minimum of six feet.
2. Public realm fronting canopies, awnings or marquees shall be installed a minimum of eight feet and a maximum of 14 feet above the public realm grade, measured from the bottom of the canopy or awning to the adjacent grade.
3. Ground floor public realm fronting canopies, awnings or marquees are permitted to project beyond street front property lines. Canopy supporting posts or columns are prohibited within the public realm.
4. No more than two materials and two colors shall be utilized for all new canopies, awnings and marquees.
5. Interior-illuminated vinyl awnings are prohibited. Any integrated light fixture within a canopy or awning shall direct light downward toward the sidewalk or facade.
E. Architectural Elements: Balconies. Balconies provide important outdoor private space for residential units and visual interest to façade designs, in addition to depth and rhythm. All new balconies shall comply with the following standards:
1. All balconies shall be recessed into the adjacent building façade plane. The maximum projection shall be 50 percent of the balcony’s full depth or five feet, whichever is less.
2. No balconies shall project over the public right-of-way or public realm sidewalk zone.
3. All balconies shall include facias and soffits. See GMC 30.16.070.A.7 for venting systems built into the soffits.
F. Architectural Elements: Fenestration. Fenestration is the arrangement, proportioning, and design of windows and doors in a building. Fenestration patterns foster an identifiable building character and promote quality design. Window designs enhance façade modulation and emphasize changes in scale and materials. All fenestration patterns, including any glazed openings, window, and door frames shall correlate with massing and scale standards in Section 30.16.050.
All new window and door openings shall comply with the following standards:
1. Residential. For residential uses, a minimum of 50 percent of all window and door openings between the ground floor and 50 feet above grade shall be recessed or project a minimum of two inches. The recess shall be measured from the outer face of the window or door glazing to the outer edge of the 593 of 1291
primary façade cladding surface. Internal grid windows and EIFs clad window trim are prohibited.
2. Non-Residential.
a. Uninterrupted ground floor storefront or curtain wall window and door systems shall be limited to a maximum of 50 feet in length. b. Storefront systems and curtain walls shall be recessed a minimum of six inches from the primary façade, columns, or pilasters of the building where buildings are constructed at the build-to line.
G. Architectural Elements: Freestanding Walls, Fences and Gates. Freestanding walls, fences, and gates define and screen yards, walkways, and outdoors areas.
Design of all freestanding walls, fences, gates shall minimize the visual impact of parking facilities, provide privacy, and security. As such, the design of such barriers must be considered when addressing the streetscape experience. All walls, fences, and gates shall comply with Chapter 30.30.010 and the following standards:
1. The design of all freestanding fences, walls, gates, and garage doors shall match and be integrated with the overall building design and shall be a maximum 50% solid, when visible from the public realm, with the exception of fences, walls and gates adjacent to alleys that may exceed the 50% maximum.
2. All freestanding exterior gates or fences shall be located a minimum of two feet behind any build-to line or the adjacent street-fronting building façade plane, whichever is setback farther from the street front or side street property line.
3. All freestanding at-grade parking lot screening walls and fences shall be a minimum of four feet and a maximum of eight feet in height.
4. All driveway gates fronting the public realm shall be equipped with vehicle activated warning beacons, bells and light devices.
5. Chain link fences are prohibited.
H. Architectural Elements: Trash Enclosures. Trash enclosures are necessary to ensure that trash areas are properly screened from public view. Trash enclosures shall comply with the Section 30.30.030 and the following standards:
1. Trash collection areas shall be located away or screened from adjacent streets.
2. Where possible, trash enclosure shall be enclosed within the building.
3. Trash enclosures are not permitted adjacent to any publicly accessible open space area or public realm.
4. Sizes and dimensions of trash enclosures shall be regulated by the Building and Safety and Integrated Waste Divisions.
I. Architectural Elements: Utilities. Utilities are necessary to the function and operation of any building. They can also, when not properly integrated, detract from the aesthetic quality of an urban environment or pose hazards to pedestrians. All utility installations shall comply with the following standards:
1. All mechanical equipment, including electrical and gas meters, shall be screened from view from the public realm and publicly accessible open space.
The screening system shall be integrated with the overall site building design. 594 of 1291
2. Gas, water, and electrical meter panels are prohibited to project into the public realm. Gas, water, and electrical utilities shall be integrated into the building facade and not freestanding.
3. Electrical transformers shall be either underground, enclosed within the building, or located adjacent to alley wherever present.
4. If electrical transformers are located fronting the public realm, transformers shall be enclosed and incorporated as part of the building façade or screened by a combination of landscaping and decorative walls. Landscaping shall be composed of tall shrubs with a minimum mature height of four feet within three years of planting or climbing vines to achieve a wall screening with a minimum wall coverage of 75 percent.
5. Electrical transformers, mechanical equipment, backflow prevention devices, and other utility equipment shall not be located within or directly adjacent to a designated publicly accessible open space, or within the building adjacent zone.
J. Architectural Elements: Outdoor Lighting. Lighting can create a unique aesthetic, highlight the design of a building, provide Illumination for business operations, and enhance safety for pedestrians and other users, while minimizing impacts of light glare, pollution and trespass. All new lighting shall comply with the following standards:
1. Outdoor light fixtures shall be fully shielded from the top so that light is directed downward and confined to the development site. Outdoor light shall not spill over onto adjacent properties or the public realm.
2. Lighting shall not exceed the maximum permitted building height of the applicable TOD district. Lighting for uncovered parking areas, vehicle accessways and walkways shall not exceed a height of sixteen (16) feet, and the current Glendale Building & Safety Code.
K. Architectural Elements: Rooftop Equipment. All rooftop equipment shall comply with Section 30.30.020.B. Rooftop equipment that is not able to be concealed within the architecture of the building shall be located a minimum of 20 feet away from any building edge and screened from view behind a parapet wall or through the use of screens. Solar energy equipment, as defined in this title, shall not be considered rooftop equipment.
L. Solar Energy Equipment. All solar energy equipment must comply with Section
30.30.050 (Solar energy equipment).
30.16.080 TOD District Open Space and Landscaping.
A. Publicly Accessible Open Space Standards. Well-designed open spaces are vital to an urban environment to provide relief and landscaping in contrast to the built forms and streets. The following standards have been identified to encourage the creation of publicly accessible open space, as well as outdoor activity areas in conjunction with private development.
595 of 1291
1. Applicability. All new development on lots with a street frontage greater than 60 feet in width shall provide the minimum amount of publicly accessible open space pursuant to Section 30.16.050.C (TOD District Site Planning).
2. General Standards.
a. The design of publicly accessible open space open space shall be integrated into the overall design concept of new development and surrounding buildings, and any existing open space.
b. A minimum of seventy-five percent of the required publicly accessible open space shall be level with the adjacent public realm zone. The remainder shall not be greater than three feet above the adjacent public realm zone’s grade.
c. A combination of paved and/or landscaped open space seating, gathering, or circulation areas are permitted in the publicly accessible open space except not greater than 10 percent of the contiguous open space shall be composed of circulation areas (paths of travel, including ADA ramps). d. The publicly accessible open space shall be open and accessible to the public at a minimum from 7 AM to 10 PM. The publicly accessible open space shall be posted with signage identifying the open space as a public amenity and the hours of accessibility.
e. Security fences and gates shall not obstruct access from the public realm during open hours. Fences and walls shall be more than seventy-five (75) percent clear and visually transparent (i.e., not made of opaque, tinted or etched glass or other similar materials or obstructed by landscaping) and shall not be greater than six feet in height.
f. Raised planters located along the perimeter of the required publicly accessible open space shall not exceed 25% of the linear perimeter length and shall be a maximum of 24 inches in height.
g. Applicants will be required to enter into a statutory development agreement or covenant with the City, specifying that that any required publicly accessible open space area shall comply with the intent and standards of the open space regulations.
2. Publicly Accessible Open Space Courtyards and Plazas. Publicly accessible open space courtyards and plazas are outdoor rooms designed for public use and are defined by surrounding buildings and/or streets. The primary functions of a courtyard or plaza is to provide an opportunity for people to engage in diverse social interactions and activities, establish public spaces for relief and relaxation, expand and reinforce the public realm, and contribute to the livability of the Tropico TOD Districts. During the overall project design process, the proposed use and design of courtyards and plazas should be explicitly defined and shall comply with the established design standards. a. Materials.
i. Courtyards and plazas shall be of high-quality materials. Careful detailing shall include consideration of materials, their durability and appearance. No more than 25 percent of the area may be paved in standard (non-decorative) concrete. 596 of 1291
ii. Street-level facade materials and colors standards (see Section
30.16.060.A) shall be applied to façades that front onto publicly accessible open space.
b. Landscaping.
i. At least 25 percent of the courtyard surface shall be landscaped with live vegetation. All landscaped areas shall contain a combination of low, medium, and tall plant materials.
ii. A minimum of one 36-inch box shade tree shall be provided per 600 square feet of public open space in a planting area of at least six feet in length, six feet in width, and three feet depth. At the time of planting, trees shall be at least 12-feet tall with a two-inch caliper, six inches above the topmost root.
iii. A maximum of 25 percent of the required landscaping shall be in raised planters or pots; the remaining planting areas shall be at the same elevation as the adjacent paving. Planted areas may berm up within the perimeter at no more than a 3:1 slope. Planting and soils area shall have a minimum length, width, diameter and depth of 24 inches. Where a tree is planted the minimum area and depth shall be increased to 48 inches by 48 inches by 36 inches. Planters shall have a 12-inch ledge for seating.
iv. The property owner shall maintain open space and landscaping in an orderly and healthy condition, free of weeds and debris, within the publicly accessible open space.
c. Amenities.
i. Seating at the ratio of one seat per 200 square feet of courtyard or plaza area shall be provided, in addition to any permitted outdoor dining, in dispersed locations throughout the space. Seating shall be either movable chairs, or fixed seats or benches, where such seats shall be 18 lineal inches each. Movable seating is strongly encouraged. This requirement shall not include the seating provided by the planter ledge.
ii. Storefront and unit entries fronting on the open space shall be designed and lighted to address safety and avoid unsafe conditions such as limited visibility, poor illumination, or dark corners. iii. A minimum of 50 percent of the open space shall have access to sunlight for the duration of daylight hours. Freestanding shading devices (single installation on the ground, such as trellis, patio covers, etc.) shall be permitted within the open space, provided no more than 25 percent of the open space is covered.
iv. Open space courtyards and plazas shall be well-illuminated at night with pedestrian-scaled lighting to address public safety. Fixtures may include low-level lights, overhead lights attached to building walls, lowlevel bollard lights or overhead wall-mounted fixture for a well illuminated area.
597 of 1291
v. A special feature (public art, water feature, specimen tree, or other such focal point) shall be provided for each publicly accessible open space plaza or courtyard.
3. Publicly Accessible Open Space Paseos. Publicly accessible open space paseos are pedestrian passages that serve as a break in larger blocks, provide mid-block crossings, or access to interior courtyards. Paseos are typically separated from vehicular traffic thus enhancing the pedestrian experience regarding safety and reduced vehicular noise. When paseos are adjacent to large buildings or structures, the sense of enclosure and relative shade allows for paseos to be an attractive alternative to street retail. Paseos should comply with the following design standards:
a. Materials.
i. Decorative paving compatible with the colors and materials of the adjacent structures shall be installed with no more than 50 percent of the paseo being paved in standard (non-decorative) concrete. ii. Street-level facade material and color standards (see Section
30.16.060.A) shall be applied to façades that front onto publicly accessible open space.
b. Landscaping.
i. A minimum of 10% of the paseo area shall be landscaped with live landscaping. All landscaped areas shall contain a combination of low, medium, and tall plant materials.
ii. A minimum of one 24-inch box shade tree of a two-inch caliper trunk diameter, 10 feet in height, shall be installed per 750 square feet of paseo area.
iii. Planting and soils area shall have a minimum length, width, diameter and depth of 24 inches. Where a tree is planted the minimum area and depth shall be increased to 48 inches by 48 inches by 36 inches. iv. The property owner shall maintain open space and landscaping in an orderly and healthy condition, free of weeds and debris, within the publicly accessible open space.
c. Amenities.
i. Seating at the ratio of one seat per 200 square feet of paseo area shall be provided, in addition to any permitted outdoor dining, in dispersed locations throughout the space. Seating shall be either movable chairs, or fixed seats or benches, where such seats shall be construed to be 18 lineal inches each. Movable seating is strongly encouraged.
ii. All storefronts, unit entries or stoops fronting onto the paseo shall be designed and lighted to address safety and avoid unsafe conditions such as limited visibility, poor illumination, or dark corners. iii. A minimum of 75 percent of the open space shall have access to sunlight for the duration of daylight hours. Freestanding shading devices (single installation on the ground, such as trellis, patio covers, 598 of 1291
etc.) shall be permitted within the open space, provided no more than 25 percent of the open space is covered.
iv. Open space shall be well-illuminated at night with pedestrian-scaled lighting to address public safety. Fixtures may include low-level lights, overhead lights attached to building walls, low-level bollard lights or overhead wall-mounted fixture for a well illuminated area. v. A special feature (public art, water feature, specimen tree, or other such focal point) shall be provided for each publicly accessible open space paseo.
B. Residential Open Space Standards. Additional open space is required for mixeduse and multi-family residential developments to ensure a quality of life standard, and access to light and air for building residents, occupants, and guests.
1. Applicability. New residential development shall meet the requirements of Section 30.16.080.A (Publicly Accessible Open Space) and shall also provide additional outdoor space equal to a minimum of 140 square feet per residential and/or live work unit.
2. General Standards.
a. Required residential open space may be provided as: publicly accessible open space (above the minimum requirement), common open space (interior courtyards, paseos, and rooftop decks), private outdoor space (balconies, decks, and patios), or a combination thereof. b. A minimum of 10 percent of the required open space for residential development shall be located at the ground floor.
3. Residential Common Open Space. Common open space provided in the form of interior courtyards or rooftop decks shall be designed as one or two large, contiguous spaces and not many scattered, separate spaces and shall comply with the following:
a. Open space must be designed for a mix of active and passive uses and/or activities.
c. Seating is to be provided through the use of portable or fixed site furniture or ledges along planters and/or fountains.
d. Open space shall be inviting and well-illuminated at night with pedestrianscaled lighting to address public safety. Fixtures may include low-level lights and overhead lights attached to building walls.
4. Residential Private Open Space. Private open space provided in the form of balconies, decks, terraces, or patios shall comply with the following:
a. Private open space shall have a minimum area of 40 square feet and a minimum length or width of four feet. Such private outdoor space shall be directly accessible and an integral part of the dwelling unit which it serves. b. Balconies must comply with the design standards of Chapter 30.16.070.F.
5. Residential Landscaping Standards.
a. A minimum of 20 percent of the total required open space for residential developments provided in the form of common open space must be 599 of 1291
landscaped with live landscaping. All landscaped areas shall contain a combination of low, medium, and tall plant materials.
b. A minimum of one 24-inch box shade tree of a two-inch caliper trunk diameter, 10 feet in height, shall be provided per 1,000 square feet of residential common open space.
c. Permanent landscaping shall consist of landscaped areas at the ground level or in planters having a minimum length, width, diameter, and depth of 24 inches, except where a tree is required, at which point the area and depth shall be increased to a minimum of 48 inches by 48 inches by 36 inches.
d. Landscaping is required in the setback area for individual residential units on the ground floor, except for where a walkway, ramp, stoop, or stairs are directly adjacent to the public realm. Landscaping shall be of various heights to screen the residential unit walls and stoops.
SECTION 2. Section 30.10.010 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.10.010 Zones—Glendale.
In order to carry out the purposes and provisions herein stated, the city is divided into several zones, known and designated as follows:
A. Residential Zones.
ROS Residential Open Space Zone
R1R Restricted Residential Zone
R1 Residential Zone
R-3050 Moderate Density Residential Zone
R-2250 Medium Density Residential Zone
R-1650 Medium-High Density Residential Zone
R-1250 High Density Residential Zone
B. Commercial Zones.
C1 Neighborhood Commercial Zone
C2 Community Commercial Zone
C3 Commercial Service Zone
CR Commercial Retail Zone
CPD Commercial Planned Development Zone
CH Commercial Hillside Zone
CA Commercial Auto Zone
C. Industrial Zones.
IND Industrial Zone
T Transportation Zone
600 of 1291
D. Mixed Use Zones.
IMU Industrial/Commercial Mixed Use Zone
IMU-R Industrial/Commercial-Residential Mixed Use Zone
SFMU Commercial/Residential Mixed Use Zone
DSP Downtown Specific Plan Zone
E. Special Use Districts.
SR Special Recreation Zone
CE Commercial Equestrian Zone
CEM Cemetery Zone
MS Medical Service Zone
F. Transit Oriented Development (TOD) Districts.
TOD Transit Oriented Development District I
TOD Transit Oriented Development District II
E. Overlay Zones.
PRD Planned Residential Development Overlay Zone
H Horse Overlay Zone
P Parking Overlay Zone
PS Parking Structure Overlay Zone
PPD Precise Plan of Design Overlay Zone
HD Historic District Overlay Zone
SECTION 3. Section 30.30.010 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.30.010 Fences and walls.
A. Fences and Walls in Residential, Mixed Use and TOD Zones.
1. In the ROS, R1, R1R, R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, DSP, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zones, no fence or wall shall be electrically charged or made of any sharp-edged materials, barbed wire, razor wire, chicken wire or fiber glass.
2. Fences and walls over three (3) feet in height are subject to Chapter 30.47 in addition to the following requirements in ROS, R1R, and R1 zones:
a. Materials. Fences and walls shall be made of wood, masonry, decorative metal (for example, wrought iron), and other decorative materials approved by the director of community development; and
b. In addition to the above materials, chain-link may be permitted if screened from view from adjacent parcels by vegetation. Chain-link, without vegetation, shall be permitted for tennis courts and other recreational facilities. Chain-link shall not be permitted if visible from the public street immediately adjacent to the property.
601 of 1291
B. Retaining Walls and Cribwalls in the ROS and R1R Zones. The following regulations shall apply in the ROS and R1R zones:
1. Materials. All exposed retaining walls and cribwalls which may be visible to surrounding properties or streets shall be constructed with stone, textured poured concrete, or textured decorative colored masonry block with colored grout where grout is used to blend with the color of the natural hillside.
2. Height restrictions.
a. Retaining walls are subject to the following height restrictions in addition to the height restriction in Section 30.11.070
i. Retaining walls which have a toe within fifteen (15) feet of a street front and street side property line and run essentially parallel to the street may have a maximum exposed height of five (5) feet at any point along the wall. An additional two (2) feet in height is permitted when the wall is faced with a decorative masonry or stone, subject to approval of the director of community development. A maximum of two (2) successive walls are permitted, provided that they are at least five (5) feet apart and have a slope between walls not to exceed 2:1 horizontal to vertical steepness.
ii. Retaining walls which are hidden from view from the public street by primary or accessory structures that are upslope from their public street access may have a maximum exposed height of fifteen (15) feet at any point along the wall. Successive hidden retaining walls may not exceed a total combined exposed height of fifteen (15) feet. iii. Retaining walls which do not meet the criteria of subsection i. or ii. above may have a maximum exposed height of five (5) feet at any point along the wall except within five (5) feet of an interior property line, retaining walls are limited to three (3) feet in height. Retaining walls with exposed height are limited to a maximum of three (3) successive walls, provided that they are at least five (5) feet apart and have a slope between walls not to exceed 2:1 horizontal to vertical steepness.
b. Landscaped cribwalls are subject to the following height restrictions:
i. Landscaped cribwalls necessary solely for street construction may have a maximum exposed height of ten (10) feet at any point along the wall. Successive landscaped cribwalls in such a situation may not exceed ten (10) feet in combined height;
ii. Landscaped cribwalls which are hidden from view from the public street by primary or accessory structures that are upslope from their public street access may have a maximum height of ten (10) feet at any point along the walls. Successive hidden landscaped cribwalls may not exceed ten (10) feet in combined height;
iii. Landscaped cribwalls which are located at the toe of a fill slope that is at least forty (40) feet from any street may have a maximum height of ten (10) feet at any point along the wall;
602 of 1291
iv. Cribwalls which do not meet the criteria of subsection i., ii., or iii. above may have a maximum exposed height of five (5) feet at any point along the wall. A maximum of three (3) successive walls are permitted, provided that they are at least five (5) feet apart and have a slope between walls not to exceed 2:1 horizontal to vertical steepness; and
v. Cribwalls under three (3) feet in height may be located within interior setback areas. Retaining walls under eight (8) feet in visible height may be located no closer than five (5) feet to any interior property line.
C. Fences and Walls in the CH Zone. The following regulations shall apply in the CH zone:
1. Materials. All exposed retaining walls and cribwalls which may be visible to surrounding properties or streets shall be constructed with stone, textured poured concrete, or textured decorative colored masonry block with colored grout where grout is used to blend with the color of the natural hillside; and
2. Height restrictions. Retaining walls and cribwalls shall have a maximum exposed height of five (5) feet at any point along the wall. A maximum of three (3) successive walls are permitted, provided that they are at least five (5) feet apart and have a slope between walls not to exceed 2:1 horizontal to vertical steepness and that they do not exceed a combined height of ten (10) feet.
Fences and garden walls located on top of retaining walls shall have a maximum height of six (6) feet above the actual retaining portion of the retaining walls.
D. Retaining Walls in the R1 Zone. Retaining walls in the R1 zone which are constructed below a down slope wall of a building shall not exceed a height of five (5) feet. See Section 30.11.070 for additional restrictions in required setbacks.
E. Additional Regulations in the H Overlay Zone. For criteria for fences and walls within the street front setback and the street side setback in the H overlay zone, see Section 30.21.040
F. Exhibits for retaining Walls in ROS and R1R Zones. See Exhibits 1 and 2 below. 603 of 1291
604 of 1291
SECTION 4. Section 30.30.020 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.30.020 Rooftop equipment.
A. Regulations in ROS, R1, and R1R Zones. No rooftop equipment shall be permitted in the ROS, R1R and R1 zones. Permitted rooftop equipment may be replaced in its existing location. However, replacement shall not mean additional or 605 of 1291
larger equipment, or exposed ducting. Solar energy equipment, as defined in this title, shall not be considered rooftop equipment.
B. Regulations in the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, C1, C2, C3, CR, CPD, CR, MS, DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU, and TOD Zones. Rooftop equipment shall be completely enclosed on all sides or screened from view of public rights-of-way in the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, C1, C2, C3, CR, MS, DSP, CPD, CR, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zones. Solar energy equipment, as defined in this title, shall not be considered rooftop equipment.
SECTION 5. Section 30.30.030 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.30.030 Trash collection areas.
The following regulations shall apply in all zones except for the CEM, R1, R1R, ROS, P overlay and SR zones.
A. General Provisions. Trash collection areas shall be enclosed within a building or screened with masonry walls having a minimum height of five and one-half (5½) feet and with an evenly distributed semi-enclosed roof covering at least forty (40) percent of the trash collection area. If a trash collection area is to be within fifty (50) feet of a street right-of-way line or within the front fifty (50) percent of the lot, the access gates or doors shall not directly face the public street. Access gates or doors shall be of opaque material, except in the CR zone. Trash collection areas shall be designed, located or screened so as not to be readily identifiable from adjacent streets or highways. These standards shall not apply to lots containing two (2) or less dwelling units.
B. Alternative Design for Industrial, Mixed Use and TOD Zones. In the IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zones, trash collection areas may be screened with masonry walls having a minimum height of seven (7) feet, instead of the semienclosed roof required in subsection A., above.
C. Alternative Design for the Medical Service Zone. In the MS zone, trash collection areas for a hospital shall be screened from view of the public street or sidewalk immediately adjacent to the property. For all other uses in the MS zone, trash collection areas shall be subject to general provisions in subsection A., above.
SECTION 6. Section 30.30.040 Fences and Walls of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.30.040 Lighting.
A. Regulations in the C1, C2, C3, CR, CPD, CH, CA, DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU, TOD, MS, P Overlay and PS overlay Zones. In the C1, C2, C3, CR, CPD, CH, CA, DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU, TOD, MS, P overlay and PS overlay zones lighting for uncovered parking areas, vehicle accessways and walkways shall not exceed a height of sixteen (16) feet. Such overall height shall be measured from the paved parking area surface to the uppermost part of the light standard, including the light globe. Lighting shall be directed onto the driveways, walkways and parking areas 606 of 1291
within the development and away from adjacent properties and public rights-of-way.
In addition, parking structure rooftop lighting shall be designed and installed to preclude light trespass (lighting intensity exceeding one-half (0.5) foot candle measured at the property line utilizing a light meter held four (4) feet about ground level directed at the light source) onto adjacent property. For additional parking structure lighting standards in the IND, IMU, IMU-R and SFMU zones see Section
30.34.120—Parking structures. Additionally, in the P overlay zone, headlight glare shall be shielded from all surrounding residential properties. The level of lighting on the site shall comply with The Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings, Title 24, of the California Code of Regulations.
B. Regulations in the CE Zone. In the CE zone, lighting shall be directed onto driveways, walkways, paths and public areas within the development and away from surrounding properties and public rights-of-way.
C. Additional Regulations in IND Zone. Flashing, shimmering or flickering light shall be screened from view off-site in the IND zone.
D. Lighting of Temporary Parking Areas. See Section 30.32.140 for additional regulations for temporary parking lots.
SECTION 7. Section 30.31.020 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.31.020 Regulations for all multi-family, commercial, industrial, and mixed use zones, and the CE,MS and TOD zones.
A. Projects subject to the State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance in the California Code of Regulations, Title 23. Waters, Division 2. Department of Water Resources, Chapter 2.7. Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance, Section 490 et seq., as may be amended, shall comply with those regulations in addition to all of the regulations in this chapter. In the case of a conflict between the State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance and this code (including mandates of Title 13), the State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance shall prevail, except that in the case of a conflict whereby this code imposes a requirement intended to be more effective in conserving water than the State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance, this code shall prevail. For all properties and all other projects not subject to the State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance, the following regulations shall apply in the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, C1, C2, C3, CPD, CR, CH, CA, IND, IMU-R, SFMU, MS, and CE zones. For all properties and all other projects not subject to the State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance in the TOD zone, only subsections 4, 5 and 6 below shall apply. For additional landscaping regulations for the TOD zone, see Chapter 30.16.
1. Landscaping required.
a. All setback areas and other areas not occupied by buildings, parking, driveways, walkways, and other incidental activities shall be landscaped with a majority (more than fifty (50) percent) of plant materials or a combination of plant materials and permeable surfaces and shall be permanently maintained in a neat and orderly manner. The street setback 607 of 1291
area shall not be completely paved or covered with gravel. Permeable surfaces are encouraged wherever possible in lieu of impermeable hardscape.
b. Decorative design elements such as fountains, sculptures, planters, rocks or other similar elements may be permitted where they are integral parts of a landscape plan composed of a majority (more than fifty (50) percent) of live plant materials are permitted in the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, IMU-R and SFMU zones.
c. Pedestrian walks and vehicular accessways shall be permitted in such landscaped areas. Such areas may not be counted as landscaped open space in the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, IMU-R and SFMU zones. d. Useable open space in the form of landscaped setbacks, walkways, patios and landscaped areas within parking lots may be considered in the computation of required landscaping in the CPD zone.
e. When drought tolerant landscaping is used, the live plant material requirement shall be calculated at mature growth of the drought tolerant plants. However, the live plant material calculation for tree canopies shall only include the canopy area as it exists at the time of planting. f. No painting of turf or dirt shall be allowed.
2. Percentage of lot with landscaping. Lots shall be developed with permanently landscaped open space, as follows:
Table 30.31-A
Zone
Minimum percentage of total lot area to be
permanently landscaped open space
R-3050 30%
R-2250, R-1650, R-1250 25%
IMU-R, SFMU, CPD 10%
C1, C2, C3, CR, CH, CA, CE,
CEM, IND, IMU, MS, PS
Overlay
Not Applicable
P Overlay The front and street side setback and landscaping requirements for parking areas in the P overlay zone
shall be subject to the provisions of the residential
zone in which the property is located and/or Chapter
30.32 of this title, whichever is the most restrictive.
3. Permanent landscaping. For the purposes of this chapter, permanent landscaping shall consist of landscaped areas at the ground level or in planters having a minimum length, width, diameter and depth of twenty-four (24) inches.
In the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250, IMU-R and SFMU zones and the PS overlay zone, the soil depth shall be increased to thirty (30) inches minimum in the area where trees are to be planted.
4. Irrigation. Permanent and automatic irrigation facilities shall be provided in all permanent landscaped areas except potted containers.
608 of 1291
5. Preparation of plans and installation of landscaping and irrigation. a. Prior to the issuance of any building permit, all landscape and irrigation plans shall be prepared and wet stamped by an individual who is licensed in the State of California to prepare such plans. All landscaping and irrigation facilities shall be installed and in proper working order according to approved plans prior to the final inspection. In the alternative, a cash bond may be deposited with the building official in an amount not less than the estimated cost of installing said landscaping and irrigation facilities. Should said estimated cost of installing such landscaping and irrigation facilities exceed ten thousand dollars ($10,000), an instrument of credit may be deposited with the building official in lieu of a cash bond. Said cash bond or instrument of credit may be released only upon final inspection and approval of said building permit by the building official. b. Prior to the issuance of any temporary or permanent use and occupancy certificate, an individual licensed in the State of California to prepare landscape and irrigation plans shall file a certificate of compliance with the building official certifying that all landscaping and irrigation facilities have been installed in substantial compliance with the approved plans. c. In the event the developer fails to install the landscaping and irrigation facilities for any reason, after having had reasonable time to do so, the building official may notify the developer and thereafter cause said landscaping and irrigation facilities to be installed pursuant to the approved plans and to use the cash bond or instrument of credit to pay for the cost of such installation.
6. Artificial turf. Artificial turf shall not be permitted in any portion of a property located in a commercial, industrial, or special purpose zones (C1, C2, C3, CPD, CR, CH, CA, IND, MS, CEM, SR and CE). Artificial turf shall be permitted on property located in a mixed use zone (IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and DSP) and TOD zone only when not visible from the public street immediately adjacent to the property. Artificial turf shall be permitted in the multi-family zones (R-3050, R-2250, R-1650 and R-1250) as follows:
a. Artificial turf shall be calculated toward the total lot area requirement for landscaping, but shall not be calculated toward the live plant material requirement.
b. Artificial turf shall not be permitted beneath the drip line of tree canopies.
For purposes of this section, “drip line” is defined as the area beneath the extent of the tree canopy at mature growth plus two (2) feet. c. A minimum three (3) foot wide live plant material landscape border shall be required at the street front and street side property line. d. A minimum three (3) foot wide live plant material landscape border shall be required at the base of a building facing a street front or street side setback. e. Artificial turf shall only be permitted on sloped areas less than twenty-five (25) percent.
f. Artificial turf shall imitate a natural turf-like appearance and require the following:
609 of 1291
i. A minimum blend of three (3) colors, predominately green. ii. A minimum blade length of one and one half (1-1/2) inches, with spines and uneven tops.
iii. Infill material shall be a natural material, such as coconut fiber, cork, and sand. No crumb rubber shall be permitted.
g. Artificial turf shall be installed by a qualified state-licensed contractor with a valid landscaping contractors or synthetic products contractors license. h. Artificial turf shall be directed to drain on-site to a permeable area. i. Artificial turf shall be maintained in a clean and orderly condition and shall not contain holes, tears, stains, discoloration, seam separations, uplifted surfaces, heat degradation, or excessive wear.
7. Additional open space requirements for the R-2250, R-1650, and R-1250 zones. On a lot with a minimum width of ninety (90) feet and with a density exceeding the maximum density permitted by code for lots with less than ninety (90) feet in width, an additional nine hundred (900) square foot open space area shall be provided contiguous to a street front/side setback area. For each additional foot of lot width thereafter, or minor fraction area thereof, an additional twenty (20) square feet of such open space area shall be provided.
Said area may be located on top of a subterranean or semi-subterranean garage area and may be “common outdoor space”; may be landscaped; shall be located within the fifty (50) percent of the lot depth/width nearest the front property line or street side property line; shall be visible from the public street; shall not include “private outdoor space”; and shall not include or be located within any required minimum interior, street front or street side setback area.
Planter walls not exceeding a height of thirty (30) inches and railings shall be allowed in this area. The design of such additional open space area shall be integrated with the landscaping of the contiguous street front/side setback area.
Second and third floors may not project into any required additional open space area and shall be proportionally stepped back from said area a minimum of three (3) feet for the second floor and a minimum of six (6) feet for the third floor to preserve the front and side elevation change-of-planes encouraged by this title.
8. Additional requirements for the PS overlay zone. Planter boxes, with a minimum width of twenty-four (24) inches, shall be incorporated into the design along the entire length of each tier of the parking structure facing the street, alley or residential zone. Clinging type vines shall be planted along any solid sheer exterior walls.
SECTION 8. Section 30.32.030 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.030 Parking and loading spaces required—General.
A. Minimum parking Requirements. There shall be provided at the time of the occupancy of any building or structure a minimum number of off-street parking and loading spaces as hereinafter required in this chapter for said building or structure with adequate provision for safe ingress and egress. Furthermore, there shall be 610 of 1291
provided at the time of the establishment of any outdoor use area a minimum number of off-street parking and loading spaces as hereinafter required in this chapter for said outdoor use area with adequate provision for safe ingress and egress.
B. Expansion or Remodeling of Building, or Change in Use.
1. Expansion of building or use, generally. Upon change or enlargement of a building, or outdoor use area which creates an increase in the number of dwelling units on a lot, additional floor area, additional floor area devoted to a use, additional outdoor use area, or additional seats, additional parking and loading spaces shall be provided for such new floor area, dwellings, outdoor use area or seats without diminishing the existing parking provided for the existing use, buildings and/or structures unless said parking exceeds the requirements of this chapter.
2. Reduction in parking due to disabilities upgrade. When required solely as a need to upgrade existing parking facilities to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.), Title III and California Code of Regulations (CCR), California Access Code, Title 24, the total number of parking spaces may be reduced at the discretion of the director of community development.
3. Addition of floor area to a dwelling unit. Subsection 1. above notwithstanding, addition of floor area to any dwelling unit may be permitted only when the number of off-street parking spaces provided is equal to or greater than the number that would be currently required for the entire building if it were newly constructed, unless an administrative exception is obtained in accordance with Chapter 30.44. Addition of floor area outside of an actual dwelling unit in a common area such as a common laundry room, common recreation room, or common garage on a lot containing more than one (1) dwelling unit shall be permitted without the need to provide any additional parking spaces.
4. Addition of floor area to a historic resource. Additions of floor area up to twenty-five (25) percent of a designated historic resource on the Glendale Register of Historic Resources shall be exempt from the requirements of this subsection. Additional parking shall be provided only for the floor area being added which exceeds a twenty-five (25) percent increase.
5. Change of use, generally. When the use of a building changes to a use that is required by Section 30.32.050 to have the same number of parking spaces as the immediately previous use, no additional parking spaces shall be required for the new use, regardless of the number of spaces actually provided by the previous use, provided that the previous use was legally established and the number of spaces has not decreased. When a change in use requires more offstreet parking than the previous use, additional parking spaces shall be provided equal in number to the difference between the total number of spaces required by the new use and the number of spaces required for the immediately previous use. When a change in use requires less off-street parking than the previous use, no additional parking spaces are required.
C. Change of Use, Exceptions. Upon the change of use of an existing building, or lot, or a portion of a building, or lot, additional parking and loading spaces shall be 611 of 1291
provided for the new use as required by this chapter over and above the number of parking and loading spaces required by this chapter for the prior use only, with the following exceptions:
1. Change of use in a historic resource. Any change of use permitted in a historic resource shall not be required to provide additional parking to that legally required prior to the change of use.
2. Change of use in a space under five thousand (5,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones or two thousand (2,000) square feet in all other zones (this rule only applies if there is a zoning use certificate, certificate of use and occupancy or business registration certificate on file for a use/uses that exists at the time of the proposed change of use). The occupancy in any tenant space of less than five thousand (5,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones or two thousand (2,000) square feet in all other zones, may be interchanged among the following land uses without the need to provide additional parking beyond that currently provided on-site or in covenanted off-site spaces provided that the final total gross floor area does not exceed five thousand (5,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones or two thousand (2,000) square feet in all other zones. For new buildings and structures, uses must be established with a valid business registration certificate for a minimum of one (1) year, from date of issuance. An occupancy that was permitted under this subsection in a space under five thousand (5,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones or two thousand (2,000) square feet in all other zones, may not combine with another occupancy to create an occupancy of five thousand (5,000) square feet or more in the DSP and TOD zones or two thousand (2,000) square feet or more in all other zones, without providing the number of parking spaces required by this code. Required parking shall be determined by the last occupancy that did not use this subsection in a space under five thousand (5,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones or two thousand (2,000) square feet in all other zones.
Parking will be determined by subsection 33.32.030B.5.
• Taverns
• Day care centers, limited to two thousand (2,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones
• Offices, general
• Business support services
• Medical and dental offices
• Medical and dental labs
• Nursery and garden supplies
• Restaurants, full service
• Retail and service activities
• Live/work spaces
• Banks and financial institutions
• Manufacturing
• Repair and maintenance, consumer products
612 of 1291
• Gymnasiums and health clubs
• Personal services
• Restaurants, counter service
• Restaurants, fast food, up to five thousand (5,000) square feet in the DSP and TOD zones and up to one thousand (1,000) square feet in all other zones, provided there is no drive-through facility
• Schools, physical instruction
3. Change of use in the CR zone. Any proposed change in occupancy in the “CR” commercial retail zone from an office, retail or service use to a “high-intensity general office/service activity use” as defined herein, shall be required to provide parking and loading spaces as would be required for a new use in full compliance with the standards as specified in this chapter.
4. Change of use in the DSP zone. When the use of a building changes to an art gallery use, as defined by the DSP, no additional parking is required (See Section 30.32.030B.5.).
5. When the use of a space up to ten thousand (10,000) square feet changes from warehousing to manufacturing, no additional parking is required. For new buildings and structures, uses must be established with a valid business registration certificate for a minimum of one (1) year, from the date of issuance.
D. Maintenance of Required Parking. All off-street parking and loading spaces being maintained in connection with any existing main building, structure or use on October 22, 1952 and all parking spaces subsequently required by the zoning ordinance for any building, structure or use shall be maintained as long as said building, structure or use remains, unless an equivalent number of parking and loading spaces is provided conforming to the requirements of this chapter; provided, however, that this regulation shall not require the maintenance of more parking spaces than are herein required for a new building, structure or use. The director of community development may grant an administrative exception pursuant to Section
30.44.020 for the alteration of an existing parking facility to increase the number of parking spaces, where that facility is non-conforming as regards the number of parking spaces, when said alteration may create, continue or exacerbate a nonconformity regarding parking design standards, when, in the opinion of the director of community development, the benefits of the increased number of parking spaces outweighs the impacts of the non-conformity regarding parking design standards.
E. Mixed Use Sites. A site with multiple tenants shall provide the aggregate number of parking spaces required by this chapter for each separate use, except where a reduction of parking is allowed by the reviewing authority in compliance with Section
30.32.080 (reduction of off-street parking requirements). Rounding of quantities of parking spaces shall be done in accordance with Section 30.32.060B.
SECTION 9. Section 30.32.040 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.040 General parking regulations.
613 of 1291
These requirements are intended to ensure adequate parking for residents, and the employees and customers of all businesses.
A. Layout and Access Plan Required. All land use permit applications and any request for new or modified parking facilities shall include a parking layout and access plan, for approval of parking design and layout, access, signage, driveways, landscaping, and screening.
B. Location of Parking. Off-street parking shall be located as follows:
1. All required off-street parking and loading spaces shall be accessible, except for domestic violence shelters, and shall be located on the same lot as the use and/or development requiring such spaces, except as otherwise permitted herein. For the purposes of this chapter, “accessible” shall mean capable of being reached for purposes of parking during hours of operation or occupation by means of the full and unobstructed minimum dimensions as specified herein. Section 30.32.180 Chart VI shall be illustrative of the meaning of “accessible.” Required parking shall be located on the same site as the activities or uses served, unless a parking use permit is obtained in accordance with Chapter 30.51 and Section 30.32.120. In the DSP and TOD zones, offstreet parking spaces that are not accessible, i.e., tandem or vertically stacked, shall be permitted as required off-street parking spaces, subject to the following standards:
a. For residential uses, a maximum of fifty (50) percent of the required offstreet parking spaces may be tandem or vertically stacked, provided that each set of accessible and tandem or vertically stacked parking spaces shall be assigned to the same residential unit.
b. For nonresidential uses, a maximum of twenty-five (25) percent of the required off-street parking spaces may be tandem or vertically stacked. c. All parking spaces in tandem off-street parking space configurations shall comply with the dimensions in Section 30.32.80, Charts I, II, and III. d. The dimensions of vertically stacked off-street parking spaces shall be subject to the approval of the review authority or the director of community development where there is no other review authority.
e. The use of tandem or vertically stacked parking spaces for nonresidential uses shall require that the operator of the parking facility provide a valet or attendant at all times that the parking is accessible to users, except where the traffic and transportation administrator determines that the nature of the use and its operation will not require attended parking. f. The assignment of tandem or vertically stacked parking spaces and the restrictions of their use shall be the responsibility of the owner of the premises or the owner’s assigned representative, subject to the requirements of this chapter.
2. Off-street parking and loading spaces may not be located within any street setback area, except for domestic violence shelters.
3. Parking and loading spaces shall not preclude direct and free access to stairways, walkways, elevators, any pedestrian accessways or fire safety 614 of 1291
equipment. Such access shall be a clear minimum width of forty-four (44) inches, no part of which may be within a parking space.
4. When there is more than one (1) dwelling unit for each two thousand five hundred (2,500) square feet of lot area or when there are more than four (4) dwelling units in one (1) building on a lot, all required off-street parking spaces for such dwelling units shall be provided in subterranean or semi-subterranean garages, except guest parking spaces which may be located above or below grade. Projects utilizing a garage design that is not subterranean or semisubterranean shall provide private and direct access to the unit for which the garage is provided and ground level living space shall occupy not less than twenty-five (25) percent of the total unit area. Private and direct access shall mean access through a door directly into the floor area of a unit or access through a private outdoor area of the unit and then through a door into the unit and never through any common area of the project. This code section does not apply for residential and residential mixed-use projects in the DSP or TOD zones.
5. For additional regulations concerning the location of parking in the CPD zone, see Section 30.12.030.
C. Availability. Parking and loading spaces required by this chapter shall be available during all hours of operation, and shall be marked and maintained for parking or loading purposes for such intended use.
1. Persons in control of the operation of a premises for which parking or loading spaces are required by this chapter shall not prevent, prohibit, or restrict other persons from using those spaces for their required parking.
2. Parking shared between uses during simultaneous operating hours may be allowed in accordance with Section 30.32.090, and subject to a parking use permit pursuant to Chapter 30.50.
3. Parking for residential uses shall be maintained for the exclusive use of occupants and their guests, unless otherwise allowed by this code or through the issuance of a request for parking reduction permit pursuant to Chapter
30.50 or a parking use permit pursuant to Chapter 30.51.
D. Maintenance. Parking spaces, driveways, maneuvering aisles, turnaround areas, and landscaping areas shall be maintained free of dust, graffiti, and litter. Striping, paving, walls, light standards, and all other facilities shall be maintained in good condition.
E. Commercial Vehicles in Residential Zones. Not more than one (1) commercial vehicle may be stored, parked or in any manner left on any lot in the ROS, R1R, R1, R-3050, R-2250, R-1650 and R-1250 zones. The size of this vehicle may not exceed either eight (8) feet in width, eight (8) feet in height, or twenty (20) feet in length. Such dimensions shall include the vehicle together with fixtures, accessories or property, with the exception of single-post radio antennas and side mirrors.
SECTION 10. Section 30.32.050 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
615 of 1291
30.32.050 Minimum number of parking spaces required.
The minimum number of off-street parking spaces provided for any land use shall not be less than the following (see Sections 30.32.171 and 30.32.173 for bicycle parking requirements):
Table 30-32-A
A. Residential Uses.
Residential Uses Number of Required Parking Spaces
Efficiencies of up to 1,500 square feet and 1 bedroom
units - 2 spaces
2 bedroom units - 2 spaces
Efficiencies of 1,501 to 2,000 square feet and 3
bedroom units - 2.5 spaces
Dwelling units in all zones except
the ROS, R1R, R1, DSP and TOD
zones where more than one
dwelling unit exists on a lot
Efficiencies of more than 2,000 square feet and any
unit containing 4 or more bedrooms - 3 spaces
Guest parking - 1/4 space per unit for residential
projects of 4 or more units; spaces must be
accessible, screened from view of the street, may be
unenclosed and must be clearly identified with the
words, “GUEST PARKING” painted in the space with
minimum eight-inch high letters; if the guest spaces
are located behind security gates a communication
system shall be provided and maintained to allow
guests to communicate with residents to allow for
guest vehicular access through the gates
In the PRD zone, 1 uncovered guest space per
dwelling unit in addition to enclosed parking spaces;
the guest space shall be in close proximity and bear
direct relationship to the dwelling unit for which it is intended; such guest parking space may be located
within the public right-of-way
Dwelling units in all zones except
the ROS, R1R, R1, DSP, and TOD
zones where more than one
dwelling unit exists on a lot
Guest parking spaces must comply with Building Code
requirements
1 bedroom units - 1 space
Units of 2 bedrooms or more - 2 spaces, except that
only 1 parking space is required for each senior
residential unit
Guest parking - 1 space per 10 units for projects of 10 or more units; spaces must be accessible, screened
from view of the street, may be unenclosed and must
be clearly identified with the words, “GUEST
PARKING” painted in the space with minimum eightinch high letters; if the guest spaces are located behind security gates a communication system shall
be provided and maintained to allow guests to
communicate with residents to allow for guest
vehicular access through the gates
Dwelling units in the DSP and TOD
zone
Guest parking spaces must comply with Building Code
requirements
Senior housing 1 space per unit in projects with more than 1 dwelling 616 of 1291
Residential Uses Number of Required Parking Spaces
unit
Dwelling units in the ROS, R1R and
R1 zones
Cumulative Gross Floor Area of dwelling:
0 - 3,499 sq. ft. 2 spaces
3,500 - 5,999 sq.
ft.
3 spaces
6,000 - 7,999 sq.
ft.
4 spaces
Dwelling units in the R-3050, R2250, R-1650 and R-1250 zones where only one dwelling unit exists
on a lot
8,000 + sq. ft. 5 spaces
Domestic violence shelters In the PRD zone, 1 uncovered guest space per dwelling unit in addition to enclosed parking spaces
Residential congregate living,
limited
Any spaces in excess of 2 in the ROS, R1R and R1
zones may be designed in a manner that is not directly
accessible
Residential congregate living,
medical
1 space per 4 beds
Residential congregate living, nonmedical, except for senior housing 1 space for every 3 residents Live/work units
3 spaces for the first 2,000 square feet and 3 spaces
per 1,000 square feet for any additional floor area over 2,000 square feet
Accessory dwelling units (1) 1 space
Note:
(1) For additional parking standards see Section 30.34.080.
B. Commercial Uses.
Commercial Uses Number of Required Parking Spaces
Assembly halls, auditoriums, or
similar places of assembly
28.6 spaces per 1,000 square feet of seating or
viewing area or 1 space per each 5 fixed seats
Banks and financial institutions
4 spaces per 1,000 square feet of financial customer
service area, plus 2.7 spaces per 1,000 square feet of
office floor area
Car washes, full service
10 parking spaces or 1.43 spaces per 1,000 square
feet of floor area, whichever is greater. Car washes
may contain up to 200 square feet of restaurant, fast
food, or restaurant, counter service, without providing parking for that restaurant use
Car washes, self service
1 parking space per washing module plus 2 parking
spaces. The washing module shall not be construed
as a parking space
Children’s indoor play area 10 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area Day care centers
3.0 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area. Of
these required spaces, one space for each 12 clients
the facility is licensed to serve must be marked as
“Drop-off Space - Ten Minute Parking Only - 6-9 a.m.
and 4-7 p.m.”
Gas station 4 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area; however, 617 of 1291
Commercial Uses Number of Required Parking Spaces
in no event shall less than 3 parking spaces be
provided. No work station used for the repair of
vehicles may be credited toward meeting the parking
requirement
Gymnasium and health clubs and
schools, physical instruction 10 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area Hospitals 1 space per each 2 beds
Hotels and motels 0.8 space per each habitable room
Medical and dental offices and
medical labs with patient visitation
5 spaces per 1,000 square feet;
4 spaces per 1,000 square feet in the DSP and TOD
zones, however, this requirement may be reduced to
2.7 spaces per 1,000 square feet where the medical
office is on a lot that is located within 500 feet of a lot containing a hospital
Medical labs without patient
visitation and dental labs 2.7 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area Museums and cultural art centers 4 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area Nightclubs
28.6 spaces per 1,000 square feet of seating or
viewing area or 1 space per each 5 fixed seats;
20 spaces per 1,000 square feet of seating or viewing
area or 1 space per each 5 fixed seats, in the DSP and
TOD zones
Nursery and garden supplies only
4 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area in a
building, plus 1 parking space per each 1,000 square
feet of outdoor storage area
Offices, general, including
psychiatrists, psychologists and
psychotherapists where the primary
use is the treatment of no more than
2 clients at a time by any
practitioner (1)
2.7 spaces per 1,000 square feet;
2 spaces per 1,000 square feet in the DSP and TOD
zones
Private clubs, including banquet
halls
28.6 spaces per 1,000 square feet of seating or
viewing area
Restaurants, fast food
12.5 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area;
5 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area in the
DSP and TOD zones
Restaurants, full service
10 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area;
5 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area in the
DSP and TOD zones
Retail and service activities, general
(2)
4 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area;
3 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area in the
DSP and TOD zones
Stables
1 parking space per each 4 horses, based on the
maximum number of horses stated on the stable
permit
Taverns
10 spaces per 1,000 square feet;
5 spaces per 1,000 square feet in the DSP and TOD
zones
Theaters 1 parking space per each 5 fixed seats, or 28.6 spaces 618 of 1291
Commercial Uses Number of Required Parking Spaces
per 1,000 square feet of floor area where there are no
fixed seats
Notes:
(1) For the purpose of this section, offices, general includes: ambulance services; broadcasting studios and indoor support facilities; contractor’s office; heating and air conditioning sales and service (HVAC); office; office, consumer services; and office of towing and impound yards as defined in Chapter 30.70 - Definitions.
(2) For the purpose of this section, retail and service activities, general include: adult business uses; arcade establishment; automobile supply stores; billiard establishments; building materials, supplies, sales and service; business support services; cyber-cafe establishment; equipment rental yards; firearms, weapons sales; hardware stores; indoor recreation centers; jewelry stores; liquor stores; massage services; outdoor commercial recreation; paint and wall paper stores; pawnshops; personal services; pet grooming; repair and maintenance, consumer products; restaurant, counter service with limited seating; spas and swimming pools, sales and service; supermarkets; tire stores; vehicle repair garage; vehicle sales, leasing and rental agencies; veterinary offices; and western retail and supply stores as defined in Chapter 30.70 - Definitions.
C. Institutional, Educational or Instructional Uses.
Institutional, Educational or
Instructional Uses
Number of Required Parking Spaces
Places of worship 28.6 spaces per 1,000 square feet of seating or viewing area
Convalescent homes, extended
care and retirement or rest homes 1 parking space per 4 beds Emergency shelters 1 space for every 10 beds
Mortuaries and funeral homes 14 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area Private pre-schools, kindergarten &
grades 1 through 9 when used
exclusively for this purpose
3.0 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area
Private schools in which any portion
of their instruction includes grades
10 or above
28.6 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area used
for instruction or 1 space per each 5 fixed seats
28.6 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area used
Schools, private specialized for instruction;
education and training 4 spaces per 1,000 square feet if there is no classroom seating, subject to approval of a floor plan
D. Industrial Uses.
Industrial Uses Number of Required Parking Spaces
2 spaces per 1,000 square feet for the first 25,000
square feet of floor area or less;
Industrial, general (1)
1.5 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area for that portion of a building having more than 25,000 to
50,000 square feet of floor area; and 1.25 spaces per
1,000 square feet of floor area for that portion of a
building more than 50,000 square feet of floor area; 619 of 1291
1.25 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area in the
TOD zones only
Backlots/outdoor facilities 1 space per 1,000 square feet of floor area of any indoor facilities
Office space within manufacturing or
warehousing use, when clearly
incidental to such use and
occupying no more than 40% of the
building
Same parking requirement as the primary use
(manufacturing or warehousing); 2 spaces per 1,000
square feet of floor area in the TOD zones
Research and development
2.7 spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area; 2
spaces per 1,000 square feet of floor area in the TOD
zones
Warehousing and wholesaling (2)
1 space per 1,000 square feet of floor area; 0.75
space per 1,000 square feet of floor area in the TOD
zones
Notes:
(1) For the purpose of this section, industrial general includes: body shops and painting booths, heavy manufacturing, industrial mixed use large scale projects, kennel animal boarding and daycare, laundries and dry cleaning plants, light manufacturing, printing publishing and lithographic services, recycling and soundstages as defined in Chapter 30.70 - Definitions. (2) For the purpose of this section, warehousing and wholesaling includes: moving services, storage personal facilities, warehousing and wholesaling as defined in Chapter 30.70 - Definitions.
SECTION 11. Section 30.32.070 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.070 Reduction of parking requirements.
This section provides procedures and criteria for the reduction of the off-street parking requirements of this chapter.
A. Allowable Reductions in Parking Space Requirements. The number of off-street parking spaces required by this chapter may be reduced as provided by the following table.
Table 30.32-B
Qualifying Project Feature Description and Criteria for Granting Reduction Mixed Use Projects—A
project combining different
land uses on the same
parcel
A parking reduction may be granted where the hearing officer determines that a reduction is justified based on characteristics of the uses, an hourly parking demand study published by the Urban Land Institute, and/or other appropriate source as determined by the director of community development. The director of community development may require a parking demand study conducted by a licensed traffic engineer or other traffic professional acceptable to the director of community development.
New construction and use
intensification near public
parking
A parking reduction may be granted for the construction of new buildings, and for proposed intensification of use within an existing building that is determined by the hearing officer to be located within a reasonable distance of a city parking facility.
The director of community development may require a parking 620 of 1291
demand study prepared by a licensed traffic engineer or other traffic professional acceptable to the director of community development. A parking reduction may be granted subject to payment of a fee determined by the city council, if any, based on the type of use and its parking characteristics, including:
a. Peak hours of use and turnover rate;
b. The ability of the use to meet parking requirements through other means;
c. The availability of spaces in a nearby city parking facility; d. The distance to the use from the parking facility; and e. Measures proposed by the applicant to ensure employee and patron use of the city parking facility
Uses adjacent to transit
A parking reduction may be granted for commercial or residential uses proposed adjacent to local or regional mass transit lines or routes, a parking reduction may be granted when the hearing officer determines that a parking demand study provided by the applicant, prepared by an independent licensed traffic engineer or other traffic professional acceptable to the director of community development, justifies the reduction based on documented mass transportation use characteristics of the patrons and employees of the use.
Projects in redevelopment
areas, except if partially or
entirely located in the DSP
zone
The Glendale Redevelopment Agency (in the event the
redevelopment agency is suspended or eliminated, the review authority shall by the city council) or the director of community development may grant exceptions to the minimum number of required parking spaces and parking standards, pursuant to Section 30.32.020, where it can make the findings required in Section 30.32.020
Disabilities upgrade
A parking reduction may be granted for reduction in parking spaces due solely to compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act, Title III and California Code of Regulations (CCR), California Access Code, Title 24, at the discretion of the director of community development, see Section 30.32.030.B.2.
Hospitals
All parcels under hospital ownership in the MS zone may reduce parking where shared use of parking facilities is applicable under Section 30.32.080. Parking reduction permits and parking use permits for a hospital use in the MS zone shall be subject to the approval of the director of community development.
All others
A parking reduction may be granted for any other circumstance where the applicant wishes to request a parking reduction. A parking reduction may be granted where the hearing officer can make the findings required in Section 30.50.040.D.
B. Parking Reduction Procedure. All requests for parking reduction shall be processed pursuant to Chapter 30.50, except requests for parking reductions due to compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act, Title III and California Code of Regulations (CCR), California Access Code, Title 24, may be approved by the director of community development without public hearing or notice, and requests for parking exceptions in redevelopment project areas, may be approved by the Glendale Redevelopment Agency pursuant to Section 30.32.020
621 of 1291
C. Additional Parking Reductions in the DSP and TOD Zones. In the DSP and TOD zones, projects that are required to provide, or projects that are not required but request to provide, a transportation demand management (TDM) plan pursuant to Section 30.32.171 to the city may request parking reductions based on the total point value to the applicable TDM measures in the table below, subject to approval by the director of community development based on the appropriateness of the measures for the proposed land use and the applicant’s ability to demonstrate the measures’ effectiveness in reducing parking demand:
Table 30.32-B1
Transportation Demand Management (TDM) Measures and Point Values TDM Measures Eligible for
Parking Reductions Incentive
Category/TDM Measure
Summary of TDM Measure
Maximum
Point
Values
Parking
Pricing parking Pricing parking for commuters. 6
Financial Incentives
Subsidized transit Provide free or highly reduced transit passes.
5 Parking cash-out
Employees who do not drive to work are
offered cash value equal to parking
subsidies.
5 Commuter benefit programs Use tax-free dollars to pay for commuting expenses.
4 Free HOV/carpool parking Free parking for HOV or carpools. 1 Automobile Trip Consolidation
Carpool/vanpool programs Shared use of private vehicle or rented/purchased vans. 2
Rideshare matching services Help commuters find travel partners and share costs. 3
Guaranteed ride home
Provide occasional subsidized rides to
commuters to help deal with unexpected
conditions.
3 Shuttle services Shuttle service to/from location and public transit facilities. 4
Scheduling
Telecommute Use of telecommunications to substitute for physical travel. 2
Flextime Employees are allowed some flexibility in
their daily work schedules. 2
Compressed work week Employees work fewer but longer days. 1 Staggered shifts
Shifts are staggered to reduce the number
of employees arriving and leaving at one
time.
1 Promotion
Marketing/outreach
Determining consumer needs/preferences,
creating appropriate products, and
promoting use.
1 622 of 1291
Travel training
Provide individualized training/materials on
transit, ridesharing, car sharing, and bicycle
systems.
2 Transport Coordinator Professional who implement and monitor TDM Programs. 3
Multi-Modal Infrastructure
Car sharing Provide access and/or reduced fees for car
sharing facilities. 4
Bike sharing Provide access and/or reduced fees for
bike sharing facilities. 3
On-site amenities Includes showers/lockers, secure bicycle parking, child care services. 2
The following parking reductions shall apply based on the point values from Table 30.32-B1 above, however, a minimum of one (1) accessible off-street parking space per residential unit shall be provided:
Table 30.32-B2
Parking Reductions and Point Thresholds
% Reduction Point Thresholds Annual Monitoring TMA Membership 10% Reduction 6-9 Required Required
20% Reduction
10-14, from at least 3
incentive categories
(as set forth in Table
30.32-B1)
Required Required
30% Reduction
15+, from at least 4
incentive categories,
including at least 1
parking or financial
incentive
Required Required
SECTION 12. Section 30.32.090 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.090 Parking area design and layout standards.
A. Enclosed Parking. Required parking for residential uses, except guest parking and parking for domestic violence shelters, must be fully enclosed, except for entryways to subterranean and semi-subterranean garage and necessary ventilation for parking structures in the R-3050, R-2250, R-1650, R-1250 zones. This shall only apply in all mixed use zones where more than one (1) dwelling unit exists on a lot, and in all residential zones.
B. Width, Length and Aisle Width. Each parking space shall have a width, length and aisle width in accordance with Section 30.32.180 charts I, II, and Ill; provided, however, that parking spaces in excess of the number required herein or as regulated by Section 30.32.040(B) (Location of Parking) may be tandem or vertically stacked parking spaces. Parking spaces used solely for vehicle display and storage of vehicle inventory need not follow minimum space size requirements. 623 of 1291
Encroachment onto a required residential (R) zone parking space may be permitted to accommodate structural reinforcement, installation of pipes, vents or other similar improvements for six (6) inches of the length. This subsection shall apply only to retrofitting of existing construction. The encroachment shall not impair the overall usefulness of the parking space or parking area for its intended purpose as a parking space or area.
C. Turning Radius. The outer radius of any turning area to a required parking space into any 1 or 2 car garage shall be a minimum of twenty-five (25) feet. See Section
30.32.180 chart VII.
D. Turning Area. Turning and approach areas for more than two (2) parking spaces shall have a minimum clear dimension illustrated by the letter “D” on Section
30.32.180 charts II and Ill which is set out at the end of this chapter and by this reference made a part hereof, from the nearest end of a parking space to any property line, structure, obstruction or other parking space, except where such turning space abuts an alley in which case the turning space dimension may include the width of the alley.
E. Vertical Clearance. All parking spaces shall have a minimum seven (7) foot vertical clearance. The front three (3) feet of a parking space in an enclosed garage in a residential zone, however, may have a vertical clearance of four (4) feet. See Section 30.32.180 chart VIII.
F. Slope. No parking space shall exceed a slope of five (5) percent.
G. Back-Up. Direct backing into or out of a parking area to the street shall not be permitted except for parking for three (3) or fewer residential dwelling units where backing onto a street designated as a local street in the circulation element of the Glendale General Plan may be permitted. Direct backing onto any street is permitted for properties with only one (1) single family dwelling. Direct backing into or out a parking area onto an alley is permitted.
H. Drive-Through Waiting Lane. Any drive-up or drive-through bay for in-car service shall be provided with an on-site vehicular waiting lane for each drive-up or drive-through bay having a minimum width of nine (9) feet and a minimum length of one hundred (100) feet to two hundred (200) feet measured from the service window or area for restaurants (counter service with limited seating, fast food or full service), or a minimum length of sixty (60) feet to one hundred twenty (120) feet for uses other than restaurants (fast food or full service), as deemed appropriate by the reviewing authority. In no event shall there be less than sixty (60) feet from the start of the lane and any ordering device. Such drive-through lane shall be a separate lane from the circulation routes and aisles necessary for ingress to or egress from the property or access to any off-street parking spaces. See Section 30.32.180 chart IX.
Drive-through waiting lanes are not permitted in the Downtown Specific Plan (DSP).
I. Gates. Parking lot and parking garage gates shall not move in a direction that interferes with on-street or pedestrian circulation.
J. Landscaping. See Section 30.32.160 for landscaping requirements. 624 of 1291
K. Parking Structure Standards in the IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD II Zones.
For parking structure standards in the IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD II zones, see Section 30.34.120.
SECTION 13. Section 30.32.171 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.171 Additional trip reduction and travel demand measures in the DSP and TOD zones.
The provisions of this section shall apply in addition to the provisions of Section
30.32.170 in the DSP and TOD zones.
A. Definitions. For the purposes of this section, the following words and phrases shall have the meanings ascribed to them unless otherwise noted:
“AVR.” Average vehicle ridership.
“Carpool.” A vehicle carrying two (2) to five (5) persons to and from work on a regular schedule.
“Development.” The construction of new floor area.
“Preferential parking.” Parking spaces, designated or assigned through use of a sign or painted space markings for carpools or vanpools, that are provided in a location more convenient to the entrance for the place of employment than parking spaces provided for single-occupant vehicles.
“Transportation demand management (TDM).” The alteration of travel behavior through programs of incentives, services, and policies, including encouraging the use of alternatives to single-occupant vehicles such as public transit, cycling, walking, carpooling/ vanpooling and changes in work schedule that move trips out of the peak period or eliminate them altogether (as in the case in telecommuting or compressed work weeks).
“Trip reduction.” Reduction in the number of work-related trips made by singleoccupant vehicles. “Vanpool.” A vehicle carrying six (6) or more persons to and from work on a regular schedule, and on a prepaid basis.
“Vehicle.” Any motorized form of transportation, including, but not limited to, automobiles, vans, buses and motorcycles.
B. Applicability. The provisions of this section shall apply to the following developments referred to as Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3, as defined below:
1. Tier 1.
a. All new nonresidential development twenty-five thousand (25,000) square feet or more of gross floor area.
b. Any nonresidential addition of twenty-five thousand (25,000) square feet or more of gross floor area.
c. All new residential development with one hundred (100) units or more, or mixed-use projects with fifty (50) residential units or more and twenty-five thousand (25,000) gross square feet or more of nonresidential floor area. 625 of 1291
d. Other projects to which the TDM requirements shall be applicable, based on a covenant, development agreement, or other such binding agreement with the city.
2. Tier 2. Developments greater than fifty thousand (50,000) square feet in gross floor area or an expansion resulting in a development greater than fifty thousand (50,000) square feet.
3. Tier 3. Developments exceeding one hundred thousand (100,000) square feet, or an expansion resulting in a development greater than one hundred thousand (100,000) square feet.
C. Requirements. The requirements herein shall apply to Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 projects, as specified in this section, and to projects using the parking reduction measures of Section 30.32.070(C).
1. Transportation demand management (TDM) plan. For Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 projects, prior to the issuance of a building permit or approval of a development agreement, the project applicant shall develop a transportation demand management (TDM) plan, including a detailed list of facilities and programs that will be implemented, to meet the requirements listed below in this section. The TDM plan shall also include a schedule of implementation for TDM programs, and a budget for both programs and facilities. All programs shall be implemented within one (1) year of initial occupancy.
2. Transportation management association/organization (TMA/TMO). The property owners of Tier l, Tier 2 and Tier 3 projects, and property owners of projects using the parking reduction measures of Section 30.32.070(C), shall become dues-paying members of a designated transportation management association (TMA) or transportation management organization (TMO), and eligible for participation in the programs and activities of the TMA/TMO. Rates shall be set by the Board of the TMA/TMO and adopted by the city council, with the provision that they may be increased annually, based on changes to the consumer price index. Prior to the issuance of a certificate of occupancy or of a zoning use certificate for a project, annual dues for the first year of membership shall be paid to the city and then transferred to a designated TMA/TMO. The city shall define performance standards for the designated TMA/TMO to ensure effective administration of the TMA/TMO and communication with and between members of the TMA/TMO. The performance standards shall include the following standards:
a. Completion of an annual AVR survey for all member organizations, with a report provided to the city documenting the results of this survey. b. Assurance that all members of the board are decision makers or their designees, for the organizations they represent.
c. At least four (4) meetings of the board each year, with a quorum present at all meetings.
3. Facilities. The following facilities shall be implemented prior to the issuance of a certificate of occupancy:
a. Bicycle facilities.
626 of 1291
(1) Secure bicycle parking shall be provided for all development subject to the bicycle parking ordinance, at the following rates for various land uses:
Table 30.32—E
Long-term Short-term
Residential with private garage None None
Multifamily residential 1 space per 4 units 1 space per 20 units Retail and personal service uses 1 space per 12,000
square feet
1 space per 5,000
square feet
Supermarkets 1 space per 12,000
square feet
1 space per 2,000
square feet
Office, excluding medical, dental,
and consumer services
1 space per 10,000
square feet
1 space per 20,000
square feet
“Long-term bicycle facility” means a locker, individually locked enclosure or supervised area within a building providing protection for each bicycle therein from theft, vandalism and weather. “Short-term bicycle facility” means a rack, stand or other device constructed so as to enable the user to secure by locking the frame and one wheel of each bicycle parked therein. Racks must be easily usable with both U-locks and cable locks, must support the bikes in a stable upright position so that a bike, if bumped, will not fall or roll down, and must be constructed in accordance with the provisions of Section 30.32.173(D).
(2) Additionally, Tier 2 developments shall provide a changing room and shower facilities.
b. Pedestrian facilities.
(1) Tier 1 and Tier 2 developments shall provide full pedestrian access to the public sidewalk as required by the zoning code and design guidelines as adopted by the city.
(2) Tier 3 developments shall provide sidewalks or other designated pathways following direct and safe routes from the external pedestrian circulation system to each building in the development. c. Transit facilities.
(1) For Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 developments, the design shall enable safe and convenient access to nearby transit stops and facilities. (2) For Tier 3 developments, a bus stop with shelter and other amenities shall be provided if required by the director of community development.
d. Vehicle facilities.
(1) For Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 developments, preferential parking shall be provided for carpools and vanpools (most proximate to main entrances and/or at a reduced price).
627 of 1291
(2) For Tier 3 developments, and for Tier 2 developments at the discretion of the director of community development, a convenient drop-off point for carpools and vanpools shall be provided on site.
4. Programs. The following programs shall be implemented within one (1) year of project completion, following the schedule included in the TDM Plan for the project. All employers shall:
a. Designate an on-site transportation coordinator to be a point of contact with the city and the designated TMA/TMO regarding transportation demand management facilities and programs. For Tier 1 developments with multiple employers, the property manager shall designate an on-site transportation coordinator.
b. Provide an information board or kiosk in a prominent location for employees, residents, and/or visitors, with information about access to all modes of transportation, as well as the activities of the designated TMA/TMO.
c. In Tier 2 and Tier 3 developments, either provide on-site transit pass sales or a pretax transit pass program.
d. Participate in the guaranteed ride home program of the designated TMA/TMO.
e. Demonstrate proof of compliance with the State of California’s parking cash out law.
f. Develop or participate in a ridesharing program to encourage carpooling and vanpooling.
D. Monitoring. For the purposes of determining whether applicable developments are complying with the provisions of this chapter, the city shall monitor compliance in a manner it deems appropriate and reasonable. Monitoring mechanisms include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. All projects shall submit an annual performance report to the city to validate continued compliance with the requirements of this section. A statistically valid survey shall be conducted of employees and/or residents of the project, to ascertain the level of success in achieving the goals of this section, including a determination of the AVR for that project. The AVR shall be determined according to the requirements of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (AQMD). The costs to conduct the survey and produce the report shall be borne by the employer, property owner, or homeowners association, as appropriate.
2. City staff shall confirm to the city council on an annual basis that all projects subject to this section are in compliance with its requirements.
3. City staff shall prepare a summary report evaluating the overall success of achieving the goals of the TDM provisions in this chapter. If the goals are not being met, staff shall propose alternate programs or strategies that could be pursued to achieve these goals. Costs for preparation of staff reports shall be borne by the city.
4. For Tier 2 and Tier 3 projects that fail to achieve an AVR of at least one and one-quarter (1.25), the city shall work with the designated TMA/TMO and the 628 of 1291
employer to modify their TDM plan to include programs and strategies that are expected to better support achievement of an AVR of at least one and onequarter (1.25). The city may mandate the implementation of certain programs and strategies until this goal is reached.
SECTION 14. Section 30.32.172 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.172 In-lieu parking fee in the DSP and TOD zones.
A. Applicability. In the downtown specific plan (DSP) and TOD zones only, off-street parking requirements defined in Section 30.32.050 may be satisfied by paying a fee in lieu of each parking space not provided on-site, subject to the following restrictions:
1. New construction and building expansion projects shall pay a on-time fee prior to the issuance of a building permit.
2. Change of use for which a greater number of off-street parking spaces is required shall pay an annual fee. The first year’s fee shall be paid prior to the earlier issuance of a building permit or a zoning use certificate, and subsequent annual fees shall be paid on the yearly anniversary date of the first payment.
3. New construction and building expansion projects may pay an in-lieu parking fee in order to satisfy any portion up to fifty (50) percent of required parking.
4. Change of use projects may pay an in-lieu parking fee in order to satisfy any portion up to one hundred (100) percent of required parking.
5. The in-lieu parking fee may be used in conjunction with other methods for satisfying the minimum parking requirements.
6. The in-lieu fees payable under this section shall be in the amount set by the council by resolution.
B. Change of Ownership. The in-lieu parking fee shall apply to the land use.
SECTION 15. Section 30.32.0173 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.32.173 Bicycle parking standards in the DSP and TOD zones.
The following bicycle parking standards shall be applicable to all bicycle parking in the DSP and TOD zones:
A. Minimum Number of Bicycle Parking Spaces Required:
Table 30.32—F
Dwelling units in the DSP and
TOD zones 1 space per twenty (20) units.
Office, all 1 space per ten thousand (10,000) square feet of floor area. 629 of 1291
B. A maximum of ten (10) percent of the required off-street parking spaces may be replaced with an equal amount of bicycle parking spaces above the minimum number required in subsection A, subject to the approval of the director of community development and provided that a minimum of one (1) off-street parking space per dwelling unit is maintained.
C. A reduction of one (1) required off-street parking space shall be permitted for every five (5) bicycle parking spaces that are provided in excess of the required number of bicycle parking spaces.
D. Location and design of bicycle facilities. All bicycle facilities shall be located and designed as follows, as a minimum:
1. In close proximity to the building entrance and clustered in lots not to exceed sixteen (16) spaces in each lot.
2. Capable of supporting bicycles in a stable position without damage to the frame, wheels, or other components.
3. Located in highly visible, well-lighted areas to minimize theft and vandalism.
4. Securely anchored to the lot surface so they cannot be easily removed and of sufficient strength to resist theft and vandalism.
5. Not impede pedestrian or vehicular circulation, and incorporated, whenever possible, into the building design.
6. Separated by a physical barrier to protect the bicycle from damage by motor vehicles if located within a vehicle parking area. The physical barrier may be curbs, poles, wheel stops, or other similar features.
7. Bicycle racks shall not be placed too close to a wall or other obstruction so as to make use difficult. A minimum space of twenty-four (24) inches shall be provided beside each parked bicycle to allow access to the bicycles. Adjacent bicycles may share this access.
8. Motor vehicle entrances shall display adequate signs to indicate the availability and location of the bicycle parking facilities.
9. Bicycle parking facilities within a vehicle parking garage shall be located in close view of a parking attendant if the facility has a bicycle attendant.
SECTION 16. Section 30.33.120 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.120 Wall signs.
A. Accessory Wall Signs. The following regulations apply to wall signs for all businesses except gas stations. For regulations concerning signs for gas stations, see Section 30.33.150.
1. Number.
a. For each ground floor occupancy of a building, one (1) accessory wall sign shall be permitted on each wall which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area; provided, however, that no more than 630 of 1291
one (1) accessory wall sign shall be permitted per each dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
b. For each second floor occupancy of a building, one (1) additional wall sign shall be permitted on each wall which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area; provided, however, that no more than one (1) accessory wall sign shall be permitted for each occupancy per dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
2. Area. The area of an accessory wall sign on any wall permitted a sign shall not exceed one (1) square foot per foot of length of frontage of each ground floor and above ground floor occupancy which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area; provided, however, that each ground floor and above ground floor occupancy shall be permitted an accessory wall sign area of at least twenty (20) square feet. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to permit the computation of allowable sign area on the basis of the sum, allocation or duplication of the eligible lengths.
3. Zoning districts. Accessory wall signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts except residential zones and for residential uses in mixed use zones, except as permitted in Section 30.33.120(C).
4. Location.
a. Accessory wall signs shall only be attached to building walls having a vertical plane angle less than twenty (20) degrees. No wall sign shall extend more than two (2) feet above any parapet or eave line or have more than fifty (50) percent of its height above any parapet or eave line. b. No wall sign shall cover wholly or partially any required wall opening.
5. Height. The lowest point of any accessory wall sign which projects over a driveway, service drive or any other traffic way more than six (6) inches from the wall to which it is attached shall be a minimum of seventeen (17) feet above ground.
6. Lighting. Except as provided in subsection B of this subsection, any lighting of accessory wall signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of wall signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into a building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached.
The direct illumination of accessory wall signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
7. Miscellaneous. An accessory wall sign shall be erected or constructed so that it is either integrated into the wall, flat against the wall to which it is attached, or projecting not more than ten (10) inches from the wall to which it is attached.
B. Identification Signs (see also Section 30.33.180(B) for Alternative Standards for Projecting Identification Signs).
1. Number. One (1) identification wall sign shall be permitted for each nonresidential tenant, non-residential occupant, or live/work unit of a building in addition to one (1) such sign for the building as a whole. Alternatively, a 631 of 1291
maximum of four (4) such signs for the building as a whole may be permitted if located in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD or DSP zones. Each identification wall sign for the building as a whole located in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD or DSP zones shall be located on a wall which directly faces a freeway, dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area and there shall be no more that one (1) such sign facing a freeway, dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
2. Area. The area of an identification wall sign shall not exceed two (2) square feet for each tenant or occupant of a building and eight (8) square feet for such sign serving the building as a whole; provided, however, in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones, the area of each identification wall sign serving the building as a whole shall not exceed one hundred (100) square feet.
3. Zoning districts. Identification wall signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts; provided, however, such signs shall not be permitted for tenants and occupants in residential zones.
4. Location. Except in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones, identification wall signs shall be erected in compliance with the building setback line established pursuant to the zoning ordinance of this code or by setback ordinance.
5. Lighting. Any lighting of identification wall signs not located in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones shall be by indirect illumination only, in compliance with the electrical code.
In the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones, direct and indirect illumination shall be permitted. Any lighting of identification signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of wall signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into a building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached. The direct illumination of identification signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
C. Accessory Wall Signs for Residential Leasing or Sales Offices in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP Zones. The following regulations apply to on-site residential leasing or sales offices.
1. Number. One (1) accessory residential leasing or sales office wall sign shall be permitted per site if such office is located at ground level on the site.
2. Area. The area of an accessory residential leasing or sales office wall sign shall not exceed twenty (20) square feet.
3. Zoning districts. Accessory residential leasing or sales office wall signs shall be permitted for residential uses in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones.
4. Location.
a. Accessory residential leasing or sales office wall signs shall only be attached to building walls having a vertical plane angle less than twenty (20) degrees. No accessory residential leasing or sales office wall sign shall extend more than two (2) feet above any parapet or eave line or have more than fifty (50) percent of its height above any parapet or eave line. 632 of 1291
b. No accessory residential leasing or sales office wall sign shall cover wholly or partially any required wall opening.
5. Height. The lowest point of any accessory residential leasing or sales office wall sign which projects over a driveway, service drive or any other traffic way more than six (6) inches from the wall to which it is attached shall be a minimum of seventeen (17) feet above ground.
6. Lighting. Any lighting of residential leasing or sales office wall signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of residential leasing or sales office wall signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into a building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached.
The direct illumination of residential leasing or sales wall signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
7. Miscellaneous. An accessory residential leasing or sales office wall sign shall be erected or constructed so that it is either integrated into the wall, flat against the wall to which it is attached, or projecting not more than ten (10) inches from the wall to which it is attached.
D. Alternative Accessory Wall Signs in the DSP—Gateway District and DSP— Broadway Center District Only. The following regulations apply alternatively to wall signs as described in subsections A through C above for all businesses, except gas stations, subject to approval of a sign program pursuant to Section 30.33.220.
For regulations concerning gas stations, see Section 30.33.150.
1. Number. For each occupancy of a building, up to one (1) accessory wall sign may be permitted by sign program on the ground and second floor for each building wall which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area; provided, however, that no more than one (1) accessory wall sign shall be permitted per each dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
2. Area. The area of all accessory wall signs permitted by sign program shall not exceed one (1) square foot per foot of length of frontage of the building for each ground floor and second floor building length which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to permit computation of allowable sign area on the basis of the sum, allocation or duplication of the eligible lengths.
3. Zoning districts. Accessory wall signs shall be permitted by sign program only in the DSP-Gateway and DSP-Broadway Center Districts.
4. Location.
a. Accessory wall signs shall only be attached to building walls having a vertical plane angle less than twenty (20) degrees. No wall sign shall extend more than two (2) feet above any parapet or eave line or have more than fifty (50) percent of its height above any parapet or eave line. b. No wall sign shall cover wholly or partially any required wall opening. 633 of 1291
5. Height. The lowest point of any accessory wall sign which projects over a driveway, service drive or any other traffic way more than six (6) inches from the wall to which it is attached shall be a minimum of seventeen (17) feet above ground.
6. Lighting. Except as provided in subsection B of this subsection, any lighting of accessory wall signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of wall signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into a building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached.
The direct illumination of accessory wall signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
7. Miscellaneous. An accessory wall sign shall be erected or constructed so that it is either integrated into the wall, flat against the wall to which it is attached, or projecting not more than ten (10) inches from the wall to which it is attached.
SECTION 17. Section 30.33.140 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.140 Accessory ground signs.
A. Number. One (1) accessory ground sign shall be permitted for each dedicated street frontage of the site. A maximum of two (2) accessory ground signs shall be permitted per lot or site, regardless of the number of street frontages.
B. Area. An accessory ground sign shall not exceed one (1) square foot per linear foot of site frontage as measured along a right-of-way line. The total aggregate area of the signs shall not exceed forty (40) square feet in the C1 zone and the East Broadway district of the DSP zone and seventy-five (75) square feet in the C2 zone.
The total aggregate area of the signs in zones other than C1 or C2 zones or the East Broadway district of the DSP zone shall not exceed two hundred (200) square feet. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to permit the computation of allowable sign area on the basis of the sum, allocation or duplication of the eligible frontages.
C. Zoning Districts. Accessory ground signs shall be permitted only in the C1, C2, C3, CR, CH, CA, DSP, TOD, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU, CEM, MS, and SR zoning districts.
D. Locations.
1. No accessory ground sign shall be nearer the street than the building setback line established pursuant to the zoning ordinance of this code or by setback ordinance.
2. On property at any corner formed by intersecting streets, no accessory ground sign shall be erected within that triangular area between the property lines and a diagonal line joining points on the property lines twenty-five (25) feet from the point of their intersection, or in the case of rounded corners, the triangular area between the tangents to the curve at such corner and a diagonal line, joining 634 of 1291
points on such tangents twenty-five (25) feet from the point of their intersection, if the traffic and transportation administrator determines the erection of a sign in such area will obstruct the view of vehicular traffic approaching the intersection on the intersecting streets. The tangents referred to above are those at the beginning and at the end of the curve at the corner.
3. No portion of any accessory ground sign shall project over or through any portion of the roof, marquee or canopy of any building.
E. Height. An accessory ground sign shall not exceed the following heights:
1. Six (6) feet above ground level in the C1 zone and the East Broadway district of the DSP zone, except on Colorado Street and Glendale Avenue frontage;
2. Eight (8) feet above ground level in the C2 zone;
3. Twenty-five (25) feet above ground level in zones other than C1 or C2, and, in the DSP zone, the Colorado Street and Glendale Avenue frontages of the East Broadway district and in all other districts of the DSP zone.
F. Lighting. Any lighting of accessory ground signs shall be in compliance with the Electrical Code.
G. Miscellaneous.
1. A maximum of two (2) supporting poles, uprights, posts or braces shall be permitted for an accessory ground sign; provided, however, if such ground sign is located in the area described in subsection (D)(2) of this section, only one (1) supporting pole, upright, post or brace shall be permitted.
2. The lowest point of any accessory ground sign which projects over a driveway, service drive or any other vehicular traffic way shall be a minimum of fourteen (14) feet above ground level.
3. No accessory ground sign shall be closer than fifteen (15) feet to any other accessory ground sign on the same lot or site.
4. The width of an accessory ground sign shall not exceed twenty (20) feet.
5. All exposed backs or sides shall be suitably covered in order to conceal the structural members and bracing.
SECTION 18. Section 30.33.150 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.150 Gas station signs.
A. Accessory Wall Signs.
1. Number. For each ground floor occupancy of a building, two (2) accessory wall signs shall be permitted on each wall which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
2. Area. The aggregate area of accessory gas station wall signs on any wall permitted a sign shall not exceed one (1) square foot per foot of length of building frontage which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to permit the computation of allowable sign area on the basis of the sum, allocation or duplication of the eligible lengths. 635 of 1291
3. Zoning districts. Accessory gas station wall signs shall be permitted only in the C1, C2, C3, CH, CA, MS, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zoning districts.
4. Location.
a. Accessory wall signs shall only be attached to building walls having a vertical plane angle less than twenty (20) degrees. No wall sign shall extend more than two (2) feet above any parapet or eave line or have more than fifty (50) percent of its height above any parapet or eave line. b. No wall sign shall cover wholly or partially any required wall. c. No accessory wall sign shall extend beyond the eave or roof line of a building.
5. Height. The lowest point of any accessory wall sign which projects over a driveway, service drive or any other traffic way more than six (6) inches from the wall to which it is attached shall be a minimum of seventeen (17) feet above ground.
6. Lighting. Any lighting of wall signs shall be indirect illumination only, in compliance with the electrical code.
7. Miscellaneous. An accessory wall sign shall be erected or constructed so that it is either integrated into the wall, flat against the wall to which it is attached, or projecting not more than ten (10) inches from the wall to which it is attached.
B. Gas Station Accessory Ground Signs.
1. Number. A maximum of three (3) accessory ground signs shall be permitted per gas station site.
2. Area.
a. One (1) accessory ground sign shall not exceed an aggregate area of eighty (80) square feet. Not more than one (1) such sign shall be allowed per gas station site.
b. No other accessory ground sign shall exceed an area of thirty (30) square feet each.
3. Zoning districts. Accessory ground signs shall be permitted only in the C1, C2, C3, CH, CA, MS, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zoning districts.
4. Location.
a. All accessory ground signs shall be located along the property line adjacent to the public right-of-way.
b. Any accessory ground sign located at a corner formed by intersecting streets shall require approval by the traffic and transportation administrator to determine if the erection of a sign in such area will not obstruct the view of vehicular traffic.
c. A maximum of two (2) supporting poles shall be permitted for any accessory ground sign.
d. No accessory ground sign shall be closer than fifty (50) feet to any other accessory ground sign on the same site.
5. Dimensions. 636 of 1291
a. The height of any accessory ground sign shall not extend more than twentyfive (25) feet above the ground. b. The lowest point of any accessory ground sign face located at an intersecting corner formed by intersecting streets shall be a minimum of nine (9) feet above the ground.
c. No accessory ground sign shall exceed a width of ten (10) feet.
6. Format. Copy material, indicating the company brand name, logogram or colors and all other promotional information shall be contained within a contiguous design element.
7. Lighting. Any lighting of accessory ground signs shall be in compliance with the Glendale Building Code, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended.
C. Gas Station Canopy Signs.
1. Number. For each gas station canopy, one (1) canopy sign and logogram shall be permitted on each side of a canopy which faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
2. Area. The total aggregate area of canopy signs shall not exceed one (1) square foot per foot of length of such canopy to which the sign is attached or a total area of fifty (50) square feet, whichever is less.
3. Zoning districts. Canopy signs shall be permitted only in the C1, C2, C3, CH, CA, MS, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zoning districts.
4. Location. Canopy signs shall only be attached to canopies having a vertical plane angle less than twenty (20) degrees and shall not extend beyond the ends or extremities of the canopy to which they are attached.
D. Service Station Pump Signs. Signs bearing only the brand name shall be permitted on the fuel pump dispenser units provided they do not exceed an aggregate area of four (4) square feet per pump. All signs located on the pump shall be an integral part of the dispenser unit.
E. Service Station Pump Top Signs.
1. Number. A single dual-faced pump top sign shall be permitted for each fuel pump dispenser unit.
2. Area. The area of a single dual-faced pump top sign shall not exceed four (4) square feet per face.
3. Zoning districts. Pump top signs shall only be permitted in the C1, C2, C3, CH, CA, MS, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zoning districts.
SECTION 19. Section 30.33.180 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.180 Projecting signs.
A. Accessory Projecting Signs.
1. Number. One (1) projecting sign shall be permitted per ground floor occupancy.
2. Area. The area of a projecting sign shall not exceed six (6) square feet, or twelve (12) square feet in the IMU-R, SFMU, and TOD and DSP zones. 637 of 1291
3. Zoning Districts. Projecting signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts except the residential zones and for residential uses in mixed use zones.
4. Height. Projecting signs shall have a minimum clearance of eight (8) feet between the bottom of such signs and the ground surface.
5. Lighting. Any lighting of projecting signs not located in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and or DSP zones shall be by direct illumination only, in compliance with the electrical code, and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of projecting signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached. The direct illumination of projecting signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
In the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones, direct or indirect illumination shall be permitted, in compliance with the electrical code, and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of projecting signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached.
The direct illumination of projecting signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
6. Miscellaneous.
a. A projecting sign shall not exceed a thickness of six (6) inches or, in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD or DSP zones only, twelve (12) inches. b. A projecting sign must be located a minimum of ten (10) feet from any interior property line which intersects a property line along a right-of-way and a minimum of ten (10) feet from any other projecting sign located on the same building.
B. Projecting Identification Signs Alternative in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP Zones. In the IMU-R, SFMU and DSP zones, identification signs for the building as a whole that are designed as projecting signs, as defined in this chapter, shall be permitted for buildings that are at least thirty (30) feet in height, subject to the standards below. Such signs shall be permitted as an alternative to and not in addition to the identification signs for the building as a whole of Section 30.33.120B.
Notwithstanding any provisions in this section, any projection of such signs over the public right-of-way shall be subject to the provisions of Section 12.08.030— Encroachment permits, of the Glendale Municipal Code.
1. Number. A maximum of four (4) identification signs for the building as a whole shall be permitted. Each projecting identification sign shall be located facing a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area, and there shall be no more than one (1) such sign facing a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
2. Area. The area of each projecting identification sign serving the building as a whole shall not exceed one-half (0.5) square foot per foot of length of frontage 638 of 1291
of the building which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area.
3. Zoning districts. Projecting identification signs shall be permitted only in the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones.
4. Height. Projecting identification signs shall have a minimum clearance of eight (8) feet between the bottom of such signs and the ground surface.
5. Lighting. Any lighting of projecting identification signs shall be by direct or indirect illumination. Any lighting of identification signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of wall signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into a building or structure, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and the building to which it is attached. The direct illumination of projecting identification signs shall be subject to approval by the director of community development.
6. Miscellaneous. The maximum allowable projection from the wall surface to which such sign is attached shall not exceed one tenth (1/10) of the building height.
SECTION 20. Section 30.33.190 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.190 Directional and informational signs.
A. Number.
1. Not more than two (2) informational signs shall be permitted per ground floor entrance to a building.
2. One (1) directional sign shall be permitted for each vehicular entrance and exit per lot or site.
3. One (1) gas station directional sign shall be permitted at each vehicular entrance and exit per gas station site.
4. One (1) gas station directional sign shall be permitted for each end of a pump island.
B. Area.
1. No informational sign shall have an area greater than four (4) square feet.
2. No directional sign shall have an area greater than four (4) square feet except for directional signs located over a vehicular entrance or exit of a structure designed and used for the parking of twenty (20) or more motor vehicles.
3. No directional sign located over a vehicular entrance or exit of a structure designed and used for the parking of twenty (20) or more motor vehicles shall have an area greater than one (1) square foot for each foot of driveway width and no such sign shall extend beyond the width of such entrance.
4. Directional or informational gas station signs shall not exceed an area greater than four (4) square feet or a total of eight (8) square feet per pump island. 639 of 1291
C. Zoning Districts.
1. Directional and informational signs shall be permitted in all commercial, mixed use, and industrial zones and for property developed with parking lots or structures in the P parking overlay zone and PS parking structure overlay zone.
2. Directional and informational gas station signs shall only be permitted in the C1, C2, C3, CH, CA, MS, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zoning districts.
D. Height.
1. When located on a parking lot the height of a directional sign shall not exceed four (4) feet above the adjacent driveway or parking surface. In this case such a sign must be located a minimum of five (5) feet from the intersection of any driveway and the public right-of-way.
2. When located at the vehicular entrance or exit of a structure designed for the parking of motor vehicles a directional sign may be located on the wall or in the entryway immediately above such entrance or exit.
3. All informational signs and all other directional signs shall not extend more than three (3) feet above the ground surface.
4. All directional and informational gas station signs shall be limited to a maximum height of nine (9) feet above the ground surface except when located within ten (10) feet of an interior property line where said signs shall not exceed a height of three (3) feet.
E. Lighting. Any lighting of directional or informational signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Any devices or structures used in conjunction with direct illumination of directional and informational signs shall either be concealed from general view, recessed into a building or structure, appear to be landscape accent lighting, or function as a decorative element in keeping with the character of the sign and any building to which it may be attached.
Notwithstanding the above, the lighting of directional and informational signs at gas stations shall be by indirect illumination only.
F. Location. Directional and information gas station signs shall be located on the pump island or perimeter of the site.
30.33.190
SECTION 21. Section 30.33.200 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.200 Temporary signs.
A. Except as otherwise authorized by Section 30.33.130, any temporary sign shall be used as an accessory sign only and for no other purposes. Except as otherwise authorized by Section 30.33.130, temporary wall signs shall not extend over or into any public right-of-way, street, alley, sidewalk or other public thoroughfare.
B. Temporary signs shall not be erected so as to prevent free ingress to or egress from any door, window or fire escape and shall not be attached to any standpipe or fire escape. Temporary signs shall be only ground signs or wall signs. The illumination in any manner of a temporary sign is prohibited.
640 of 1291
1. Residential real estate signs.
a. Number. One (1) residential real estate sign per dedicated street frontage not to exceed two (2) signs shall be permitted for each property being advertised for rent, lease or sale.
b. Area. The area of a residential real estate sign, including riders, shall not exceed six (6) square feet. A maximum of two (2) faces, neither having a sign face exceeding four (4) feet in any direction, shall be permitted. c. Zoning districts. Residential real estate signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts.
d. Height. The height of a residential real estate sign or residential real estate sign structure shall not exceed six (6) feet above ground level. e. Miscellaneous. A residential real estate sign shall be permitted to remain on the premises for a time period not to exceed one hundred twenty (120) days, or ten (10) days after the opening of escrow, whichever is longer.
2. Construction, commercial and industrial real estate signs. a. Number. One (1) construction, commercial or industrial real estate sign shall be permitted for each three hundred (300) feet of dedicated street frontage; however, each lot or site shall be permitted at least one (1) such sign, regardless of street frontage.
b. Area. The area of a construction, commercial or industrial real estate sign shall not exceed thirty-two (32) square feet for lots or sites less than five (5) acres in area and shall not exceed sixty-four (64) square feet for other lots or sites.
c. Zoning districts. Construction signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts.
Commercial and industrial real estate signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts except residential zones and for residential uses in mixed use zones.
d. Height. The height of a sign or sign structure advertising construction, commercial or industrial real estate shall not exceed twelve (12) feet above ground level.
e. Miscellaneous. Construction, commercial and industrial real estate signs shall be permitted to remain on the lot or site until all use and occupancy permits for such lot or site have been issued.
3. Subdivision signs.
a. Number. One (1) subdivision sign shall be permitted at each street entrance to a subdivision.
b. Area. The area of a subdivision sign shall not exceed sixty-four (64) square feet.
c. Zoning districts. Subdivision signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts. d. Location. No subdivision sign shall be nearer the street than the building setback line established pursuant to the zoning ordinance of this code or by setback ordinance. No other signs shall be permitted within the subdivision 641 of 1291
except residential real estate signs, directional signs and informational signs.
e. Height. The height of a subdivision sign or subdivision sign structure shall not exceed sixteen (16) feet above ground level.
f. Miscellaneous. Subdivision signs shall be removed upon the sale of all of the subdivision lots.
4. Christmas tree sales lot signs and pumpkin sales lot signs. a. Number. One (1) Christmas tree sales lot sign or pumpkin sales lot sign shall be permitted per site.
b. Area. The area of a Christmas tree sales lot sign or pumpkin sales lot sign shall not exceed thirty-two (32) square feet except nothing in this section shall prohibit the use of a double-faced sign so long as the area of each face does not exceed thirty-two (32) square feet.
c. Zoning districts. Christmas tree sales lot signs and pumpkin sales lot signs shall be permitted only in the C1, C2, C3, CH, CBD, CR, CE, MS, DSP, TOD, IND, IMU, IMU-R and SFMU zoning districts.
d. Height. The height of a Christmas tree sales lot sign or Christmas tree sales lot sign structure and the height of a pumpkin sales lot sign or pumpkin sales lot sign structure shall not exceed twelve (12) feet above ground level. e. Miscellaneous. Christmas tree sales lot signs shall only be displayed between November 1st and January 9th. Pumpkin sales lot signs shall only be displayed between October 15th and November 1st.
30.33.200
SECTION 22. Section 30.33.210 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.210 Miscellaneous signs.
A. Awning Signs.
1. Number. One (1) awning sign shall be permitted per awning.
2. Area. The area of an awning sign shall not exceed four (4) square feet.
3. Zoning districts. Awning signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts except residential zones and for residential uses in mixed use zones.
4. Height. The height of the face of an awning sign shall not exceed one (1) foot.
5. Miscellaneous.
a. Awning signs may be painted, placed or installed upon the vertically hanging border only of an awning, provided that such signs shall not extend above or below such hanging border.
b. Awning signs shall be of permanent matter.
c. No advertising shall be placed on any awning except the name of the owner and business, logogram and industry or pursuit conducted within the premises.
d. Backlighting of awnings which illuminates only a specific area or part of an awning which contains a sign shall be prohibited. 642 of 1291
B. Window Signs.
1. Number. For each ground floor occupancy of a building, one (1) illuminated window sign shall be permitted in each window to a maximum of two (2) which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking lot area. This section shall not permit illuminated advertising signs for alcoholic beverages at gas stations that are prohibited by state law. A maximum of two (2) illuminated window signs shall be permitted per establishment. A neon border being placed around the perimeter of a window as a decorative element void of text shall not be construed as sign area. Window signs that are not illuminated shall not be limited in number.
In the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones, one (1) non-illuminated window sign shall be permitted in an on-site residential leasing or sales office. Such leasing or sales office shall be located at ground level and shall be restricted to the leasing or sales of the residential units on the site.
2. Area. The area of an illuminated window sign shall not exceed four (4) square feet. Any signs constructed exclusively of neon tubing shall not exceed twentyfive (25) percent of the window area or a maximum of one hundred (100) square feet, whichever is less. Signs constructed of stained glass shall be permitted to cover the entire area of any window. Signs constructed of any other permitted material that is not illuminated shall be permitted only on the interior surface of the window glass, provided that no combination of any window signs covers more than twenty-five (25) percent of the area of any window.
3. Zoning districts. Window signs shall be permitted in all zoning districts except residential zones and residential uses in mixed use zones. In the IMU-R, SFMU, TOD and DSP zones, a non-illuminated window sign shall be permitted for an on-site residential leasing or sales office.
4. Lighting. Any lighting of window signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code and shall not cause disturbing glare onto any adjacent areas due to excessive brightness or method of illumination. Signs shall also be designed, installed, and maintained in such a manner that the spillover of any illumination of signs onto property located in a residential zone shall not exceed two (2) foot candles above ambient light levels.
C. Church Bulletin Boards. One (1) church bulletin board, not to exceed a total area of eighteen (18) square feet, or a vertical height of five (5) feet above the grade shall be permitted per lot or site used for church purposes. Any lighting shall be by indirect illumination only.
D. Signs for Vehicle Sales, Leasing and Rental Agencies.
1. Accessory wall signs.
a. Number. For each ground floor occupancy of a building, one (1) accessory wall sign shall be permitted on each wall which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area; provided, however, that no more than one (1) accessory wall sign shall be permitted per dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area. In the CA zone only, an additional accessory wall sign shall be permitted on each wall that is 643 of 1291
permitted to have a wall sign if the length of that wall is at least one hundred (100) feet. In the CA zone only, two (2) “secondary” accessory wall signs shall be permitted on each wall that is permitted to have a wall sign if the length of that wall is at least two hundred (200) feet and said wall directly faces Brand Boulevard.
b. Area. The area of an accessory wall sign on any wall permitted a sign shall not exceed two (2) square feet per foot of length of frontage of each ground floor occupancy which directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall or parking area. Nothing in this section shall be interpreted to permit the computation of allowable sign area on the basis of the sum, allocation or duplication of the eligible lengths. In the CA zone only, the area of all accessory wall signs, including “secondary” accessory wall signs, on any wall permitted a sign shall not exceed one and one half (1½) square feet per foot of length of frontage of each ground floor occupancy that directly faces a dedicated street, dedicated alley, mall, or parking area. c. Location.
i. Accessory wall signs shall only be attached to building walls having a vertical plane angle less than twenty (20) degrees. No wall sign shall extend more than two (2) feet above any eave line or have more than fifty (50) percent of its height above any eave line.
ii. No wall sign shall cover wholly or partially any required wall opening. d. Height. The lowest point of any accessory wall sign which projects over a driveway, service drive or any other traffic way more than six (6) inches from the wall to which it is attached shall be a minimum of seventeen (17) feet above ground level. The maximum sign face height of any “secondary” accessory wall sign shall be eighteen (18) inches.
e. Lighting. Any lighting of accessory wall signs shall be by indirect illumination only, in compliance with the electrical code.
f. Miscellaneous. An accessory wall sign shall be erected or constructed so that it is either integrated into the wall, flat against the wall to which it is attached, or projecting not more than ten (10) inches from the wall to which it is attached (as measured from the back surface of the sign).
2. Accessory ground signs.
a. Number. One (1) accessory ground sign shall be permitted for each dedicated street frontage of the site. A maximum of two (2) accessory ground signs shall be permitted per lot or site, regardless of the number of street frontages. In the CA zone only, an additional accessory ground sign shall be permitted along the Brand Boulevard frontage if the length of that frontage is at least two hundred (200) feet.
b. Area. The area of an accessory ground sign shall not exceed two (2) square feet per linear foot of site frontage as measured along a right-of-way line. In the CA zone only, the area of an accessory ground sign shall not exceed one and one-half (1½) square feet per linear foot of site frontage as measured along a right-of-way line. The total aggregate area of the signs shall not exceed six hundred forty (640) square feet. Nothing in this section 644 of 1291
shall be interpreted to permit the computation of allowable sign area of the basis of sum, allocation or duplication of the eligible frontages. c. Location.
i. No accessory ground sign shall be nearer the street than the building setback line established pursuant to the zoning ordinance of this code or by setback ordinance.
ii. On property at any corner formed by intersecting streets, no accessory ground sign shall be erected within that triangular area between the property lines twenty-five (25) feet from the point of their intersection, or in the case of rounded corners, the triangular area between the tangents to the curve at such corner and a diagonal line joining points on such tangents twenty-five (25) feet from the point of their intersection, if the traffic engineer determines the erection of a sign in such area will obstruct the view of vehicular traffic approaching the intersection of the intersecting streets. The tangents referred to above are those at the beginning and at the end of the curve at the corner.
iii. No portion of an accessory ground sign shall project over or through any portion of the roof, marquee or canopy of any building. d. Height. An accessory ground sign shall not exceed a height of fifty-seven (57) feet above ground level. In the CA zone only, accessory ground signs shall not exceed a height of thirty-five (35) feet above ground level only if there are two (2) ground signs along the Brand Boulevard frontage. e. Lighting. Any lighting of accessory ground signs shall be in compliance with the electrical code.
f. Miscellaneous.
i. A maximum of two (2) supporting poles, uprights, posts or braces shall be permitted for an accessory ground sign.
ii. The lowest point of any accessory ground sign which projects over a driveway, service drive, or any other vehicular traffic way shall be a minimum of fourteen (14) feet above ground level.
iii. No accessory ground sign shall be closer than fifteen (15) feet to any other accessory ground sign on the same lot or site.
iv. The width of an accessory ground sign shall not exceed forty (40) feet. v. All exposed backs or sides shall be suitably covered in order to conceal the structural members and bracing.
3. Banners in the CA zone only. The standards listed below shall apply to banners for vehicle sales, leasing and rental agencies in the CA zone. a. The following standards shall apply to both temporary and non-temporary banners:
i. The maximum height for a banner shall be twenty (20) feet. ii. The minimum ground clearance for a banner shall be eight (8) feet. 645 of 1291
iii. The minimum ground clearance for a banner over a driveway shall be fourteen (14) feet.
iv. All banners shall be located at least twenty (20) feet from residentiallyzoned property unless such property is not being used for residential purposes. No banners shall impair the visibility of signs located on adjacent property in the opinion of the director of community development.
v. Banners shall only be mounted to freestanding vertical poles, light standards, and poles or brackets attached to a building wall so as to project outward from the wall. No banners shall be attached to vehicles, building walls, freestanding walls or fences, or roofs of buildings. All mounting shall be consistent with Glendale Building Code standards.
vi. Any banner which is rigidly supported shall project a maximum of four (4) feet in each direction from the center of the supporting structure. vii. Banners may project a maximum of four (4) feet over the public rightof-way if attached to a pole which was existing on July 25, 2000. An encroachment permit shall also be required from the director of public works.
viii. Any pole which supports a banner constructed after July 25, 2000 shall be at least twenty (20) feet from another pole which also supports a banner.
b. The following additional standards shall apply to temporary banners:
i. A maximum number of two (2) fixed temporary banners shall be displayed at any given time.
ii. The maximum area for a fixed temporary banner shall be fifty (50) square feet.
iii. Temporary banners shall only be displayed for a maximum total of sixty (60) days in any calendar year.
c. The following additional standard shall apply to non-temporary banners:
i. The maximum area for a banner that is attached by one (1) vertical edge only to a freestanding vertical pole shall be ten (10) square feet.
E. Signs for Certain Shopping Centers. In addition to signs permitted elsewhere in this code, one (1) accessory ground sign shall be permitted for each shopping center provided such shopping center and such additional sign shall meet all the following criteria:
1. A unified shopping center under single ownership;
2. A minimum of four (4) acres of land area;
3. A minimum of ten (10) contiguous business establishments; and
4. No other ground sign be permitted to remain or be constructed. Such sign shall not exceed a maximum of fifty (50) feet above ground level; a maximum width of twenty (20) feet; and a maximum display surface area of two hundred sixty (260) square feet.
646 of 1291
F. Signs for Outdoor Vending Machines and Reverse Vending Machines. All signs located on vending machines and reverse vending machines shall meet the following criteria:
1. All signs shall be integrated into or onto or attached flush to the surfaces of the machine. No signs shall extend above or beyond the extremities of the machines.
2. All signs must relate to the product/use being housed in the machines.
3. These signs shall meet all other requirements contained in this chapter.
G. Signs for Freestanding Non-Motorized Portable Vending Carts. All signs located on portable vending carts shall meet the following criteria:
1. A maximum of two (2) signs shall be permitted as follows:
a. One (1) sign, not to exceed twenty-five (25) percent of the side of the cart, roof or canopy of the cart, where such sign will be located; b. One (1) menu board sign, no larger than eight and one-half (8½) inches by fourteen (14) inches.
2. All signs must relate to the product/use being housed in the portable cart;
3. All permitted signs shall be attached to the cart.
H. Residential Noncommercial Signs. One (1) residential noncommercial sign, not to exceed a total area of six (6) square feet and a height of six (6) feet above ground level shall be permitted per lot or site used for residential purposes. No lighting of the sign shall be permitted. Sign copy shall be limited to noncommercial speech.
I. Political Campaign Signs. One (1) non-illuminated sign shall be permitted up to a total area of six (6) square feet and a height of four (4) feet above ground level for each lot in a residential zone or thirty-two (32) square feet and a height of twelve (12) feet above ground level in a commercial or industrial zone.
J. Signs for Hospitals in the MS and TOD II Zones. These standards are applicable to all hospitals located in the medical service (MS) and TOD II zones. For the purposes of this section, Hospital shall include all facilities owned, operated, and in conjunction with a hospital use. Hospitals located in all other zones are subject to the provisions of this chapter. The following standards apply to all signs visible from the public street or sidewalk immediately adjacent to the property.
1. Banners. The standards listed below shall apply to banners for all hospitals located in the medical service (MS) and TOD II zones.
a. The following standards shall apply to banners affiliated with the hospital:
i. The maximum height above the ground for a banner shall be twentytwo (22) feet. ii. The minimum ground clearance for a banner shall be eight (8) feet. iii. The minimum ground clearance for a banner over a driveway shall be fourteen (14) feet.
iv. No banners shall impair visibility of signs located on adjacent property as determined by the director of community development. v. Banners shall only be mounted to freestanding vertical poles and light standards. No banners shall be attached to vehicles, building walls, 647 of 1291
freestanding walls or fences, or roofs of buildings. All mounting hardware shall be consistent with the Glendale Building Code. vi. Any banner which is rigidly supported shall project a maximum of four (4) feet in each direction from the center of the supporting structure. vii. The maximum number of banners for any project site allowable shall be three (3) per frontage or per driveway, whichever is greater. viii. A maximum number of two (2) fixed banners per pole shall be displayed at any given time.
ix. The maximum area for a fixed banner shall be sixty (60) square feet. x. Banners shall be maintained in good repair.
b. Banners not for a hospital are prohibited.
2. Light projection signs.
a. The following standards shall apply to light projection signs for all hospitals located in the medical service (MS) and TOD zones.
i. The maximum area allowable for a light projection sign shall be one thousand five hundred (1,500) square feet.
ii. Light projection signs shall not be permitted to shine onto any transparent surface of a building.
iii. No more than two (2) light projection signs may be approved for a hospital.
b. Light projection signs not for a hospital are prohibited.
3. Wall signs. In addition to those wall signs permitted by Section 30.33.120, additional wall signs may be permitted for a hospital in the medical service (MS) and TOD II zones subject to the following standards:
a. Wall signs shall be approved by the director of community development. b. Wall signs may be located on any building or structure, including any parking structure.
c. Cumulatively, a maximum of four (4) additional wall signs are permitted. d. Subject to the review and approval of the director of community development, all such additional wall signs shall be subject to the following standards:
i. The signs shall be proportional to the size and compatible with the architecture of the building or structure to which it is attached. ii. The signs shall not negatively impact the flow of traffic or cause confusion for motorists.
iii. The signs shall not contribute to visual overcrowding or be incompatible with the architecture and siting of adjacent buildings or other private or public improvements.
4. Other signs. In addition to those signs permitted under this title and in subsections J.1., 2. and 3. above, a maximum of twenty-five (25) other signs that are not visible from the public street or sidewalk immediately adjacent to the property are permitted.
648 of 1291
5. Changes to signs allowed for hospitals. Changes to signs allowed by subsection J., including size, locations, number, and lighting may be approved by the director of community development, so long as such changes are in substantial conformance with subsection J. The director may refer those sign changes which are not in substantial conformance with this section to the design review board for review and approval. Changing out the signs for replacement of new signs of the same material, shape, size and illumination method and consistent with all other aspects of this section does not require approval from the director of community development.
SECTION 23. Section 30.33.215 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.215 Pedestrian signs.
A. Number. One (1) pedestrian sign shall be permitted, including any permitted on public right-of-way pursuant to Section 30.33.110 of this code, directly in front of each ground floor occupancy.
B. Locations. Pedestrian signs shall only be permitted within the Downtown Specific Plan (DSP) and Transit Oriented Development (TOD) zones.
C. Style. Only A-frame style signs are permitted (see Exhibit 10 for examples).
D. Height and Width. Pedestrian signs shall not exceed a height of forty eight (48) inches. Width shall not exceed thirty (30) inches.
E. Area. Total sign area shall not exceed ten (10) square feet (each side of a twosided sign may not exceed ten (10) square feet).
F. Pedestrian signs may not:
1. Be located in front of a ground floor occupancy if that business is separated from a public street by a parking lot;
2. Unreasonably interfere with or impede the flow of pedestrian or vehicular traffic, including any legally parked or stopped vehicle;
3. Create visibility hazards for pedestrian or vehicular traffic;
4. Unreasonably interfere with the ingress into or egress from any residence or place of business;
5. Endanger the safety of persons or property;
6. Obstruct a wheelchair ramp;
7. Be attached or secured in any way to any object in the public right-of-way;
8. Restrict the use of poles, posts, traffic signs or signals, utility access vaults, manholes, hydrants, mailboxes or other objects permitted at or near such location;
9. Obstruct a continuous through pedestrian path of at least four (4) feet in width;
10. Have any balloons, streamers, pennants or other objects designed and fastened in such a manner as to move upon being subjected to pressure by wind or breeze.
G. Miscellaneous. 649 of 1291
1. Applicants shall obtain a pedestrian sign permit from the director of public works and display the permit on the sign. Application shall be made on forms prescribed by the director.
2. The pedestrian sign permit shall be renewed annually. The permit is not transferable to any other sign or to anyone other than the original applicant.
3. The face of the pedestrian sign may have changeable copy but not individual letters. The entire face may be replaced or repainted periodically without the need to renew the application. The face may be composed of a chalkboard but a dry-erase board is prohibited.
4. Pedestrian signs may advertise more than one business but no business may have advertisements on more than one (1) sign.
5. The sign shall not be animated or illuminated.
6. Pedestrian signs may only be displayed during the hours of operation of the business.
7. Pedestrian sign frames shall be made of powder-coated metal, aluminum, or outdoor-grade wood. Plastic frames are prohibited. Signs shall be professional in appearance in a manner as shown in the examples in Exhibit 10 to this chapter. If signs are not maintained, the applicant shall remove them immediately upon notice from the director.
8. Approval of the pedestrian sign permit shall be at the discretion of the director of public works. If the director finds that the proposed sign is inconsistent with one (1) or more of the standards listed above, the application shall be denied.
9. In addition to any other penalty set forth in this code, any pedestrian sign that is in violation of this code is declared to be a public nuisance and may be summarily abated, with the costs of such abatement born by the presumed owner of the sign, pursuant to the procedures established in the Glendale Municipal Code.
SECTION 24. Section 30.33.220 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.33.220 Sign programs.
Sign programs are regulated as follows:
A. Sign programs shall be required for:
1. Lots or sites where new nonresidential buildings or additions of nonresidential floor area are approved for construction after July 25, 2000 and where there are at least two (2) separate nonresidential occupancies on the lot or site; or
2. Lots or sites where new nonresidential occupancies are proposed for buildings approved for construction after July 25, 2000; or
3. Lots or sites for proposed alternative accessory wall signs pursuant to Section
30.33.120(D).
Sign programs shall only be applicable to lots or sites in the DSP, TOD, IMU, IMUR, SFMU, C1, C2, C3, CR, CH, CA, MS, and IND zoning districts. Sign programs shall apply only to the following accessory signs and shall be limited to regulate 650 of 1291
standards related to the location, sign construction type (e.g., box sign, channel letters, raceway, can, reverse channel letter, etc.) and the method of illumination of the signs: Wall signs, high rise wall signs, ground signs, marquee signs, undermarquee signs, and projecting signs. All other signs, as permitted in this chapter, shall not be restricted by sign programs.
B. The director of community development shall have the authority to review and approve sign programs in accordance with the procedures and standards outlined in this title. Subsequent sign programs for sites originally reviewed and/or approved by the design review board, the city council or the Glendale redevelopment agency shall be reviewed by the director of community development.
C. All signs located on a lot or site for which a sign program has been approved shall conform to the sign program. Sign programs shall continue to remain in effect until superseded by a new or revised sign program. Existing sign programs in effect prior to July 25, 2000 shall continue to remain in effect and shall be binding unless superseded by a new or revised sign program.
SECTION 25. Section 30.34.090 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.34.090 Live/work units in the DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU, and TOD zones.
In addition to the other provision of the zoning ordinance, live/work units in the DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zones shall be subject to the following requirements:
A. Purpose. This section provides standards for the development of new live/work units and for the reuse of existing commercial and industrial structures to accommodate live/work opportunities. Live/work units are intended to be occupied by business operators who live in the same structure that contains the commercial or industrial activity. A live/work unit is intended to function predominantly as workspace with incidental residential accommodations.
B. Applicability and Allowed Uses. The provisions of this section shall apply to live/work units where permitted in the DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R,SFMU, and TOD zones. Allowable uses for the nonresidential portion of the live/work unit shall be those uses permitted or conditionally permitted in the respective zones for the SFMU, IMU,IMU-R and TOD zones, or, for the DSP zone, those uses permitted or conditionally permitted pursuant to Section 3.3 of the DSP.
C. Limitations on Use. All uses shall be conducted entirely within a completely enclosed building which is attached to a permanent foundation, other portions of this title notwithstanding.
A live/work unit shall not be established or used in conjunction with any of the following activities:
1. Adult businesses; or
2. Other activities or uses, not compatible with residential activities and/or that have the possibility of affecting the health or safety of live/work unit residents, because of dust, glare, heat, noise, noxious gases, odor, smoke, traffic, vibration, or other impacts, or would be hazardous because of materials, processes, products, or wastes, as determined by the director of community development. 651 of 1291
D. Development Standards.
1. Floor area requirements. The minimum total floor area of a live/work space shall be one thousand (1,000) square feet within each unit. Not more than fifty (50) percent of the total floor area of each unit shall be used for living space.
Floor areas, other than those reserved for living space, shall be reserved and regularly used for working and display space.
2. Street frontage treatment. Each live/work unit fronting a public street, and located at street level, shall have a pedestrian-oriented frontage that publicly displays the interior of the nonresidential areas of the structure.
3. Access to units. Where more than one live/work unit is proposed within a single structure, each live/work unit shall be separated from other live/work units and other uses in the structure. Access to individual units shall be from streets, common access areas, corridors, or hallways. Access to each unit shall be clearly identified to provide for emergency services.
4. Internal layout.
a. The living space within the live/work unit shall be contiguous with, and an integral part of the working space, with direct access between the two areas, and not as a separate stand-alone dwelling unit. b. The residential component shall not have a separate street address from the business component.
E. Operating Standards.
1. Occupancy. A live/work unit shall be occupied and used only by a business operator, and/or a household of which at least one member shall be the business operator.
2. Sale or rental of portions of unit. No portion of a live/work unit may be separately leased, rented, or sold.
3. Notice to occupants. The owner or developer of any structure containing live/work units shall provide written notice to all live/work occupants and users that the surrounding area may be subject to levels of dust, fumes, noise, or other impacts associated with commercial and industrial uses at higher levels than would be expected in more typical residential areas. Noise and other standards shall be those applicable to commercial or industrial properties in the applicable zone.
4. On-premises sales. On-premises sales of goods is limited to those produced within the live/work unit; provided, the retail sales activity shall be incidental to the primary production work within the unit. These provisions shall allow occasional open studio programs and gallery shows.
5. Nonresident employees. Up to two (2) persons who do not reside in the live/work unit may work in the unit.
F. Changes in Use. In all zones except DSP or TOD zone, after approval, a live/work unit shall not be converted to either entirely residential use or entirely business use unless authorized through conditional use permit approval.
SECTION 26. Section 30.34.100 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby 652 of 1291
amended as follows:
30.34.100 Mixed-use development in the DSP, MS, IMU-R, SFMU and TOD zones.
In addition to the other provision of the Zoning Ordinance, mixed-use development in the DSP, IMU-R, SFMU, and TOD zones shall be subject to the following requirements:
A. Purpose. This section provides locational, developmental, and operational standards for the establishment of mixed-use developments. For the purpose of this section, mixed-use projects are developments that combine commercial retail/office, industrial (except in the DSP and SFMU zones), and residential uses on a single parcel, or as components of a single development.
B. Mix of Uses. A mixed-use project may only combine commercial retail/office, industrial (except in the SFMU zones), and residential uses. In the SFMU zone, lots having frontage along San Fernando Road, Broadway, and Colorado, require that commercial uses be located along the street frontage.
C. Loading and storage Facilities. Loading areas and solid waste storage facilities shall be located as far as possible from the on-site residential units and shall be completely screened from view from adjacent residential portions of the project. The location and design of the solid waste enclosures shall account for potential nuisances from odors.
D. Exterior Equipment. All exterior mounted equipment shall be screened from view.
Special consideration shall be given to the location and screening of noise generating equipment (e.g., air conditioning, exhaust fans, refrigeration units, etc.).
Noise reducing screens and insulation may be required where equipment has the potential to impact residential uses.
E. Hours of Operation. The review authority may restrict the hours of operation of nonresidential uses to mitigate adverse impacts on the residential uses.
F. Building Design.
1. Design standards. A mixed-use project shall be designed and constructed to:
a. Be compatible with and complement adjacent land uses; b. Maintain or increase the existing number of residential units generally and specifically those for seniors and low- and moderate-income households; and
c. Mitigate glare, light, noise, traffic, and other potential environmental impacts to the maximum extent feasible.
d. Except in the DSP, the architectural style and use of materials shall be consistent throughout the entire project. Differences in materials and/or architectural details shall only occur on a structure where the intent is to differentiate between the residential scale and character of the structure and the commercial scale and character.
2. Separate entrances. Except in the DSP, when residential and commercial uses are provided in the same structure, separate entrances shall be provided for each use.
653 of 1291
3. Distance between dwellings. Except in the DSP, a minimum distance of ten (10) feet shall separate exterior walls of separate buildings containing dwelling units on the same lot. The windows or window/doors of any dwelling unit shall not face the windows or window/doors of any other dwelling unit unless separated by a distance of ten (10) or more feet except where the angle between the walls of the separate dwelling units is ninety (90) degrees or more.
Walls parallel to each other shall be considered to be at a zero-degree angle.
SECTION 27. Section 30.34.120 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, is hereby amended as follows:
30.34.120 Parking structures.
In addition to the standards required in Chapter 30.32 (Parking and Loading), the following regulations shall apply in the DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R and SFMU zones, and in the TOD II zone for hospital uses.
A. Site Organization.
1. Where appropriate, parking structures shall incorporate ground floor retail adjacent to the public sidewalk.
2. A minimum five (5) foot landscaped setback shall be provided on all sides of the parking structure except where ground floor retail space is provided.
B. Access and Circulation.
1. Vehicle stacking areas for entering and exiting traffic shall be sufficiently long to minimize the back up of traffic onto surrounding streets or within the structure.
A minimum of two (2) vehicle lengths of stacking distance shall be provided between the street and the control gate.
2. One (1) inbound lane shall be provided for a structure with a capacity of up to five hundred (500) vehicles. At least two (2) inbound lanes shall be provided for structures with a capacity of five hundred (500) or more vehicles.
3. Exit lanes shall be provided at a ratio of one (1) lane for each two hundred (200) to two hundred fifty (250) vehicles. The maximum aisle length shall not exceed four hundred (400) feet without providing a cross aisle.
4. Ramp grades shall not exceed ten (10) percent and parking areas shall not exceed a slope of four (4) to five (5) percent.
C. Lighting and Security.
1. A minimum of five (5) footcandles shall be provided inside the structure and a minimum of three (3) footcandles for exterior parking areas. Higher levels are recommended for remote areas subject to security problems (e.g., stairways, elevators, and other pedestrian access points). Minimum illumination, levels measured at the level of the floor, shall be as provided in Table 30.34-A:
Table 30.34-A
Minimum Illumination Levels
Facility Illumination Level
Stairways and exits 5 footcandles
Interior driving aisles, centerline 5
Interior parking areas at barrier railings 0.5 654 of 1291
Roof parking areas 0.5
2. Lighting levels shall be equally distributed to provide uniform illumination over all parking areas.
3. Light sources shall be shielded so that the source of the illumination is not seen from outside the structure.
4. The architectural design of the structure should eliminate possible hiding places and openings that could allow random pedestrian access.
5. During periods when parking activity is substantially less than the structure capacity, as during night operations, there shall be a means of securing unused parking levels from use, including stairwells and elevators. If the structure is not operated on a twenty-four (24) hour basis the entire facility shall be secured from access during hours when the facility is closed.
6. For security reasons, at least one (1) or two (2) sides of the stair tower should include glass running vertically the height of the tower. Elevators should be provided with glass-back cabs and shafts.
7. Stairs and elevators should be located adjacent to a street on the exterior of the structure where lobbies can be exposed to outside view.
D. Building design.
1. Parking structures shall be designed to help reduce the mass and scale of the structure and to ensure their compatibility with surrounding uses. The following design guidelines shall be implemented to the greatest extent feasible whenever they apply.
2. Conceal view of vehicles in the structure through a combination of screen walls and plantings.
3. Design the structure’s exterior elevations to avoid a monolithic appearance.
This can be accomplished as follows:
a. Minimize horizontal and vertical banding by balancing both horizontal and vertical elements.
b. Use simple, clean geometric forms, and coordinated massing. Step back upper levels of the structure.
c. Coordinate openings in the parking structure with the size and modulation of adjacent windows, structural bays, and storefronts if the parking structure contains other uses.
d. Size openings in the parking structure to resemble large windows as in an office building.
e. Use masonry materials that are predominantly light in color, but avoid unpainted concrete.
f. Avoid a sloping ramp appearance by providing level and uniform spandrels. g. Visually define and differentiate between pedestrian and vehicular entrances through appropriate architectural detailing.
655 of 1291
SECTION 28. Pursuant to the California Environmental Quality Act, the City Council has reviewed and considered the addendum to the previously certified Final Program Environmental Impact Report South Glendale Community Plan (SCH No. 2016091026) (Final EIR) for the proposed Tropico Transit Oriented Development Design and Development Standards project.
SECTION 29. Severability. This ordinance is adopted under the authority of the Charter of the City of Glendale and State law. If any section, subsection, clause or phrase is declared invalid or otherwise void by a court of competent jurisdiction, it shall not affect any remaining provision hereof. In this regard the City Council finds and declares that it would have adopted this measure notwithstanding any partial invalidity hereof.
SECTION 30. Pipeline Provisions. Development applications which have been deemed complete, approved discretionary entitlements, or ministerial projects submitted to plan check prior to the adoption of this ordinance shall be reviewed under the zoning rules and regulations which were in effect on the day prior to adoption of this ordinance. The foregoing notwithstanding, any applicant may make a request in writing to the Director of Community Development that their application be reviewed under the zoning rules and regulations as amended by this ordinance.
SECTION 31. Effective Date. This ordinance becomes effective on the thirtieth (30th) day after its passage.
Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on the ___ day of ____________, 2023. ______________________________
Mayor
Attest
___________________________________
City Clerk
656 of 1291
STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.
CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, Suzie Abajian, Ph.D., City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. ______________ was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the ______ day of _______________, 2023 by the following vote:
Ayes:
Noes:
Absent:
Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
657 of 1291
ORDINANCE NO.
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF CITY OF GLENDALE,
CALIFORNIA, AMENDING THE ZONING MAP TO REFLECT NEW
ZONING DESIGNATIONS RELATED TO ZONE CHANGE PZC-0007-2023
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TROPICO TRANSIT ORIENTED DISTRICT
ZONING AND OBJECTIVE DESIGN STANDARDS PROJECT
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
WHEREAS, the City Council has conducted a noticed public hearing, pursuant to the provisions of Section Chapter 30.61 of the Glendale Municipal Code and Chapter 3, Title 7 of the Government Code of the State of California; and WHEREAS, the City Council has reviewed and considered all materials, communications, public testimony, maps and exhibits of current record for the proposed Zone Change PZC-0007-2023, in connection with the Tropico Transit Oriented Development Zoning and Objective Design Standards Project and has reviewed the proposed Zoning Map Amendment in connection therewith, as shown in Exhibit A; and WHEREAS, the City Council has taken into consideration the recommendation of the City of Glendale Planning Commission on said Zone Change and Zoning Map Amendment; and
WHEREAS, the City Council has found the Zone Change and related Zoning Map Amendment will promote and protect the public health, safety, comfort, convenience, and general welfare of the citizens of Glendale; and WHEREAS, pursuant to the California Environmental Quality Act, the City Council has reviewed and considered the addendum to the previously certified Final Program Environmental Impact Report South Glendale Community Plan (SCH No. 2016091026) (Final EIR) for the proposed Tropico Transit Oriented Development Design and Development Standards project proposed Zone Change and Zoning Map Amendment.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF
THE CITY OF GLENDALE that
1. The recitals herein above are incorporated by this reference and made a part hereof.
2. The proposed amendment to the Glendale Zoning Map in connection with Zone Change PZC-0007-2023, as depicted in Exhibit A attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, is approved and shall be made part of the City's Zoning Map effective 30 days after passage of this Ordinance.
Adopted by the Council of the City of Glendale on the day of , 2023. 658 of 1291
Mayor
Attest
City Clerk
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES ) SS.
CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, Dr. Suzie Abajian, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the day of , 2023 by the following vote:
Ayes:
Noes:
Absent:
Abstain:
City Clerk
659 of 1291
EXHIBIT A
660 of 1291
CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
AGENDA ITEM
Hearing: Amendments to the General Plan Land Use Map (Case No. PGPA-001746- 2023), Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 (Zoning Code Text Amendment) and Zoning Map (Case No. PZC-0007-2023) relating generally to the Tropico Transit Oriented District (TOD) Zoning and Objective Design Standards Project
1. Resolution Amending the General Plan Land Use Map
2. Ordinance for Introduction Amending Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995
3. Ordinance for Introduction Amending the Citywide Zoning Map
COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Public Hearing / Ordinance Introduction
Approved for September 26, 2023 calendar
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Council is requested to review and act on the proposed amendments to the General Plan Land Use Map, the Zoning Map, as well as the Zoning Code related to the Tropico Transit Oriented Development (TOD) District Zoning and Objective Design Standards Project.
The request includes approval of General Plan Land Use Map Amendments for existing portions of Tropico from “Community Services Commercial” to “Mixed Use”, and amendments to Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 (Zoning Code Amendment), adding a new zoning chapter entitled “Transit Oriented Development (TOD) Districts” with corresponding development and objective design standards, as well as amending sections of GMC 30.10.010, 30.30.010, 30.30.020, 30.30.030, 30.31,
30.31.020, 30.32, 30.32.030, 30.32.040, 30.32.050, 30.32.070, 30.32.090, 30.32.171,
30.32.172, 30.32.173, 30.33, 30.33.120, 30.33.140, 30.33.150, 30.33.180, 30.33.190,
30.33.200, 30.33.210, 30.33.215, 30.33.220, 30.34, 30.34.090, 30.34.100, 30.34.120 relating to the new Tropico TOD zoning, and an amendment to the Zoning Map to reflect the new TOD zoning.
661 of 1291
2 a 7
COUNCIL PRIORITIES
This project will support and advance the following Council priorities:
Mobility, Traffic & Pedestrian Safety, and Economic Development
RECOMMENDATION
That City Council approve the proposed amendments to the General Plan Land Use Map, Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995, and the Zoning Map, in order to establish a new Transit Oriented Development zone, consistent with updates to the Land Use and Zoning Maps, as well as new design and development standards for the Tropico area, and consider the Project’s Addendum to the Final Program Environmental Impact Report to the South Glendale Community Plan. The project also includes miscellaneous code amendments throughout the Zoning Code in order to implement applicable references to the new TOD zone.
BACKGROUND
The Tropico area (Exhibit 1) is located in the southernmost portion of the City, adjacent to Glendale Transit Center and the Los Angeles City / Atwater Village border, close to high-quality transportation, and features a mix of industrial, commercial and a few residential uses. In 2012, the City received a grant from Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority (Metro) to help the City develop a transit oriented plan for the area; the grant resulted in a neighborhood-level policy study titled “Tropico Center Plan” that was adopted by City Council on July 31, 2018. The Tropico Center Plan consisted of policies and recommendations to promote transit, first mile-last mile connections, streetscape improvements and walkable streets, and to support pedestrian-friendly, mixed-use development, many of which were carried over into the SGCP.
Having certified the Final Environmental Impact Report for the South Glendale Community Plan (FEIR for the SGCP) and having adopted the Tropico Center Plan, City Council also initiated the land use and zoning code text/map amendments to create a Transit Oriented Development (TOD) zone for the Tropico TOD center consistent with the SGCP and the Tropico Center Plan.
The proposed Tropico TOD zoning, development and design standards were drafted in response to Council’s direction to implement the vision in the Tropico Center Plan, while being consistent with the General Plan and fitting into the existing Zoning Code structure as a new mixed use chapter.
Note: Following Council’s 2018 certification of the SGCP FEIR, and related approvals for the SGCP, a lawsuit was filed challenging these actions. The Los Angeles Superior Court and the California Appellate Court rejected the legal challenges and the California Supreme Court rejected Petitioner’s request for further review. The case is final.
On September 23, 2022, Planning staff provided City Council with an update on the Tropico planning efforts and presented preliminary Tropico design and development 662 of 1291
3 a 7
standards for Council’s review. The detailed presentation went over the proposed density and height limits for the new TOD zones, and the objective design standards for site planning, massing & scale, and design & detailing. The proposed zoning included graphics for the objective design standards in a similar format to the Downtown Specific Plan. Staff also summarized proposed modifications to certain parking standards in the Glendale Municipal Code for the new TOD zoning.
Council commented on street tree spacing, public realm/sidewalk widths, usability of publicly accessible open space, minimum unit sizes, density in the TOD II district to match that of TOD I, along with other comments and suggestions (see Analysis section for further details).
The Tropico Staff Report from September 23, 2022 is available online at: Tropico City Council Agenda & Staff Report 08-13-2022 (pages 3-70)
On December 8, 2022, the preliminary zoning and design standards were presented to the Design Review Board (DRB) for comment. The DRB provided feedback (Exhibit 3) and a recommendation that the City Council adopt the proposed zoning and design standards for Tropico TOD.
Having incorporated City Council’s and DRB’s comments, staff presented the final draft of the Tropico zoning and objective design standards (text amendments to the Zoning Code), in addition to the proposed map amendments to the General Plan Land Use Map and Citywide Zoning Map, to the Planning Commission on August 16, 2023. The Commission complimented the objective design standards and commented on the residential unit sized and density in Tropico, and voted to recommend approval of the proposed amendments to City Council (Exhibit 4).
Note: Most of the work on the Tropico zoning and objective design standards is being funded by a SB 2 Planning grant from the California Department of Housing and Community Development (HCD) to assist in accelerating or streamlining the production of affordable housing, consistent with the state’s planning priorities. Consulting firm Crandall Arambula assisted staff with completion of the design and development standards for Tropico.
ANALYSIS
The new Tropico TOD Project consists of several amendments:
• General Plan Land Use Element Map amendments to redesignate certain Tropico areas from “Community Services Commercial” to “Mixed Use” which references Urban Centers;
• Zoning Code Text amendments to introduce a new TOD zoning chapter (GMC Chapter 30.16 Transit Oriented Development Districts (TOD)) and amend various zoning chapters, including GMC 30.30 Site Planning, GMC 30.32 Parking and Loading, GMC 30.33 Signs, GMC 30.34 Standards for Specific Uses, etc., to make consistent references to the new TOD zoning; and
663 of 1291
4 a 7
• Zoning Map amendment for the new TOD zoning.
GENERAL PLAN LAND USE MAP AMENDMENTS
In order to implement the TOD zoning, a General Plan Land Use Map Amendment (Case No. PGPA-001746-2023) is proposed for certain portions of the Tropico.
The SGCP and its certified FEIR discussed the two new zones for Tropico: TOD I and TOD II, and a new corresponding Land Use Element designation of Urban Center, which refers to “High density mixed-use centers served by regional and local transit with improved bus stops, wide sidewalks, and street trees. Urban Centers have freeway access; primary access is by major and minor arterials.” (FEIR, pg. 3-13).
Currently, the existing Land Use Element features the following land use designations, which already include Mixed Use and Urban Centers as allowable uses in the Tropico area:
“COMMUNITY PLAN areas provide additional land use and urban design guidance at the community and neighborhood level. Community plans identify design characteristics for land use designations and provide a link between general land uses and other land use regulations such as zoning and design guidelines.” (Land Use Element pg. 15; Resolution No. 11-229, adopted November 29, 2011) “MIXED USE DEVELOPMENT areas are generally located along the City's major arterials. These areas generally allow for a compatible mix of commercial, industrial, and residential land uses, or just (stand alone) commercial, industrial, or residential land uses in various combinations depending on the specific zoning district designation. Urban Corridors, Urban Centers and Campus may be appropriate land use design categories for mixed use development areas.
Residential densities generally range from a low of 35 to a high of 100 dwelling units to the acre (du/ac), with the specific density being adjusted depending on the adjoining land use and zoning district designation to help ensure compatibility between land uses. For example, the 35 du/ac density is available to sites abutting a single-family zoning district designation, the 87 du/ac density is available to sites abutting a multi-family zoning district, while the highest allowable density of 100 du/ac is only available to sites abutting nonresidential zoning districts. Residential development (mixed use or free-standing) at even higher densities may be permitted in the downtown area and is discussed under the Downtown Specific Plan area land use category.” (Land Use Element pg. 15, italics added; Resolution No. 11-229, adopted November 29, 2011)
The existing land use designations in Tropico are Mixed Use and Community Services Commercial (Exhibit 5). The Community Services Commercial designation is described in the Land Use Element as:
664 of 1291
5 a 7
“Community Commercial Services/Centers - This category of commercial land use contains two distinct commercial types. The types are combined in that they both serve community shopping functions. First, community commercial centers are recommended to be very restrictive as to uses allowed, similar to the neighborhood centers but at a larger market scale. Secondly, community services should feature flexibility, in the range and type of services and facilities provided.
Ordinances citing the range of uses permitted in these areas must consider as desirable a full range of functional services provided to the community. This may include such varied uses as personal services, shopping, offices (medical, real estate, etc.) and restricted industries which serve local retail needs such as furniture repair, automotive repair, and print shops. It must be clearly noted that these services are distinctly divided into separate categories (centers and services) and are so indicated on the Land Use Plan.
Although encouraging varied uses to locate in these areas, to maintain attractability and compatibility, a variety of performance/design criteria must be employed. These criteria should consider each type of use based on its performance in respect to traffic generation and required parking, structural soundproofing and appearance, landscaping, and compatibility relative to the concept of clustering of uses for mutual benefit and limiting more intense uses in a number of locations.” (Land Use Element pg. 23)
A correction must be pointed out regarding the land use designation for the Glendale Memorial Hospital and surrounding properties, bordered by Los Feliz on the north, Central Avenue on the west, San Fernando Road on the south-west, Cerritos Avenue on the south and alley parallel to Brand Boulevard on the east. These properties were identified in the SGCP maps as having a land use designation of “Public/Semi-Public”, when in fact, the area was previously designated as “Community Services Commercial”, as per Resolution No. 12-09, adopted on January 24, 2012, related to the repeal of the South Brand Boulevard Specific Plan (Case No. PGP 2010-003).
Because the SGCP has not yet been adopted in its entirety (only the Tropico Center Plan component of the overall SGCP), the Land Use Element that is currently in the process of being comprehensively amended does not yet include the SGCP land use designations. Accordingly, the existing Mixed Use land use designation in the existing Land Use Element already identifies the intended mix of commercial, industrial and residential land uses located along the City’s major arterials, in addition to the Urban Center reference, with densities up to 100 dwelling units to the acre – which is consistent with the land uses and densities identified in the proposed TOD zoning. Accordingly, it is not necessary to amend the General Plan Element Text, but only amend the Land Use Element Map to adjust the location of the existing Community Services areas of Tropico as Mixed Use (Exhibit 6). This would result in all of Tropico having a land use designation 665 of 1291
6 a 7
of Mixed Use, which is consistent with the existing allowable Land Use Element use designations for the area and is consistent with the SCGP, Tropico Center Plan, and the scope of analysis in the certified SGCP Final EIR.
ZONING CODE TEXT AMENDMENTS
New Chapter: GMC 30.16 Transit Oriented Development Districts As identified during the September 2022 Council presentation, the proposed TOD zoning standards will be added as a new chapter in the Zoning Code, entitled “Transit Oriented Development (TOD) Zone”. The new TOD zone features two districts based on the Tropico Center Plan and on direction from the Council:
TOD I District. The Transit Oriented Development I (TOD I) district is a district containing the City’s historic industrial base and a growing mixed-use and residential neighborhood generally located between the westerly border of the City, the Brand Boulevard of Cars, and the easterly border of the City, south of Cypress Street; it is within a five-minute walking distance of the Glendale Transportation Center. The primary intent of the TOD-I district is to facilitate diverse employment options and a range of housing opportunities – compatible in scale and form with a pedestrian oriented public realm and accessible to Tropico’s high quality public transportation offerings, and walkable neighborhoods at densities up to 100 units per acre.
TOD II District. The TODII district builds on the goals of TOD I, and includes hospital uses and neighboring properties east of Central Avenue, south of Los Feliz Road, west of the Brand Boulevard of Cars and north of Cerritos Avenue. The primary intent of this zone is to allow for future hospital expansion that includes building heights up to 200 feet and encourages uses which support the hospital, such as medical offices, treatment facilities, and special needs housing, as well as residential development at densities up to 100 units per acre.
Staff previously presented three TOD districts to Council in September 2022:
• TOD I district allowed for densities up to 87 dwelling units per acre (du/ac), which was consistent with the 2018 SGCP decision, but a downzone from the existing IMU-R and SFMU allowable densities for the TOD I district. • TOD II district allowed for densities up to 43 du/ac, which was consistent with Council’s SGCP decision to maintain the existing C3 allowable density (per the R-1250 zoning standards for residential development) for the district. • TOD III district focused on hospital uses, while allowing development up to 200 feet in height and for residential development at densities up to 100 du/ac. The height and density limits for this district were specifically agreed upon by City Council as part of the 2018 South Glendale Plan hearing. 666 of 1291
7 a 7
The three districts reflected City Council’s prior direction to maintain the existing density limits for the existing zoning in the SGCP area, aside from the TOD III hospital zone: up to 43 du/ac for C3-zoned sites greater than 90 feet in width, and up to 100 du/ac for IMU-R and SFMU sites when not adjacent to multi-family zones (Exhibit 7).
During the September 2022 Tropico presentation, staff also proposed, and Council concurred, that based on the geographical proximity to the Glendale Transit Center and mass transit line along San Fernando Road, Central and Los Feliz Avenues, as well as comments from the development community regarding the 43 du/ac density limit for certain prime sites in Tropico, there was a transit-oriented residential development potential in the TOD II district. Council ultimately directed staff to match the TOD II density limit to that of the TOD I density limit of up to 100 du/ac; these are densities that were analyzed in the SGCP EIR. As such, staff has blended TOD I and TOD II into one district and is therefore now proposing only two districts instead of three, which is consistent with the number of proposed TOD districts in the SGCP and Tropico Center Plan, and is consistent with the existing Land Use Element (Exhibit 8).
Land Uses and Permit Requirements Table:
For ease of use, the new TOD chapter includes a use table formatted like the use table used in the Commercial, Industrial and Mixed Use chapters of the current Zoning Code.
The permitted and conditionally permitted uses in each of the districts are essentially the same as in the corresponding C3, IMU-R and SFMU underlying zoning, except for TOD II, which focuses on medical and other uses that support the existing hospital uses.
General Development Table:
The TOD chapter also includes a General Development Standards Table using the same table format used in the other zoning district chapters. Aside from the standard references, the table includes the following pertinent development standards:
Maximum Densities: The table specifies the densities for the two new TOD districts:
• TOD I - Up to 100 du/ac when not adjacent to multi-family zoning (as directed by Council), otherwise – 87 du/ac (as permitted in the existing SMFU and IMU-R zones); and
• TOD II – Maximum 100 du/ac (as directed by Council in 2018).
These densities are consistent with the density limits discussed and conform with Council direction from the September 2022 presentation.
Maximum Heights:
• The maximum height in the TOD I district is proposed at 60 feet, as presented during the SGCP hearing and Tropico presentation.
• The maximum height for the TOD II (hospital) district is 200 feet, as directed by Council in 2018.
667 of 1291
8 a 7
TOD OBJECTIVE DESIGN STANDARDS SECTIONS:
As described during the September 2022 presentation, the new TOD chapter features four subsections with objective design standards that are similar to ones in the DSP: Site Planning; Massing & Scale; Architectural Elements; and Open Space, including landscaping standards.
Site Planning:
Public Realm:
Similar to the DSP standards for building setbacks regarding parkways, sidewalks and building adjacent zones (DSP 4.1.3), the new TOD chapter provides standards focus on creating a comfortable and inviting pedestrian experience. Council has made it very clear that an inviting pedestrian environment is vital to promoting other means of transportation, like walking to adjacent mass transit that connects residents and workers to other areas of the city and beyond, and the standards have been drafted to ensure and promote that high quality pedestrian experience.
Council feedback during the September 2022 presentation included comments on the tree spacing in the public right-of-way and support of the change to allow a “Public Realm” dimension of 12 feet for narrow streets, while maintaining the minimum 15-foot “Public Realm Setback” consisting of a landscaped “Parkway Zone”, “Sidewalk Zone”, and “Building Adjacent Zone” for Los Feliz, Central and San Fernando. Regardless of Public Realm width, the sidewalks in this area would be a minimum six feet, wide enough for two persons. The graphics for “Public Realm Setback” section for these two street typologies has been updated. The originally proposed 25-foot spacing for street trees (required shade trees) has been modified by the Urban Forester and Public Works Street Tree Division: that street trees (minimum 24-inch box shade trees) shall be installed in the parkway at a spacing determined per the City Arborist’s specifications for the species being planted to allow for appropriate spacing and that existing street trees shall be maintained unless removal is required by the City.
Building Setbacks:
Council had no comments on the proposed building setbacks in September 2022 and staff is presenting the same standards for the final draft. Street front setbacks in the TOD districts depend on the type of building proposed: non-residential (e.g., commercial and industrial) and residential. No setback is required for nonresidential buildings and mixed-use buildings with non-residential ground floor occupancies. For residential buildings and ground floor residential units, in order to achieve privacy and separation for the residential units from the public realm, a minimum five-foot average setback is required. No setback is required if the units are located between 30 and 48 inches above grade, such as with stoops adjacent to the public realm. Landscaping is required.
668 of 1291
9 a 7
Publicly Accessible Open Space (PAOS):
The proposed PAOS requirement is a significant improvement to obtain additional landscaped open space in the area, especially given that no publicly accessible open space is currently required for projects in Tropico based on existing zoning (C3, IMU-R, SFMU). The TOD zoning would require a minimum of 10% of the site to be devoted to PAOS for lots greater than 60 feet in width, and 15% for project sites greater than two acres – larger projects required more publicly accessible open space. Many of the same standards for the PAOS provided in the DSP are included in the new TOD chapter, such as adjacency to the public realm at the same level (walkable surface), minimum areas and widths, open to the sky requirement, etc. Such requirements for courtyards and paseos ensure the PAOS is meaningful, well-designed, and accessible to the public. The actual PAOS design standards are located in the Open Space and Landscaping section later in the TOD chapter. The PAOS standards, combined with the Public Realm standards for wider sidewalks and landscaped sidewalks, ensure Council’s (and the DRB’s) intent for a better pedestrian environment and more open (and green) space is met.
Parking Design and Access Standards:
The proposed objective design standards for the TOD district allowing at-grade parking have not changed in the final draft. Currently, the Zoning Code requires that parking for residential uses be subterranean or semi-subterranean, which significantly adds to the cost of construction; the cost and requirement of multilevel subterranean parking has been considered an impediment to achieving maximum density. Staff is proposing to amend the parking chapter to allow for a certain percentage of at-grade residential parking in the TOD districts, provided the parking is appropriately screened from view with active ground floor uses or articulated building walls, as detailed in the new objective design standards. The standards also specify the location and orientation of parking garage entrances for all buildings, to ensure pedestrian safety and promote the active street frontages not focused on vehicular entrances.
Massing & Scale:
Step-backs:
A new objective design standard for the TOD districts to minimize blocky, massive building is the new step-back requirement. A step-back with a minimum average of six feet on street-facing elevations is required for all buildings greater than 50 feet in height; this step-back is a minimum average, allowing for flexibility for the architect, while ensuring relief at the top floor.
669 of 1291
10 a 7
Façade Modulation
To further help break down the massing of larger new buildings and to provide visual interest along the elevations, the TOD chapter includes objective design standards similar to the ones found in the Urban Design chapter of the DSP, with a few new ones that are formatted into new groupings under “Façade Modulation”:
Vertical Modulation:
This subsection highlights standards for tripartite building layers – top, middle, base – to help break up the street-facing façade vertically for buildings four floors or greater. Differentiation of these layers through the use of architectural materials, textures and color are further detailed under architectural element section.
Horizontal Modulation:
This subsection provides objective design standards for articulation across a building façade that help to break up the massing horizontally. Street facing facades greater than 60 feet in length must have at least 30% of the elevation offset by a minimum of 24 inches, so as to provide undulation across a façade and not have solid, blank walls. Street facing façades greater than 225 feet in length also must provide a building separation to cut down the longer massing of the structure. This building separation must have a minimum width and depth of 10% of the building length (example – 30-foot by 30-foot separation for a building that is 300 feet in length).
Interior Horizontal Façade Modulation:
Since often the interior side elevations are visible from the surrounding properties and streets, objective design standards that require continuation of the façade treatment around the corner of the building and prohibit unbroken, solid wall planes greater than 30 feet in length are proposed for the interior elevations.
Corner Elements:
For buildings located at two street intersections, the building corner must be differentiated by height and design to provide a focal point for the building at such visible locations.
Architectural Elements:
The TOD chapter features many of the same objective design standards set forth in the DSP Urban Design chapter under the same heading “Architectural Elements”, but with a few new ones that will be summarized below. The list of proposed Architectural Elements subsections includes the following:
Façade Materials and Colors
Storefront Transparency
670 of 1291
11 a 7
Building Entries and Lobbies
Corners
Canopies and Awnings
Balconies
Fenestration
Freestanding Walls, Fences, and Gates
Trash Enclosures
Utilities
Outdoor Lighting
Rooftop Equipment
Solar Equipment
The two subsections that contain new objective design standards are Storefront Transparency and Building Entries and Lobbies. The Storefront Transparency subsection highlights standards that ensure non-residential buildings have activated street frontages with transparent windows into the commercial and industrial ground floor uses; greater window transparency is appropriately required along San Fernando Road, Central Avenue and Los Feliz Avenue than on the side streets. In response to Council’s comments regarding the applicability of these regulations for specific uses, the transparency standards have been amended to not apply to broadcasting studio and indoor support facilities (production), warehouse, light manufacturing and heavy manufacturing buildings, because of their operational nature. Meanwhile, the Building Entries and Lobbies subsection provides general standards, such as, distinctive paving and entry design, and then has objective design and locational standards for nonresidential versus residential ground floor building entries, such as when stoops for individual units are proposed.
Open Space and Landscaping
The proposed Open Space and Landscaping section features a combination of the current open space requirements for IMU-R and SFMU zoning for residential developments, while also incorporating the objective design standards found in the DSP Open Space chapter. The section is broken into two subsections:
Publicly Accessible Open Space Standards
Residential Open Space Standards
Publicly Accessible Open Space Standards
As previously noted in the report, one of the most notable changes in the TOD district zoning is the addition of a publicly accessible open space requirement for new projects on lots greater than 60 feet in width; none of the current zoning for the area has this requirement. Based on the DSP Section 5.4, objective design standards for PAOS courtyards and plazas are specified in this subsection regarding such items as minimum dimensions, accessibility, materials, landscaping to ensure the PAOS is meaningful and well-designed. 671 of 1291
12 a 7
Residential Open Space Standards
The current requirement for residential projects in the IMU-R and SFMU zones is that a minimum of 140 SF of open space be provided per unit; this residential open space can be provided as extra PAOS, common (rooftop deck, etc.), private (balconies), or combination. This subsection keeps the same requirement, while adding design standards found in the DSP’s Section 5.5 Residential Development Open Space section to enhance the minimal requirements under current zoning.
ZONING CODE AMENDMENTS TO MISCELLANEOUS ZONING CODE CHAPTERS GMC 30.10.010 Zones – Glendale
The Transit Oriented Development (TOD) District is added to the list of zones in Glendale.
GMC 30.30.010 Site Planning
References to the new TOD zone are being added to the various subsections of the Site Planning chapter: GMC 30.30.010 Fences and walls, GMC 30.30.020 Rooftop equipment, 30.30.030 Trash collection areas, and GMC 30.30.040 Lighting.
GMC 30.31 Landscaping
References to the new TOD zone are being added to the Landscaping chapter so that the State’s Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance and the standard artificial turf regulations apply to projects in the TOD zone.
GMC 30.32 Parking and Loading
Several parking-related amendments are proposed in order to incentivize development of high-density, transit-oriented projects adjacent to mass transit in the TOD zone, and to reduce costly impediments towards such development. Updates to the Parking Chapter include references to the new TOD zone and the amendments described during the September 2022 Tropico presentation and supported by the Planning Commission:
• At-grade parking for multi-family residential uses, in conjunction with the new parking screening requirements in the TOD chapter, when currently, the Zoning Code requires all residential parking to be semi- or subterranean; • Tandem or stacked parking in certain situations, same as in the DSP; • Residential per unit parking requirements and commercial parking requirements to match those in the DSP, with reduced parking ratios for certain industrial uses; • Interchange of uses in a tenant space less than 5,000 SF without having to provide parking, same as in the DSP; and
• Additional trip reduction and travel demand measures, as well as bicycle parking standards, as in the DSP.
Such parking incentives similar to the downtown parking incentives, in addition to the pedestrian-oriented public realm design requirements, will help support and encourage transit use, walkable streets, and transit-oriented development in the Tropico area. 672 of 1291
13 a 7
Projects in Tropico can also utilize the State’s AB 2097 ordinance allowing for reduced or eliminate parking within a half-mile of a major transit stop.
GMC 30.33 Signs
Amendments to the Sign chapter include the references to the new TOD zone and updates to allow TOD signage to match the specific types of identification signs (GMC
30.33.120.B), accessory walls signs for residential leasing or sales offices (GMC
30.33.120.C), and projecting identification signs (GMC 30.33.180.B) permitted in the DSP, and the signs for hospitals permitted in the MS zone (GMC 30.33.210.J).
GMC 30.34 Standards for Specific Uses
Sections 30.34.090 - Live/work units in the DSP, IND, IMU, IMU-R, and SFMU zones and
30.34.100 - Mixed-use development in the DSP, MS, IMU-R, and SFMU and TOD zones are being amended to include references to the TOD zone; the standards for these specific uses (live/work units and mixed-use development) will apply to proposals in the TOD. Section 30.34.120 - Parking Structures will also refer to the TOD II district, where the specific standards shall apply to parking structures for hospital uses.
PLANNING COMMISSION
On August 16, 2023, staff presented the final draft amendments to the Planning Commission for review and recommendation to City Council, as required by Code.
Planning Commission was generally complementary of the new zoning and objective design standards for transit oriented development in Tropico, and supportive of the corresponding land use map and citywide zoning map amendments. Discussion of the proposed amendments led to comments on the minimum unit sizes of residential units and density allowed in TOD.
Minimum Unit Sizes
During the September 2022 presentation, Council commented on the minimum unit sizes and whether there is an opportunity to reduce the minimum unit sizes in Tropico. Staff presented the following options to Planning Commission for recommendation to City Council:
1) maintain the existing minimums applied City-wide;
2) reduce the minimum unit sizes; or
3) eliminate such minimums altogether in the TOD.
Current zoning standards for residential development in the multi-family and mixed-use zones in the Zoning Code, and also in the DSP districts, require the following minimum unit sizes:
• Studios and one-bedrooms: 600 square feet (SF)
• Two-bedrooms: 800 SF
673 of 1291
14 a 7
• Three-bedrooms or more: 1,000 SF
• Senior: 540 SF
Should the direction be to reduce the minimum unit sizes (Option 2), staff recommended a 20% reduction, similar to what could be granted using the codified Administrative Exception process for up to a maximum 20% deviation from such a numeric standard in the Zoning Code. With such a 20% deviation, the minimums in Tropico would be:
• Studios and one-bedrooms: 480 square feet (SF)
• Two-bedrooms: 640 SF
• Three-bedrooms or more: 800 SF
• Senior: 432 SF (suggestion to round down to 430 SF)
Another similar alternative would be to reduce the minimum unit sizes from current standards by 100 square feet across all bedroom categories, or reducing the sizes of studios, or studios and one-bedroom units, and maintaining the current unit minimums for two- and three-bedroom units.
Note: Any affordable housing development could also request a further reduction in unit sizes using the concession/waiver process for density bonus projects.
Option 3 of eliminating such minimum unit sizes altogether would allow microunits as small as 190 SF, as per the California Building Code 2022 Section 1208.4. Neighboring cities such as Pasadena and Burbank currently do not have unit size minimums in their zoning codes, so such a standard, or lack thereof, is not unusual. Even with elimination of minimum unit sizes, applicable density standards would still limit the number of units on each project site (up to a maximum of 100 du/ac); it would be up to the developer and the market to determine the sizes of the units in each project.
Several of the Commissioners supported a reduction in the size of units to incentivize the development of more units and increase the potential of more affordable units to be built close to transit. Others indicated they were not opposed to the elimination of minimum unit sizes altogether, allowing the market to dictate the various sizes of units.
Density
Having heard that even with a reduction in unit sizes that the density would be limited by units per acre, several of the Planning Commissioners questioned whether the maximum 100 du/ac proposed for the TOD zone is too low and whether the density (i.e. building massing and volume) could be regulated by floor area ratio(s) (FAR(s)) instead of dwelling units per acre.
Several factors support maintaining the 100 du/ac maximum at this time:
• Tropico zoning is meant to implement the SGCP and Tropico Center Plan, both of which used du/ac for density, not FAR. The du/ac standard provides for 674 of 1291
15 a 7
quantifiable objectives for the public and the development community, and for housing calculation purposes for the State. To move to an FAR standard where the number of units per acre is not readily determined would require additional study, a re-evaluation of the current density standard and re-write of the proposed codes.
• The SGCP Final Program EIR analyzed density based on the du/ac standard to determine the environmental impacts of maximum build-out. Both the substitution of the du/ac density standard with a FAR regulation and an increase to the 100 du/ac maximum would require additional environmental analysis. • Furthermore, State statutes and City code allow for increases in density for density bonus projects. Any multi-family residential project greater than eight units must comply with the inclusionary housing requirements, per GMC 30.35, which may result in applications for density bonuses for the provided affordable housing units, per GMC 30.36; the density bonus projects also qualify for additional concessions and waivers. The current maximum density bonus limit is 50%, according to State statute; this could potentially result in a density of 150 units/acre for density bonus projects. This would fulfill the Planning Commission’s intention of allowing for greater densities for affordable density bonus housing projects without modifying the proposed zoning.
To summarize, while staff supports a reduction in the unit size minimum for the Tropico TOD zone, elimination of unit size minimums would be a significant policy change. Staff recommends that should Council wish to eliminate unit sizes altogether, that Council first move forward with a reduction in unit size minimums for Tropico and request staff to bring back a more detailed analysis of further reduced unit sizes (or elimination of such minimums) for Tropico, and depending on Council direction, for the DSP and/or Citywide.
Staff recommends that the existing 100 du/ac density standard be maintained for the reasons noted above.
STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
Substantial public outreach was conducted for the SGCP and Tropico Center Plan, and the Tropico amendments provide the zoning and map updates to implement the approved policy direction. The amendments were duly noticed as required by Code.
FISCAL IMPACT
There is no fiscal impact associated with this report.
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW (CEQA/NEPA)
Pursuant to the California Environmental Quality Act, staff has prepared an addendum to the previously certified Final Program Environmental Impact Report South Glendale Community Plan (SCH No. 2016091026) (Final EIR), which included the Tropico Center Plan, for the proposed Tropico Transit Oriented Development (TOD) Zoning and 675 of 1291
16 a 7
Objective Design Standards Project and the proposed General Plan Land Use Map Amendment, Zoning Code Text Amendments, and the Zone Change and Zoning Map Amendments (“Project”).
This addendum (Exhibit 5) which analyzes some minor technical changes to the Tropico Center Plan approved by the Council on August 31, 2018, contains the required substantial evidence that demonstrates that the proposed Project does not contain: 1) substantial changes to the SGCP and Appendix C: Tropico Center Plan that will cause new significant effects or a substantial increase in the severity of previously identified significant effects in the Final EIR; 2) a substantial change in the circumstances that will cause new significant effects or a substantial increase in the severity of previously identified significant effects in the Final EIR; or 3) substantial new information that could not have been known at the time the Final EIR was certified that will cause new significant effects or a substantial increase in the severity of previously identified significant effects.
In summary, no new significant impacts in any environmental areas were identified, nor would any impacts in any environmental areas be made substantially worse as a result of implementing the proposed Project. Accordingly, an addendum to the final SGCP for the proposed Project is appropriate.
CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
This item is exempt from campaign disclosure requirements.
ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Adopt the resolution approving the General Plan Land Use Map Amendment (Case No. PGPA-001746-2023) and introduce the ordinances amending the Title 30 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 (Zoning Code), and Citywide Zoning Map (Case No. PZC-0007-2023) relating generally to the Tropico Transit Oriented District (TOD) Zoning and Objective Design Standards Project, as described in this report.
Alternative 2: Do not adopt the resolution approving the General Plan Land Use Map Amendment and do not introduce the ordinances amending the Zoning Code Text and the Citywide Zoning Map for the Tropico Project, in which case the General Plan Land Use Map, the Zoning Code Text and the Citywide Zoning Map will remain as existing and currently codified.
In this instance, the SB 2 Grant Funds awarded by the State for the Tropico Project cannot be appropriated, and no monetary reimbursement can be requested for the work done by the consultant or Planning staff.
Alternative 3: Adopt the resolution approving the General Plan Land Use Amendment and introduce the ordinances for the Zoning Code Text and Citywide Zoning Map Amendments, as described in this report, but with revisions.
Alternative 4: The City Council may consider any other alternative not proposed by staff. 676 of 1291
17 a 7
ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:
Vilia Zemaitaitis, AICP, Deputy Director of Long Range Planning Approved by:
Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager
EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
1. Map of Tropico TOD Area
2. Addendum to the previously certified Final Program Environmental Impact Report South Glendale Community Plan (SCH No. 2016091026) (Final EIR)
3. Design Review Board’s Comments from December 8, 2022
4. Planning Commission’s Resolution from August 16, 2023
5. Existing General Plan Land Use Map as per Figure 7 in the SGCP’s Appendix C – Tropico Center Plan
6. Proposed General Plan Land Use Map for Tropico TOD Area
7. Existing Zoning Map for Tropico TOD Area
8. Proposed Tropico TOD District Zoning Map
677 of 1291
1 ORDINANCE NO. _______
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING SECTION 30.25.030 OF TITLE 30 TO THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995 RELATING GENERALLY TO STREAMLINING THE CITY’S HISTORIC DISTRICT DESIGNATION PROCESS.
(CASE NO. PZC-0002-2022)
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
SECTION 1. Section 30.25.030 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 is hereby amended as follows:
30.25.030 Procedure for historic district overlay zone designation and modification.
The following shall be the procedures for designating or modifying historic district overlay zones:
A. Applications for Historic District Overlay Zone Designation or Modification.
Applications for the establishment or modification of Historic District Overlay Zones must originate with the owners of any three (3) properties within the proposed district boundary (the study area) and shall be submitted to the Director of Community Development. Applications shall include the proposed historic district overlay zone study area boundary, addresses of all properties to be included in the proposed historic district overlay zone, a written narrative describing the history and development of the area, and a statement describing why the proposed historic district overlay zone designation or modification meets the criteria for designation under Section 30.25.020.
B. HPC Review of Application and Establishment of Pending Historic District.
Once the application to designate or modify a Historic District Overlay Zone is deemed complete, the Director of Community Development shall set a community forum and a public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission. The Commission shall hold the community forum to inform residents and owners about the proposed historic district and historic districts in general, as well as answer questions. Immediately following the community forum, the Commission will conduct the public hearing to make a preliminary determination whether the application contains sufficient information indicating the study area appears likely to meet the thresholds and criteria set forth in Chapter 30.25 for purposes of subsequently undergoing more detailed analysis. In preparation for the community forum and public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission, the Director of Community Development may meet with residents of the community, seek 678 of 1291
2 advice of preservation professionals and historians, and conduct or receive any research or studies to assist the Historic Preservation Commission with its preliminary determination whether the proposed district meets the criteria and thresholds for designation in Chapter 30.25.
1. Notice of the community forum and public hearing shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the most recent Los Angeles County Assessor’s office property records, in the proposed historic district overlay zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the boundary of the proposed historic district overlay zone. The notice shall be accompanied by a document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information describing the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map showing the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the proposed district boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application materials and general information about historic districts, on the City of Glendale website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears to be eligible for designation or modification, the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3) of this Code.
3. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the proposed historic district does not appear eligible for designation, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3).
4. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears eligible for designation or modification, but additional evidence demonstrating public support for the application is warranted, then the Historic Preservation Commission may require the applicant to circulate a petition within the proposed district requesting that City Council authorize preparation of a historic district survey.
a. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information regarding the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map indicating the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application and general information about historic districts, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The petition forms shall be distributed to the applicant and shall contain a statement that all signatories acknowledge their ownership and their authority to sign the petition under penalty of perjury. b. Within ninety (90) days of the preliminary determination of eligibility by the Historic Preservation Commission, or within ninety (90) days of a City Council action 679 of 1291
3 sustaining the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination following an appeal, the project proponents shall submit to the Director of Community Development a petition requesting a historic district survey. The time limit may be extended for another ninety (90) days by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the initial ninety (90) day time limit.
c. The Director of Community Development shall verify the number of properties represented on the petition by valid signatures, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms. If the owners of more than twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the historic district overlay zone application shall move forward in the designation process and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3). If the owners of twenty-five (25) percent or less of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section
30.25.030(B)(3) below.
d. For the purpose of this section the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one (1) of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such cotenant shall be required to sign the petition; iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
e. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
680 of 1291
4 5. Upon the determination of the Historic Preservation Commission that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible for designation or modification and the Director of Community Development’s acceptance of any petition required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone shall be deemed a “Pending Historic District Overlay Zone” until such time as the application is approved or denied by City Council or is withdrawn by the applicants. The Director of Community Development shall mail a notice of this determination to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary boundary. This notice shall include information about the transfer of design review authority in the pending district from the Design Review Board to the Historic Preservation Commission pursuant to Section 30.25.040, the applicability of the Historic District Design Guidelines for design review of applications submitted subsequent to the date of this determination pursuant to Section 30.25.050, the process to oppose the designation of a historic district, and instructions for locating the Guidelines, the historic district application, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
6. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission denies the application pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(1) or the petition fails to receive the minimum threshold level of support required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the Director of Community Development shall send notice that the application is denied to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the thencurrent Los Angeles County Assessor’s property information, in the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary study area boundary.
C. Following the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible to be established pursuant to Chapter 30.25, the Director of Community Development shall issue a request for proposals to preservation consulting firms meeting the Secretary of the Interior’s Professional Qualification Standards. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission required a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the request for proposals shall not be issued until the Director of Community Development has received said petition and verified that it bears the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary.
Upon review of the consultants’ submitted proposals, the Director of Community Development shall prepare a ranked list of recommended consultants and set a hearing before City Council to review the proposals and request funding authorization, as follows:
681 of 1291
5 1. City Council shall select a preferred bidder and authorize funding for the historic district survey, directing the Director of Community Development to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
2. City Council shall select a preferred bidder but, in the event that the Historic Preservation Commission did not require a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2) and City Council finds reason to require further public input to indicate the level of support for establishing or modifying a historic district overlay zone, it may require that the project proponents circulate a petition requesting a historic district survey to property owners within the proposed boundary, or any boundary modified by the Historic Preservation Commission or City Council, asking the City Council to authorize preparation of a historic district survey or modification of an existing survey in accordance with the process established in Section 30.25.030(B)(2).
City Council shall also authorize the Director of Community Development, upon his or her receipt and verification of a petition bearing the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary, to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
D. Hearing to Review Draft Historic District Survey. Upon the consultant’s completion of a draft historic district survey, including any recommended additions to the Historic District Design Guidelines necessitated by the findings of the survey, the Director of Community Development shall set the draft survey for review before the Historic Preservation Commission in a duly noticed community forum and public hearing according to the procedures set forth in Section 30.61 of this Title. The mailed notice shall be accompanied by a document containing basic information regarding the findings of the draft survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, and the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the draft historic district survey and all property specific DPR 523a survey forms, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area.
1. The Commission may approve the draft historic district survey as presented or provide direction to the Director of Community Development to make any specific minor revisions required to transform the draft survey into the final Historic District Survey. The Historic Preservation Commission shall then, or upon completion of any required minor revisions, authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition to affected property owners asking the City Council to establish the historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District 682 of 1291
6 Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the draft historic district survey requires significant revision, it may continue the hearing item and direct the Director of Community Development to work with the consultant to revise the survey to address the Commission’s specific concerns. The revised draft survey will be returned to the Commission at a duly noticed community forum and public hearing at which the survey, if approved, will become the final historic district survey. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area. The notice for the continued community forum and public hearing shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
3. Upon the Historic Preservation Commission’s approval of the final historic district survey per Section 30.25.030(D)(1) or 30.25.031(D)(2), above, it shall issue its final recommendation to City Council regarding the establishment of the historic district overlay zone. The Commission shall also authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone to affected property owners asking City Council to establish a historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts and how their designation affects property owners on the City of Glendale website. This document shall also include information about how to sign and submit the petition.
4. Within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation Commission’s authorization to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone, the project proponents shall submit said petition to the Director of Community Development. Said petition must be signed by the owners of more than fifty (50) percent of the properties in the historic district study area, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a petition satisfying the requirements of Article XV, Section 2 of the Glendale City Charter shall satisfy the requirement of this subsection. If such a petition is not submitted to the satisfaction of the Director of Community Development within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation Commission’s authorization to 683 of 1291
7 circulate the petition, the application for a historic district overlay zone shall be deemed denied. The six-month time limit may be extended by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the one hundred-eighty (180) day time limit. a. For the purpose of this section, for the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such co-tenant shall be required to sign the petition;
iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
b. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
5. Upon receipt of the petition, and verification by the Director of Community Development that the petition satisfies the requirements of Section 30.25.030(D)(3), Director of Community Development shall prepare a report that details the appropriateness of the recommended boundary consistent with the historic district overlay zone designation criteria, provide the percentage of the properties in the district whose owners are petitioning the City Council, provide an overview of the history and significance of the area, provide photographs of all properties within the area (both contributing and non-contributing buildings), and present any supplements to the Historic District Design Guidelines prepared by the consultant.
E. Planning Commission Review of Proposed Historic District Overlay Zone.
The Director of Community Development shall forward the Historic Preservation Commission’s recommendation to the Planning Commission for consideration of a zone change to create the specific historic district overlay zone. The application shall then be 684 of 1291
8 processed according to the procedures set forth under Chapters 30.61 and 30.63 of this Title.
F. Modification or Deletion of Historic District Overlay Zone. The procedures for modification or deletion of a historic district overlay zone shall follow the procedures outlined in this section and elsewhere in the Zoning Code (Title 30) and the City Charter as applicable.
G. Translation of Public Notices and Educational Materials. Any information or materials, including, but not limited to, public notices and educational materials about historic districts, that is provided by the City of Glendale as part of the historic district process in any format, whether as hard copy, digitally, or on the City of Glendale website, shall be translated into, at minimum, Armenian, Korean, and Spanish. 685 of 1291
9 Passed by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2023. ______________________________
Mayor
Attest
___________________________________
City Clerk
STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.
CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, SUZIE ABAJIAN, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. ______________ was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the ______ day of _______________, 2023 by the following vote:
Ayes:
Noes:
Absent:
Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
686 of 1291
1 ORDINANCE NO. _______
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING SECTION 30.25.030 OF TITLE 30 TO THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995 RELATING GENERALLY TO STREAMLINING THE CITY’S HISTORIC DISTRICT DESIGNATION PROCESS.
(CASE NO. PZC-0002-2022)
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
SECTION 1. Section 30.25.030 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 is hereby amended as follows:
30.25.030 Procedure for historic district overlay zone designation and modification.
The following shall be the procedures for designating or modifying historic district overlay zones:
A. Applications for Historic District Overlay Zone Designation or Modification.
Applications for the establishment or modification of Historic District Overlay Zones must originate with the owners of any three (3) properties within the proposed district boundary (the study area) and shall be submitted to the Director of Community Development. Applications shall include the proposed historic district overlay zone study area boundary, addresses of all properties to be included in the proposed historic district overlay zone, a written narrative describing the history and development of the area, and a statement describing why the proposed historic district overlay zone designation or modification meets the criteria for designation under Section 30.25.020.
B. HPC Review of Application and Establishment of Pending Historic District.
Once the application to designate or modify a Historic District Overlay Zone is deemed complete, the Director of Community Development shall set a community forum and a public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission. The Commission shall hold the community forum to inform residents and owners about the proposed historic district and historic districts in general, as well as answer questions. Immediately following the community forum, the Commission will conduct the public hearing to make a preliminary determination whether the application contains sufficient information indicating the study area appears likely to meet the thresholds and criteria set forth in Chapter 30.25 for purposes of subsequently undergoing more detailed analysis. In preparation for the community forum and public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission, the Director of Community Development may meet with residents of the community, seek 687 of 1291
2 advice of preservation professionals and historians, and conduct or receive any research or studies to assist the Historic Preservation Commission with its preliminary determination whether the proposed district meets the criteria and thresholds for designation in Chapter 30.25.
1. Notice of the community forum and public hearing shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the most recent Los Angeles County Assessor’s office property records, in the proposed historic district overlay zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the boundary of the proposed historic district overlay zone. The notice shall be accompanied by a document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information describing the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map showing the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the proposed district boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application materials and general information about historic districts, on the City of Glendale website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears to be eligible for designation or modification, the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3) of this Code.
3. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the proposed historic district does not appear eligible for designation, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3).
4. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears eligible for designation or modification, but additional evidence demonstrating public support for the application is warranted, then the Historic Preservation Commission may require the applicant to circulate a petition within the proposed district requesting that City Council authorize preparation of a historic district survey.
a. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information regarding the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map indicating the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application and general information about historic districts, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The petition forms shall be distributed to the applicant and shall contain a statement that all signatories acknowledge their ownership and their authority to sign the petition under penalty of perjury. b. Within ninety (90) days of the preliminary determination of eligibility by the Historic Preservation Commission, or within ninety (90) days of a City Council action 688 of 1291
3 sustaining the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination following an appeal, the project proponents shall submit to the Director of Community Development a petition requesting a historic district survey. The time limit may be extended for another ninety (90) days by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the initial ninety (90) day time limit.
c. The Director of Community Development shall verify the number of properties represented on the petition by valid signatures, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms. If the owners of more than twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the historic district overlay zone application shall move forward in the designation process and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3). If the owners of twenty-five (25) percent or less of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section
30.25.030(B)(3) below.
d. For the purpose of this section the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one (1) of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such cotenant shall be required to sign the petition; iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
e. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
689 of 1291
4 5. Upon the determination of the Historic Preservation Commission that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible for designation or modification and the Director of Community Development’s acceptance of any petition required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone shall be deemed a “Pending Historic District Overlay Zone” until such time as the application is approved or denied by City Council or is withdrawn by the applicants. The Director of Community Development shall mail a notice of this determination to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary boundary. This notice shall include information about the transfer of design review authority in the pending district from the Design Review Board to the Historic Preservation Commission pursuant to Section 30.25.040, the applicability of the Historic District Design Guidelines for design review of applications submitted subsequent to the date of this determination pursuant to Section 30.25.050, the process to oppose the designation of a historic district, and instructions for locating the Guidelines, the historic district application, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
6. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission denies the application pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(1) or the petition fails to receive the minimum threshold level of support required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the Director of Community Development shall send notice that the application is denied to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the thencurrent Los Angeles County Assessor’s property information, in the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary study area boundary.
C. Following the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible to be established pursuant to Chapter 30.25, the Director of Community Development shall issue a request for proposals to preservation consulting firms meeting the Secretary of the Interior’s Professional Qualification Standards. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission required a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the request for proposals shall not be issued until the Director of Community Development has received said petition and verified that it bears the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary.
Upon review of the consultants’ submitted proposals, the Director of Community Development shall prepare a ranked list of recommended consultants and set a hearing before City Council to review the proposals and request funding authorization, as follows:
690 of 1291
5 1. City Council shall select a preferred bidder and authorize funding for the historic district survey, directing the Director of Community Development to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
2. City Council shall select a preferred bidder but, in the event that the Historic Preservation Commission did not require a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2) and City Council finds reason to require further public input to indicate the level of support for establishing or modifying a historic district overlay zone, it may require that the project proponents circulate a petition requesting a historic district survey to property owners within the proposed boundary, or any boundary modified by the Historic Preservation Commission or City Council, asking the City Council to authorize preparation of a historic district survey or modification of an existing survey in accordance with the process established in Section 30.25.030(B)(2).
City Council shall also authorize the Director of Community Development, upon his or her receipt and verification of a petition bearing the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary, to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
D. Hearing to Review Draft Historic District Survey. Upon the consultant’s completion of a draft historic district survey, including any recommended additions to the Historic District Design Guidelines necessitated by the findings of the survey, the Director of Community Development shall set the draft survey for review before the Historic Preservation Commission in a duly noticed community forum and public hearing according to the procedures set forth in Section 30.61 of this Title. The mailed notice shall be accompanied by a document containing basic information regarding the findings of the draft survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, and the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the draft historic district survey and all property specific DPR 523a survey forms, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area.
1. The Commission may approve the draft historic district survey as presented or provide direction to the Director of Community Development to make any specific minor revisions required to transform the draft survey into the final Historic District Survey. The Historic Preservation Commission shall then, or upon completion of any required minor revisions, authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition to affected property owners asking the City Council to establish the historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District 691 of 1291
6 Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the draft historic district survey requires significant revision, it may continue the hearing item and direct the Director of Community Development to work with the consultant to revise the survey to address the Commission’s specific concerns. The revised draft survey will be returned to the Commission at a duly noticed community forum and public hearing at which the survey, if approved, will become the final historic district survey. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area. The notice for the continued community forum and public hearing shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
3. Upon the Historic Preservation Commission’s approval of the final historic district survey per Section 30.25.030(D)(1) or 30.25.031(D)(2), above, it shall issue its final recommendation to City Council regarding the establishment of the historic district overlay zone. The Commission shall also authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone to affected property owners asking City Council to establish a historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts and how their designation affects property owners on the City of Glendale website. This document shall also include information about how to sign and submit the petition.
4. Within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation Commission’s authorization to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone, the project proponents shall submit said petition to the Director of Community Development. Said petition must be signed by the owners of more than sixty-seven (67) percent of the properties in the historic district study area, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, a petition satisfying the requirements of Article XV, Section 2 of the Glendale City Charter shall satisfy the requirement of this subsection. If such a petition is not submitted to the satisfaction of the Director of Community Development within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation 692 of 1291
7 Commission’s authorization to circulate the petition, the application for a historic district overlay zone shall be deemed denied. The six-month time limit may be extended by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the one hundred-eighty (180) day time limit.
a. For the purpose of this section, for the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such co-tenant shall be required to sign the petition;
iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
b. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
5. Upon receipt of the petition, and verification by the Director of Community Development that the petition satisfies the requirements of Section 30.25.030(D)(3), Director of Community Development shall prepare a report that details the appropriateness of the recommended boundary consistent with the historic district overlay zone designation criteria, provide the percentage of the properties in the district whose owners are petitioning the City Council, provide an overview of the history and significance of the area, provide photographs of all properties within the area (both contributing and non-contributing buildings), and present any supplements to the Historic District Design Guidelines prepared by the consultant.
E. Planning Commission Review of Proposed Historic District Overlay Zone.
The Director of Community Development shall forward the Historic Preservation Commission’s recommendation to the Planning Commission for consideration of a zone change to create the specific historic district overlay zone. The application shall then be 693 of 1291
8 processed according to the procedures set forth under Chapters 30.61 and 30.63 of this Title.
F. Modification or Deletion of Historic District Overlay Zone. The procedures for modification or deletion of a historic district overlay zone shall follow the procedures outlined in this section and elsewhere in the Zoning Code (Title 30) and the City Charter as applicable.
G. Translation of Public Notices and Educational Materials. Any information or materials, including, but not limited to, public notices and educational materials about historic districts, that is provided by the City of Glendale as part of the historic district process in any format, whether as hard copy, digitally, or on the City of Glendale website, shall be translated into, at minimum, Armenian, Korean, and Spanish. 694 of 1291
9 Passed by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2023. ______________________________
Mayor
Attest
___________________________________
City Clerk
STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.
CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, SUZIE ABAJIAN, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. ______________ was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the ______ day of _______________, 2023 by the following vote:
Ayes:
Noes:
Absent:
Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
695 of 1291
7b
CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
AGENDA ITEM
Report: Overview of Changes to Ordinance to Amend GMC 30.25.030 Regarding Streamlining the Historic District Designation Process
1. AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING SECTION 30.25.030 OF TITLE 30 TO THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995 RELATING GENERALLY TO STREAMLINING THE CITY’S HISTORIC DISTRICT DESIGNATION PROCESS (50% +) (Introduced by Devine)
2. AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING SECTION 30.25.030 OF TITLE 30 TO THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995 RELATING GENERALLY TO STREAMLINING THE CITY’S HISTORIC DISTRICT DESIGNATION PROCESS (67%) (Introduced by Najarian)
COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Ordinance for Adoption
Approved for October 10, 2023 calendar
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
On September 12, 2023, City Council introduced two ordinances to amend GMC
30.25.030 with the goal of streamlining the historic district designation process. The four Council members in attendance supported almost all aspects of the proposed ordinance but several members asked for changes to further clarify the district designation process, to increase the percentage of petitioners needed to qualify a proposed district for designation, and to ensure all materials would be available in multiple languages. Two ordinances, one introduced by Councilmember Devine and one by Councilmember Najarian, have been prepared which reflect the requested changes to the proposed streamlining of the historic district designation process, with the distinction between the two ordinances being the signature threshold to move forward to Council consideration (50% plus 1 vs. 67%).
696 of 1291
2 b 7
OVERVIEW OF CHANGES AND ITEMS LACKING CONSENSUS
Two versions of the proposed ordinance are attached to this report. Version 1 reflects the option to maintain the 50%+ requirement as the minimum number of properties represented by the owners’ signatures on the petition requesting that City Council designate a proposed district. Version 2 reflects the option increase the petition signature threshold to 67%. Redlined copies of each Version are attached as Exhibit 1 and Exhibit 2 respectively, and the “clean” copies of each Version are provided for consideration of adoption. As noted, the two versions are identical except for Section
30.25.030.D.4, which indicates the two proposed percentages (either 50%+ or 67%) as the petition signature threshold.
Aside from the issue regarding the percentage of petition signatures required, Council also raised several other potential changes that were not fully resolved at the September 12 hearing. These are discussed individually below:
Outreach and Educational Materials
Both versions of the ordinance have been modified to incorporate Councilmember Asatryan’s request that education materials and the district petitions include information regarding the effects of historic districts on properties. (see p.6; section
30.025.030.D.4). Proposed Ordinance Versions 1 and 2 have been modified to indicate that all outreach documentation and petitions include specific information about how a potential district designation might affect property owners in terms of future work proposals.
Council members also discussed ensuring that all public outreach materials be translated into the languages commonly spoken by Glendale residents (English, Armenian, Korean and Spanish). Both versions of the ordinance have been modified to indicate that those materials, whether distributed by mail, in person, or available through the City website, will be translated into, at minimum, English, Armenian, Korean, and Spanish. (see p. 8; section 30.25.030.G).
Petition Signatures and Verification
As noted above, Version 1 of the proposed ordinance retains the existing requirement that, toward the end of the district designation process, the owners of over 50% of the properties in a proposed district sign a petition requesting that City Council designate the district. Version 2 reflects the view of some Councilmembers that the threshold be raised to require signatures of the owners of 67% a proposed district’s properties make this request. It should be noted that district creation, amendment, change or repeal are also addressed in Article XV, section 2 of the City Charter, which requires that whenever the owners of fifty (50) percent or more of the frontage of any district or part thereof, present to the council a petition duly signed and acknowledged by them, requesting any such amendment, supplement, change or repeal of the regulations 697 of 1291
3 b 7
prescribed for such district, or part thereof, the council must act on the petition. Thus, regardless of the thresholds established in this proposed Ordinance, when any petition containing the signatures of the owners of 50% or more of the frontage within a proposed district is submitted, the Council must consider it.
Some Councilmembers also suggested that the signatures of those signing the petition be verified. Currently, the petitions are signed under penalty of perjury; the petitions are required to be signed by the current property owner(s). “Duly signed and acknowledged” means valid pursuant to law. Staff currently verifies that signatories’ names are the same as those provided by the County Assessor with regard to property ownership and that multiple signatures for property owners be in a different hand, to avoid one owner from signing on behalf of one or more additional owners. Some Councilmembers expressed an interest in more stringent signature verification, and one request was made to introduce a requirement to verify the signatures against a notarized signature on a grant deed. However, grant deeds are only generally required to include the seller’s notarized signature not the buyer/current owner (a grant deed being effective upon delivery to the purchaser). Thus, it is staff’s assessment that the suggestion of a notarized grant deed will not be an effective verification tool and advise against it.
A possible solution would be to require that all signatures be either in hard copy or digitally affixed using the City’s accepted DocuSign or Adobe Sign platforms. Both of these digital signature programs are verifiable and have been acknowledged as a verifiable pursuant to the Civil Code, by the Court system and are signature platforms currently used by the City for processing contracts.
It was also suggested that the City utilize staff or volunteers to contact owners by phone to verify that they signed the petition. Although technologies may have emerged to make this more technically feasible than in the past, it is staff’s opinion that such a process would still be time-consuming and costly, contrary to the intent of streamlining the process.
Staff supports maintaining the existing verification system and has not encountered any fraud. It is staff’s recommendation that the language proposed for both ordinance versions indicates that the method of verification be treated as a policy directive of Council rather than codification of a specific practice because, over time, technological changes may allow for more robust verification methods than currently exist (see p. 6; sections 30.25.030.B.4.c and 30.25.030.D.4). The City could include digital signature platforms currently used by the City, as the same may be updated from time to time.
Additional Cleanups
In revisiting the ordinance, staff also recommends a few minor changes to enhance the 698 of 1291
4 b 7
document’s clarity. These are found in Sections 30.25.030.B.5, 30.25.030.D.5, and
30.25.030.F.
ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:
Jay Platt, Principal Planner
Approved by:
Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager
EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
Exhibit 1: REDLINE of Proposed Ordinance to Amend GMC section 30.25.030 – Version 1 (50%+)
Exhibit 2: REDLINE of Proposed Ordinance to Amend GMC section 30.25.030 – Version 2 (67%)
699 of 1291
1 ORDINANCE NO. _______
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING SECTION 30.25.030 OF TITLE 30 TO THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995 RELATING GENERALLY TO STREAMLINING THE CITY’S HISTORIC DISTRICT DESIGNATION PROCESS.
(CASE NO. PZC-0002-2022)
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
SECTION 1. Section 30.25.030 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 is hereby amended as follows:
30.25.030 Procedure for historic district overlay zone designation and modification.
The following shall be the procedures for designating or modifying historic district overlay zones:
A. Applications for Historic District Overlay Zone Designation or Modification.
Applications for the establishment or modification of Historic District Overlay Zones must originate with the owners of any three (3) properties within the proposed district boundary (the study area) and shall be submitted to the Director of Community Development. Applications shall include the proposed historic district overlay zone study area boundary, addresses of all properties to be included in the proposed historic district overlay zone, a written narrative describing the history and development of the area, and a statement describing why the proposed historic district overlay zone designation or modification meets the criteria for designation under Section 30.25.020.
B. HPC Review of Application and Establishment of Pending Historic District.
Once the application to designate or modify a Historic District Overlay Zone is deemed complete, the Director of Community Development shall set a community forum and a public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission. The Commission shall hold the community forum to inform residents and owners about the proposed historic district and historic districts in general, as well as answer questions. Immediately following the community forum, the Commission will conduct the public hearing to make a preliminary determination whether the application contains sufficient information indicating the study area appears likely to meet the thresholds and criteria set forth in Chapter 30.25 for purposes of subsequently undergoing more detailed analysis. In preparation for the community forum and public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission, the Director of Community Development may meet with residents of the community, seek 700 of 1291
2 advice of preservation professionals and historians, and conduct or receive any research or studies to assist the Historic Preservation Commission with its preliminary determination whether the proposed district meets the criteria and thresholds for designation in Chapter 30.25.
1. Notice of the community forum and public hearing shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the most recent Los Angeles County Assessor’s office property records, in the proposed historic district overlay zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the boundary of the proposed historic district overlay zone. The notice shall be accompanied by a document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information describing the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map showing the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the proposed district boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application materials and general information about historic districts, on the City of Glendale website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears to be eligible for designation or modification, the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3) of this Code.
3. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the proposed historic district does not appear eligible for designation, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3).
4. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears eligible for designation or modification, but additional evidence demonstrating public support for the application is warranted, then the Historic Preservation Commission may require the applicant to circulate a petition within the proposed district requesting that City Council authorize preparation of a historic district survey.
a. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information regarding the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map indicating the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application and general information about historic districts, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The petition forms shall be distributed to the applicant and shall contain a statement that all signatories acknowledge their ownership and their authority to sign the petition under penalty of perjury. b. Within ninety (90) days of the preliminary determination of eligibility by the Historic Preservation Commission, or within ninety (90) days of a City Council action 701 of 1291
3 sustaining the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination following an appeal, the project proponents shall submit to the Director of Community Development a petition requesting a historic district survey. The time limit may be extended for another ninety (90) days by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the initial ninety (90) day time limit.
c. The Director of Community Development shall verify the number of properties represented on the petition by valid signatures, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms. If the owners of more than twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the historic district overlay zone application shall move forward in the designation process and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3). If the owners of twenty-five (25) percent or less of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section
30.25.030(B)(3) below.
d. For the purpose of this section the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one (1) of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such cotenant shall be required to sign the petition; iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
e. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
702 of 1291
4 5. Upon the determination of the Historic Preservation Commission that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible for designation or modification and the Director of Community Development’s acceptance of any petition required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone shall be deemed a “Pending Historic District Overlay Zone” until such time as the application is approved or denied by City Council or is withdrawn by the applicants. The Director of Community Development shall mail a notice of this determination to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary boundary. This notice shall include information about the transfer of design review authority in the pending district from the Design Review Board to the Historic Preservation Commission pursuant to Section 30.25.040, the applicability of the Historic District Design Guidelines for design review of applications submitted subsequent to the date of this determination pursuant to Section 30.25.050, the process to oppose the designation of a historic district, and instructions for locating the Guidelines, the historic district application, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The notice shall also include information about the process to oppose the designation of a historic district.
6. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission denies the application pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(1) or the petition fails to receive the minimum threshold level of support required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the Director of Community Development shall send notice that the application is denied to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the thencurrent Los Angeles County Assessor’s property information, in the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary study area boundary.
C. Following the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible to be established pursuant to Chapter 30.25, the Director of Community Development shall issue a request for proposals to preservation consulting firms meeting the Secretary of the Interior’s Professional Qualification Standards. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission required a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the request for proposals shall not be issued until the Director of Community Development has received said petition and verified that it bears the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary.
Upon review of the consultants’ submitted proposals, the Director of Community Development shall prepare a ranked list of recommended consultants and set a hearing before City Council to review the proposals and request funding authorization, as follows:
703 of 1291
5 1. City Council shall select a preferred bidder and authorize funding for the historic district survey, directing the Director of Community Development to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
2. City Council shall select a preferred bidder but, in the event that the Historic Preservation Commission did not require a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2) and City Council finds reason to require further public input to indicate the level of support for establishing or modifying a historic district overlay zone, it may require that the project proponents circulate a petition requesting a historic district survey to property owners within the proposed boundary, or any boundary modified by the Historic Preservation Commission or City Council, asking the City Council to authorize preparation of a historic district survey or modification of an existing survey in accordance with the process established in Section 30.25.030(B)(2).
City Council shall also authorize the Director of Community Development, upon his or her receipt and verification of a petition bearing the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary, to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
D. Hearing to Review Draft Historic District Survey. Upon the consultant’s completion of a draft historic district survey, including any recommended additions to the Historic District Design Guidelines necessitated by the findings of the survey, the Director of Community Development shall set the draft survey for review before the Historic Preservation Commission in a duly noticed community forum and public hearing according to the procedures set forth in Section 30.61 of this Title. The mailed notice shall be accompanied by a document containing basic information regarding the findings of the draft survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, and the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the draft historic district survey and all property specific DPR 523a survey forms, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area.
1. The Commission may approve the draft historic district survey as presented or provide direction to the Director of Community Development to make any specific minor revisions required to transform the draft survey into the final Historic District Survey. The Historic Preservation Commission shall then, or upon completion of any required minor revisions, authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition to affected property owners asking the City Council to establish the historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District 704 of 1291
6 Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the draft historic district survey requires significant revision, it may continue the hearing item and direct the Director of Community Development to work with the consultant to revise the survey to address the Commission’s specific concerns. The revised draft survey will be returned to the Commission at a duly noticed community forum and public hearing at which the survey, if approved, will become the final historic district survey. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area. The notice for the continued community forum and public hearing shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
3. Upon the Historic Preservation Commission’s approval of the final historic district survey per Section 30.25.030(D)(1) or 30.25.031(D)(2), above, it shall issue its final recommendation to City Council regarding the establishment of the historic district overlay zone. The Commission shall also authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone to affected property owners asking City Council to establish a historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts and how their designation affects property owners on the City of Glendale website. This document shall also include information about how to sign and submit the petition.
4. Within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation Commission’s authorization to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone, the project proponents shall submit said petition to the Director of Community Development. Said petition must be signed by the owners of more than fifty (50) percent of the properties in the historic district study area, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a petition satisfying the requirements of Article XV, Section 2 of the Glendale City Charter shall satisfy the requirement of this subsection. If such a petition is not submitted to the satisfaction of the Director of Community Development within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation Commission’s authorization to 705 of 1291
7 circulate the petition, the application for a historic district overlay zone shall be deemed denied. The six-month time limit may be extended by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the one hundred-eighty (180) day time limit. a. For the purpose of this section, for the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such co-tenant shall be required to sign the petition;
iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
b. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
5. Upon receipt of the petition, and verification by the Director of Community Development that the petition satisfies the requirements of Section 30.25.030(D)(3), Director of Community Development shall prepare a report that details the appropriateness of the recommended boundary consistent with the historic district overlay zone designation criteria, provide the percentage of the propertiesy owners in the district whose owners are petitioning the City Council, provide an overview of the history and significance of the area, provide photographs of all properties within the area (both contributing and non-contributing buildings), and present any supplements to the Historic District Design Guidelines prepared by the consultant.
E. Planning Commission Review of Proposed Historic District Overlay Zone.
The Director of Community Development shall forward the Historic Preservation Commission’s recommendation to the Planning Commission for consideration of a zone change to create the specific historic district overlay zone. The application shall then be 706 of 1291
8 processed according to the procedures set forth under Chapters 30.61 and 30.63 of this Title.
F. Modification of or Deletion of Historic District Overlay Zone. The procedures for modification or deletion of a historic district overlay zone shall follow the procedures outlined in this section and elsewhere in the Zoning Code (Title 30) and the City Charter as applicable.
G. Translation of Public Notices and Educational Materials. Any information or materials, including, but not limited to, public notices and educational materials about historic districts, that is provided by the City of Glendale as part of the historic district process in any format, whether as hard copy, digitally, or on the City of Glendale website, shall be translated into, at minimum, Armenian, Korean, and Spanish. 707 of 1291
9 Passed by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2023. ______________________________
Mayor
Attest
___________________________________
City Clerk
STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.
CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, SUZIE ABAJIAN, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. ______________ was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the ______ day of _______________, 2023 by the following vote:
Ayes:
Noes:
Absent:
Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
708 of 1291
1 ORDINANCE NO. _______
AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING SECTION 30.25.030 OF TITLE 30 TO THE GLENDALE MUNICIPAL CODE, 1995 RELATING GENERALLY TO STREAMLINING THE CITY’S HISTORIC DISTRICT DESIGNATION PROCESS.
(CASE NO. PZC-0002-2022)
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE:
SECTION 1. Section 30.25.030 of the Glendale Municipal Code, 1995 is hereby amended as follows:
30.25.030 Procedure for historic district overlay zone designation and modification.
The following shall be the procedures for designating or modifying historic district overlay zones:
A. Applications for Historic District Overlay Zone Designation or Modification.
Applications for the establishment or modification of Historic District Overlay Zones must originate with the owners of any three (3) properties within the proposed district boundary (the study area) and shall be submitted to the Director of Community Development. Applications shall include the proposed historic district overlay zone study area boundary, addresses of all properties to be included in the proposed historic district overlay zone, a written narrative describing the history and development of the area, and a statement describing why the proposed historic district overlay zone designation or modification meets the criteria for designation under Section 30.25.020.
B. HPC Review of Application and Establishment of Pending Historic District.
Once the application to designate or modify a Historic District Overlay Zone is deemed complete, the Director of Community Development shall set a community forum and a public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission. The Commission shall hold the community forum to inform residents and owners about the proposed historic district and historic districts in general, as well as answer questions. Immediately following the community forum, the Commission will conduct the public hearing to make a preliminary determination whether the application contains sufficient information indicating the study area appears likely to meet the thresholds and criteria set forth in Chapter 30.25 for purposes of subsequently undergoing more detailed analysis. In preparation for the community forum and public hearing before the Historic Preservation Commission, the Director of Community Development may meet with residents of the community, seek 709 of 1291
2 advice of preservation professionals and historians, and conduct or receive any research or studies to assist the Historic Preservation Commission with its preliminary determination whether the proposed district meets the criteria and thresholds for designation in Chapter 30.25.
1. Notice of the community forum and public hearing shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the most recent Los Angeles County Assessor’s office property records, in the proposed historic district overlay zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the boundary of the proposed historic district overlay zone. The notice shall be accompanied by a document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information describing the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map showing the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the proposed district boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application materials and general information about historic districts, on the City of Glendale website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears to be eligible for designation or modification, the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3) of this Code.
3. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the proposed historic district does not appear eligible for designation, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3).
4. If the Historic Preservation Commission preliminarily determines that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone appears eligible for designation or modification, but additional evidence demonstrating public support for the application is warranted, then the Historic Preservation Commission may require the applicant to circulate a petition within the proposed district requesting that City Council authorize preparation of a historic district survey.
a. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing information regarding the proposed historic district overlay zone, a map indicating the proposed district boundary, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the application and general information about historic districts, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The petition forms shall be distributed to the applicant and shall contain a statement that all signatories acknowledge their ownership and their authority to sign the petition under penalty of perjury. b. Within ninety (90) days of the preliminary determination of eligibility by the Historic Preservation Commission, or within ninety (90) days of a City Council action 710 of 1291
3 sustaining the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination following an appeal, the project proponents shall submit to the Director of Community Development a petition requesting a historic district survey. The time limit may be extended for another ninety (90) days by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the initial ninety (90) day time limit.
c. The Director of Community Development shall verify the number of properties represented on the petition by valid signatures, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms. If the owners of more than twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the historic district overlay zone application shall move forward in the designation process and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such preliminary determination pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(3). If the owners of twenty-five (25) percent or less of the properties in the study area have signed the petition, the application shall be deemed denied and the Director of Community Development shall send notice of such determination pursuant to Section
30.25.030(B)(3) below.
d. For the purpose of this section the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one (1) of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such cotenant shall be required to sign the petition; iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
e. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
711 of 1291
4 5. Upon the determination of the Historic Preservation Commission that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible for designation or modification and the Director of Community Development’s acceptance of any petition required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone shall be deemed a “Pending Historic District Overlay Zone” until such time as the application is approved or denied by City Council or is withdrawn by the applicants. The Director of Community Development shall mail a notice of this determination to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary boundary. This notice shall include information about the transfer of design review authority in the pending district from the Design Review Board to the Historic Preservation Commission pursuant to Section 30.25.040, the applicability of the Historic District Design Guidelines for design review of applications submitted subsequent to the date of this determination pursuant to Section 30.25.050, the process to oppose the designation of a historic district, and instructions for locating the Guidelines, the historic district application, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The notice shall also include information about the process to oppose the designation of a historic district.
6. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission denies the application pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(1) or the petition fails to receive the minimum threshold level of support required under Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the Director of Community Development shall send notice that the application is denied to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the thencurrent Los Angeles County Assessor’s property information, in the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone, and to every property owner within five hundred (500) feet of the preliminary study area boundary.
C. Following the Historic Preservation Commission’s determination that the proposed Historic District Overlay Zone designation or modification appears eligible to be established pursuant to Chapter 30.25, the Director of Community Development shall issue a request for proposals to preservation consulting firms meeting the Secretary of the Interior’s Professional Qualification Standards. In the event the Historic Preservation Commission required a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2), the request for proposals shall not be issued until the Director of Community Development has received said petition and verified that it bears the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary.
Upon review of the consultants’ submitted proposals, the Director of Community Development shall prepare a ranked list of recommended consultants and set a hearing before City Council to review the proposals and request funding authorization, as follows:
712 of 1291
5 1. City Council shall select a preferred bidder and authorize funding for the historic district survey, directing the Director of Community Development to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
2. City Council shall select a preferred bidder but, in the event that the Historic Preservation Commission did not require a petition requesting a historic district survey pursuant to Section 30.25.030(B)(2) and City Council finds reason to require further public input to indicate the level of support for establishing or modifying a historic district overlay zone, it may require that the project proponents circulate a petition requesting a historic district survey to property owners within the proposed boundary, or any boundary modified by the Historic Preservation Commission or City Council, asking the City Council to authorize preparation of a historic district survey or modification of an existing survey in accordance with the process established in Section 30.25.030(B)(2).
City Council shall also authorize the Director of Community Development, upon his or her receipt and verification of a petition bearing the signatures of the owners of over twenty-five (25) percent of the properties in the proposed district boundary, to prepare a contract between the City and the consultant chosen by City Council.
D. Hearing to Review Draft Historic District Survey. Upon the consultant’s completion of a draft historic district survey, including any recommended additions to the Historic District Design Guidelines necessitated by the findings of the survey, the Director of Community Development shall set the draft survey for review before the Historic Preservation Commission in a duly noticed community forum and public hearing according to the procedures set forth in Section 30.61 of this Title. The mailed notice shall be accompanied by a document containing basic information regarding the findings of the draft survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, and the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the draft historic district survey and all property specific DPR 523a survey forms, on the Glendale Community Development Department website. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area.
1. The Commission may approve the draft historic district survey as presented or provide direction to the Director of Community Development to make any specific minor revisions required to transform the draft survey into the final Historic District Survey. The Historic Preservation Commission shall then, or upon completion of any required minor revisions, authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition to affected property owners asking the City Council to establish the historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District 713 of 1291
6 Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
2. If the Historic Preservation Commission determines the draft historic district survey requires significant revision, it may continue the hearing item and direct the Director of Community Development to work with the consultant to revise the survey to address the Commission’s specific concerns. The revised draft survey will be returned to the Commission at a duly noticed community forum and public hearing at which the survey, if approved, will become the final historic district survey. The notice shall be mailed to every property owner, and every household that is not owner occupied according to the County Assessor’s office, in the study area. The notice for the continued community forum and public hearing shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within the boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts on the Glendale Community Development Department website.
3. Upon the Historic Preservation Commission’s approval of the final historic district survey per Section 30.25.030(D)(1) or 30.25.031(D)(2), above, it shall issue its final recommendation to City Council regarding the establishment of the historic district overlay zone. The Commission shall also authorize the project proponents to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone to affected property owners asking City Council to establish a historic district overlay zone. All petition forms, whether circulated physically or digitally, shall be accompanied by an informational document prepared by the Director of Community Development containing basic information regarding the findings of the final survey, a map of the final district boundary verified by the consultant, the address ranges of the properties within that boundary, and instructions for locating relevant documents, including the final historic district survey and all property-specific DPR 523a survey forms, the Historic District Design Guidelines, and general information about historic districts and how their designation affects property owners on the City of Glendale website. This document shall also include information about how to sign and submit the petition.
4. Within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation Commission’s authorization to circulate a petition requesting a historic district overlay zone, the project proponents shall submit said petition to the Director of Community Development. Said petition must be signed by the owners of more than sixty-seven (67) percent of the properties in the historic district study area, signed under penalty of perjury, and affixed in original handwriting or using the City’s accepted digital signature platforms.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, a petition satisfying the requirements of Article XV, Section 2 of the Glendale City Charter shall satisfy the requirement of this subsection. If such a petition is not submitted to the satisfaction of the Director of Community Development within one hundred-eighty (180) days of the Historic Preservation 714 of 1291
7 Commission’s authorization to circulate the petition, the application for a historic district overlay zone shall be deemed denied. The six-month time limit may be extended by the Director of Community Development upon showing of good cause. Any request for an extension of time must be made prior to the expiration of the one hundred-eighty (180) day time limit.
a. For the purpose of this section, for the signature of an “owner of property” to constitute a valid petition signature, the petition shall be signed by one of the following:
i. Where the property is held by one individual, the petition shall be signed by that individual;
ii. Where the property is held in a form of co-tenancy, including joint tenancy, tenants in common, tenants in partnership or community property, then each such co-tenant shall be required to sign the petition;
iii. Where the property is held by a business entity, such as a corporation, limited partnership, general partnership, or limited liability, an authorized agent of such business entity with the power to bind the entity in contract shall sign the petition; iv. Where the property is a common interest development, as defined in California Civil Code Section 1351, the authorized agent of the homeowner’s association or other agent designated in the common interest development’s governing documents shall sign the petition; or
v. Where the property is held in trust, all co-trustees shall sign the petition unless the California Probate Code allows otherwise.
b. Properties owned by any public agency shall not be considered, either as signatories or when determining the total number of properties, in judging whether a petition has sufficient signatures.
5. Upon receipt of the petition, and verification by the Director of Community Development that the petition satisfies the requirements of Section 30.25.030(D)(3), Director of Community Development shall prepare a report that details the appropriateness of the recommended boundary consistent with the historic district overlay zone designation criteria, provide the percentage of the propertiesy owners in the district whose owners are petitioning the City Council, provide an overview of the history and significance of the area, provide photographs of all properties within the area (both contributing and non-contributing buildings), and present any supplements to the Historic District Design Guidelines prepared by the consultant.
E. Planning Commission Review of Proposed Historic District Overlay Zone.
The Director of Community Development shall forward the Historic Preservation Commission’s recommendation to the Planning Commission for consideration of a zone change to create the specific historic district overlay zone. The application shall then be 715 of 1291
8 processed according to the procedures set forth under Chapters 30.61 and 30.63 of this Title.
F. Modification of or Deletion of Historic District Overlay Zone. The procedures for modification or deletion of a historic district overlay zone shall follow the procedures outlined in this section and elsewhere in the Zoning Code (Title 30) and the City Charter as applicable.
G. Translation of Public Notices and Educational Materials. Any information or materials, including, but not limited to, public notices and educational materials about historic districts, that is provided by the City of Glendale as part of the historic district process in any format, whether as hard copy, digitally, or on the City of Glendale website, shall be translated into, at minimum, Armenian, Korean, and Spanish. 716 of 1291
9 Passed by the Council of the City of Glendale on the _______ day of ________, 2023. ______________________________
Mayor
Attest
___________________________________
City Clerk
STATE OF CALIFORNIA)
COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES) SS.
CITY OF GLENDALE)
I, SUZIE ABAJIAN, City Clerk of the City of Glendale, California, certify that the foregoing Ordinance No. ______________ was passed by the Council of the City of Glendale, California, by a vote of four-fifths (4/5ths) of the members thereof, at a regular meeting held on the ______ day of _______________, 2023 by the following vote:
Ayes:
Noes:
Absent:
Abstain:
____________________________
City Clerk
717 of 1291
8a
CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
AGENDA ITEM
Report: Approval to Release the Request for Proposal (RFP) for Operation and Maintenance of Fixed Route and Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
1. Resolution to approve and authorize the release of the Request for Proposal for operation and maintenance of fixed route and Dial-A-Ride transit services.
COUNCIL ACTION
Item Type: Action Item
Approved for October 10, 2023 calendar
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
The City of Glendale seeks to retain a responsive contractor through the RFP process to perform with the highest degree of excellence in meeting the mobility needs of customers who use the City’s public transportation services. The Contractor must provide safe, efficient, and effective transit service, provide state of the art maintenance of the city bus fleet, and provide a professional and friendly ride experience for each passenger. Based on the selected proposal, the city intends to negotiate the most favorable combination of outcomes to meet the above objectives. 718 of 1291
2 a 8
COUNCIL PRIORITIES
Mobility, Traffic & Pedestrian Safety: Beeline and Dial-A-Ride transit services provide safe, efficient, and reliable transportation services.
RECOMMENDATION
Adopt a resolution to approve and authorize the release of the operation and maintenance fixed route and Dial-A-Ride transit services RFP.
BACKGROUND
Glendale provides Beeline fixed-route bus and Dial-A-Ride paratransit services for the community. The city is seeking to select a firm that specializes in the operation of public transit services to operate both the fixed route Beeline and Dial-A-Ride that includes transit operations, vehicle maintenance, facility maintenance, and service administration. Glendale transit services are federalized transit operations, and the selected Contractor is required to meet all federal, state, and local operations, maintenance, and administrative requirements.
As the City’s transit services contracts were set to expire on June 30, 2023, an RFP for the operations and maintenance of fixed route and Dial-A-Ride transit services was issued on March 2, 2023. At the June 13, 2023, City Council meeting, Council declined to approve staff’s recommendation to award the transit services contract and directed staff to extend the two current contracts for one year and to re-release the RFP.
Following the one-year extension, the current service contracts will expire on July 31, 2024. The Beeline contract was last awarded in 2015 and the Dial-A-Ride contract in 2016, both through a federal competitive procurement process.
Using the city-owned facility and the city-furnished buses and equipment, the Contractor will coordinate, manage, and control activities which include: providing safe and reliable transit operations; maintain the bus maintenance facility and vehicles; facilitate the transition to battery-electric fleet including maintain charging infrastructure; providing support vehicles; providing operators, mechanics, technicians, and all other project personnel; training personnel as necessary for their duties and electrification of the bus fleet; developing and implementing administrative procedures, providing data and financial controls, records and reporting; participating in service planning; and developing methods to improve effectiveness and maximize service efficiency.
The emphasis in this solicitation will be placed on providing outstanding customer service to passengers, conducting adequate training, implementing policies designed to minimize employee turnover and maximize on-time performance, providing wellmaintained and mechanically safe vehicles, transitioning to battery-electric vehicles, and providing other service-related items that affect the reliability of service.
ANALYSIS
Competitive Proposal Evaluation Criteria
719 of 1291
3 a 8
The evaluation criteria for this RFP were developed using the Federal Transit Administration (FTA) guidance that includes:
Experience, References and Performance Record – The RFP requires proposers to detail their relevant fixed route and Dial-A-Ride experience with similar transit agencies and any issues it may have had in providing operations and maintenance services to other transit agencies. References from other transit agencies are required to aid in the evaluation of their proposals.
Technical Criteria – The RFP requires evaluation of operations and maintenance of transit services and proposals in the following four Technical Capacity areas.
Technical Capacity – Operations
Technical Capacity – Vehicle Maintenance
Technical Capacity – Facility Maintenance and Equipment Technical Capacity – Administration
Proposers should demonstrate a high level of technical capacity in all four areas to ensure the stated goals (below) of the RFP are met.
1) provide safe, efficient, and effective transit service, 2) provide state of the art maintenance of the city bus fleet and city facility, and 3) provide a professional and friendly ride experience for each passenger.
Key Personnel – The evaluation criteria include a staffing plan of key personnel since management, safety, maintenance, and electrification staff are a critical factor in determining the success of the service. The RFP requires proposers to identify the five key personnel (General Manager, Assistant General Manager (Electrification), Operations Manager, Safety and Training Manager, and Maintenance Manager) and include their resumes that includes their qualifications and experience. The key personnel are required to be present during which interviews to determine the depth of their knowledge in the critical areas.
Price Proposal – The RFP’s overall goal is to obtain the best quality and service for the least cost. Each proposer will use the pricing tables included in the RFP to compare pricing.
The term for the proposed agreement is six years with two, two-year extensions. The length of the contract allows firms to bid on a long-term contract thereby reducing the cost of service overall.
Project Schedule
Transit staff have updated the RFP with the following RFP Schedule of Events. 720 of 1291
4 a 8
Event Date
Issuance of Request for Proposals (RFP) October 12, 2023 Optional Pre-Proposal Meeting October 25, 2023
Optional Facility and Fleet Inspection October 28, 2023 Deadline for Receipt of Questions/Requests for
Addenda
November8, 2023
Proposals Due December 20, 2023
Proposer Interviews and Discussions (if requested by
City)
January 22 – January 29,
2024
Anticipated Contract Award by City Council March 2024
Transition and Start-up Date July 2024
Service Commencement August 1, 2024
As a recipient of FTA grant funding, the operations and maintenance of fixed route and Dial-A-Ride transit services RFP is federalized and follows the FTA procurement guidelines and contract requirements. Failure to adhere to the contracting selection guidelines may result in the FTA disallowing grant funding and jeopardize the City’s participation in future federal grant opportunities. Below is a summary of the Federal requirements and restrictions contained in the RFP.
FTA Procurement Standards of Conduct
FTA recipients and subrecipients must maintain written standards of conduct governing the performance of their employees and City representatives engaged in the award and administration of contracts. No employee, officer, agent, board member, or immediate family member, partner, or organization that employs or is about to employ any of the parties listed above may participate in the selection, award, or administration of a contract supported with FTA assistance if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, is involved. Such a conflict would arise when any of those individuals listed has a financial or other interest in the firm selected for award. The RFP includes the following City of Glendale language to adhere to the federal standards of conduct during the RFP submittal. The City of Glendale conflict of interest rules also apply and is an essential term in the proposed agreement.
Following FTA Procurement Standards of Conduct, this procurement restricts proposers from lobbying or making any contact with members of the City Council or city staff from the time the RFP is released through the award of contract.
The City’s instructions to proposer regarding lobbying and contact are set forth as follows:
During the period beginning on the date of the issuance of the RFP and ending on the date of contract award to a Proposer, no person (or entity) submitting a proposal in response to this RFP, nor any officer, employee, representative, agent, or Contractor 721 of 1291
5 a 8
representing such a person (or entity) shall contact through any means or engage in any discussion concerning the award of the Contract with any member of the City Council of the City of Glendale or his or her personal staff, or with any candidate for election to the City Council of the City of Glendale. Any such contact shall be grounds for automatic disqualification of the proposal.
During the period beginning on the date of the issuance of this RFP and ending on the day after a contract is awarded to a Proposer, each person or entity described in the previous paragraph shall limit his or her communication with city staff to the written clarification and addendum process, and interviews or discussions pursuant to evaluation and selection process. At no time may any Proposer have any communication with a member of the city’s Evaluation Committee, other than communication initiated by such member during interviews.
Nothing herein shall be construed to limit or restrict any person or entity from communicating with the City Council in writing or at a meeting of the Council, noticed under the Ralph M. Brown 50 et seq., provided such communication is after the public release of the staff report to the Council recommending a proposer.
Competition Requirements
Federal procurements require full and open competition. The primary benefit of full and open competition is to obtain the best quality and service for the least cost also known as best buy. Full and open competition also guards against favoritism and profiteering at the public’s expense, and to provide equal opportunities for all qualified offerors to participate in public business opportunities.
Best Buy – The primary purpose of full and open competition is to obtain, for internal customers (and passengers, funding partners, and local community), the best quality of goods and services for the least cost.
• Favoritism and Profiteering – Poor procurement practices result in suppliers or public agents unjustly profiting at the public’s expense. Vulnerabilities associated with a transit system’s procurement processes that result in exploitation of public procurements by suppliers or public officials significantly affect the public’s overall confidence in that transit agency’s ability to safeguard its stakeholder’s investments (i.e., passengers, funding partners, local community, and other vested parties).
• Opportunity to Participate – While a recipient’s primary goal is to obtain the best buy for its transit agency, the supplier community has an expectation that opportunities to compete for government contracts are made available through full and open competition. While a recipient’s primary goal is always the best buy, not every offeror has a vested right to participate in or a vested profit interest in a 722 of 1291
6 a 8
particular procurement. Every offeror does, however, have a right to fair dealing during the solicitation and selection process. Recipients should treat all potential offerors as fairly as possible.
Restraints on Competition
FTA procurement guidance includes policies that address possible restraints that can preclude a full and open competition.
Geographical Preferences - The prohibition against geographic preferences as stated in FTA Circular 4220.1F is based upon the Uniform Guidance, 2 C.F.R. § 200.319(b), whereby recipients are prohibited from using in-state or local geographic preferences in the evaluation of bids or proposals. The transit operations RFP evaluation criteria does not provide added points for local preference.
Organizational Conflict of Interest - An FTA grant recipient must avoid taking any action that might result in or create the appearance of organizational conflict of interest.
Organizational conflicts of interest can cause two distinct problems: bias and unfair competitive advantage.
• Bias arises when a contractor is placed in a situation in which it may have an incentive to distort its advice or decisions.
• Unfair competitive advantage occurs when one contractor has information not available to other contractors in the normal course of business or has/ had access to nonpublic information. Note that a competitive advantage is not always unfair. A contractor may have a fair competitive advantage by virtue of its prior experience, its expertise, its more efficient operations, etc. Occasionally an incumbent contractor may have what appears to be an insurmountable competitive advantage by virtue of its previous work for the transit agency. An advantage of this type may not necessarily be unfair.
Federal Clauses – The procurement includes the required federal clauses in Exhibit H of the RFP. Of note is the Disadvantage Business Enterprise (DBE) RC (race conscious) goal for this procurement is 3.6%.
STAKEHOLDERS/OUTREACH
The solicitation for operations and maintenance of fixed route and Dial-A-Ride transit services allow the city to continue to provide mobility to City of Glendale residents and employees of City of Glendale businesses. The RFP (Exhibit 1) will be posted on the city’s webpage and will be emailed directly to qualified firms listed in (Exhibit 17).
FISCAL IMPACT
There is no fiscal impact associated with the approval to release the solicitation. The estimated cost for the services ranges from $12,000,000 to $15,000,000 per fiscal year 723 of 1291
7 a 8
during the proposed term of the contract, with the start-up date of July 2024. Funding for these future services will be included during the FY 2024-25 budget process.
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW (CEQA/NEPA)
This item is considered a ministerial activity and therefore, not subject to CEQA/NEPA review.
CAMPAIGN DISCLOSURE
This item is exempt from campaign disclosure requirements.
ALTERNATIVES
Alternative 1: Approve the release of the Request for Proposals for operation and maintenance of Glendale Beeline and Dial-A-Ride fixed route transit services. This would prevent the canceling of transit services within the City of Glendale.
Alternative 2: The City Council may elect not to approve the release of the Request For Proposals. The Beeline and Dial-A-Ride services will cease operation on July 31, 2024, the end of the current contracts eliminating city transit services.
Alternative 3: The City Council may consider any other alternative not proposed by staff.
ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
Prepared by:
Martha D’Andrea, Transit Manager
Approved by:
Roubik R. Golanian, P.E., City Manager
EXHIBITS/ATTACHMENTS
Exhibit 1: Request for proposal for the operations and maintenance of Glendale Beeline and Dial-A-Ride fixed route transit services
Exhibit 2: Beeline Fixed Route Timetables
Exhibit 3: Dial-A-Ride Information Sheet
Exhibit 4: Glendale DAR Services Area Map
Exhibit 5: Fleet List
Exhibit 6: City Owned Equipment List
Exhibit 7: MV Glendale Labor Code Information
724 of 1291
8 a 8
Exhibit 8: Draft General Services Agreement
Exhibit 9: Federal Contact Clauses
Exhibit 10: RC-DBE Instructions
Exhibit 11: Bus Operator Uniform Requirements
Exhibit 12: Third Party Maintenance Inspection
Exhibit 13: Glendale Beeline Maintenance
Exhibit 14: Performance Bond
Exhibit 15: RFP Required Forms A-M
Exhibit 16: RFP Required Forms N-P
Exhibit 17: Transit Vendor List
725 of 1291
RESOLUTION NO.
ARESOLUTION OF THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
APPROVING THE REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS FOR THE OPERATION OF
GLENDALE BEELINE FIXED ROUTE AND DIAL-A-RIDE TRANSIT SERVICE AND
SOLICITATION THEREOF
WHEREAS, the City is currently in one-year extension contracts with MV Transportation to operate Glendale Beeline and Dial-A-Ride, a public fixed route service that includes operations, vehicle maintenance, facility maintenance, and service administration; and WHEREAS, the City is seeking to select a firm to operate Glendale Beeline, wherein the Contractor will coordinate, manage, and control activities, including: providing an operations and maintenance facility; maintaining buses; providing support vehicles; providing operators, mechanics, technicians, and all other project personnel; training personnel as necessary for their duties; developing and implementing administrative procedures, providing data and financial controls, records and reporting; participating in service planning; and developing methods to improve effectiveness and maximize service efficiency; and WHEREAS, a Request for Proposals (RFP) has been prepared to solicit firms specializing in operation of public transit services; and
WHEREAS, the solicitation will place emphasis on providing outstanding customer service to passengers, conducting adequate training, implementing policies designed to minimize employee turnover and maximize on-time performance, providing well-maintained and mechanically safe vehicles, and providing other service-related items that affect the reliability of service; and
WHEREAS, this City Council has duly considered the Request for Proposals and believes that solicitation of firms through this process is in the best interests of the City of Glendale and the health, safety and welfare of its residents, and in accord with the public purposes and provisions of applicable State and local laws and requirements;
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA:
1. The Request for Proposals on file in the City Clerk's office for the Operation of Glendale Beeline Fixed Route Transit Service is hereby approved.
2. Staff is hereby directed to release the Request for Proposals.
Adopted this day of ,2023.
_____________________
Mayor
ATTEST:
__________________
City Clerk
726 of 1291
CITY OF GLENDALE
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
RFP#: PWA 2023-100
REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP)
for
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIXED
ROUTE AND DIAL-A-RIDE TRANSIT SERVICES
Issued: October 12, 2023
Deadline to Submit Proposals:
December 20, 2023, by 4:00 PM
Public Works Department
633 E. Broadway, Room 209
Glendale, CA 91206-4388
Telephone: (818) 548-3900
Exhibit 1
727 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 1
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
CITY OF GLENDALE
REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP)
FOR
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF
FIXED ROUTE AND DIAL-A-RIDE TRANSIT SERVICES
Submittal: For the Proposal to be accepted and considered, submit one (1) unbound original, five (5) bound copies in three-ring binders, and two (2) USBs containing electronic files of the completed proposal and all necessary requested documents in a sealed package addressed as stated in the cover sheet. The outside of the submitted package must be marked "REQUEST
FOR PROPOSALS FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIXED
ROUTE AND DIAL-A-RIDE SERVICES 2024.”
Proposals must be received by no later than 4:00 PM on December 20, 2023.
Addressed to: City of Glendale
Public Works Administration
633 E. Broadway, Room 209
Glendale, CA 91206-4388
Attn: Yazdan T. Emrani, P.E.
Director of Public Works
Optional Pre-Proposal Meeting:
An optional pre-proposal meeting will be held virtually on October 25, 2023, at 10:00 AM. Interested parties may join at:
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-teams/join-a-meeting Meeting ID: 264 342 293 952
Passcode: ZtBfhu
Or call in (audio only)
+1 323-886-7427,,61017390# United States, Los Angeles
Phone Conference ID: 610 173 90#
Optional Facility & Fleet Inspection:
An optional facility and fleet inspection will be held October 28, 2023, at 10:00 AM. Interested parties wanting to attend must RSVP to [email protected] by 4:00 PM the day before the inspection to gain admittance.
Questions/Request for Addendum:
Any questions or clarifications regarding this Request for Proposal must be submitted to [email protected] no later than 4:00 PM on November 8, 2023.
728 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 2
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. Definitions and Acronyms................................................................................................ 5 B. Introduction and Service Summary ................................................................................. 7 B.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 7 B.2 Schedule of Events .................................................................................................. 8 B.3 City of Glendale Background.................................................................................... 8 B.4 Beeline Fixed Route Background ............................................................................. 8 B.5 Dial-A-Ride Paratransit Background......................................................................... 9 B.6 City Owned Revenue Vehicles ................................................................................11 B.7 City Owned Equipment and Facility .........................................................................11 C. Instructions to Proposers................................................................................................12 C.1 Restrictions on Lobbying and Contacts ...................................................................12 C.2 Optional Pre-Proposal Meeting................................................................................12 C.3 Optional Facility and Fleet Inspection Meeting.........................................................13 C.4 Disclaimers..............................................................................................................13 C.5 Limitations...............................................................................................................13 C.6 Proposal Submission...............................................................................................13 C.7 Default.....................................................................................................................14 C.8 Assignment .............................................................................................................14 C.9 Subcontractors ........................................................................................................14 C.10 Employees of Prior Operator ...................................................................................15 C.11 Termination .............................................................................................................15 C.12 Indemnification ........................................................................................................15 C.13 Agreement...............................................................................................................15 C.14 Renewal of Agreement............................................................................................17 C.15 Bonds......................................................................................................................17 C.16 Insurance ................................................................................................................17 C.17 Proposal Rejection ..................................................................................................17 C.18 Errors and Omissions..............................................................................................18 C.19 Contract Pricing.......................................................................................................18 C.20 Non-Appropriation of Funds.....................................................................................18 C.21 Compliance with Laws.............................................................................................18 729 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 3
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
C.22 Federal Requirements.............................................................................................18 C.23 Race Conscious Disadvantaged Business Enterprises............................................18 C.24 Safety......................................................................................................................19 C.25 Declared Emergency Operation ..............................................................................19 C.26 Gratuities.................................................................................................................19 C.27 Invoices...................................................................................................................20 C.28 Requests for Clarification/Addendum ......................................................................20 C.29 Acceptance of Proposals.........................................................................................21 C.30 Required Qualifications ...........................................................................................21 C.31 Protests...................................................................................................................21 C.32 Identifying Proprietary Information; Public Records Act ...........................................23 D. Scope of Work..................................................................................................................23 D.1 General Requirements ............................................................................................24 D.2 Beeline Fixed Route Operations..............................................................................32 D.3 Dial-A-Ride Paratransit Operations..........................................................................38 D.4 Maintenance............................................................................................................45 D.5 Facilities and Equipment .........................................................................................52 D.6 Administration .........................................................................................................55 D.7 Reporting Requirements..........................................................................................57 D.8 Recordkeeping and Audit Controls ..........................................................................58 E. Liquidated Damages........................................................................................................59 E.1 General Requirement Liquidated Damages.............................................................59 E.2 Operations Liquidated Damages .............................................................................60 E.3 Vehicle Maintenance Liquidated Damages..............................................................62 E.4 Administration Liquidated Damages ........................................................................64 E.5 Facility Maintenance Liquidated Damages ..............................................................65 F. Proposal Submission Requirements..............................................................................65 F.1 General Formatting Requirements...........................................................................65 F.2 Part I: Proposer Certifications, Capacity, and Sustainability ....................................66 F.3 Part II: Qualifications and Technical Proposal .........................................................67 F.4 Part III: Staffing Plan, Price Proposal, and Incentives..............................................72 F.5 Proposal Evaluation and Contractor Selection.........................................................73 F.6 Award and Contract Execution ................................................................................74 730 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 4
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
F.7 Required Proposal Forms........................................................................................74 G. List of Exhibits .................................................................................................................75 Exhibit A Beeline Fixed Route Timetables
Exhibit B Dial-A-Ride Information Sheet
Exhibit C Dial-A-Ride Service Area Map
Exhibit D Fleet List
Exhibit E City Owned Equipment List
Exhibit F Labor Code Information (Labor Agreement with Teamsters Local 848 and MV Transportation for Glendale and Wage Rates)
Exhibit G Sample Draft General Services Contract (GSA)
Exhibit H Federal Contract Clauses
Exhibit I RC-DBE Instructions (Metro Subrecipients) and Forms I-1 to I-4 Exhibit J Bus/Vehicle Operator Uniform Requirements
Exhibit K Third Party Maintenance Inspection Reports
Exhibit L Facility Maintenance Manual
Exhibit M Sample Draft Performance Bond
731 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 5
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
A. DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS
The following terms and acronyms used in the Request for Proposal, attachments and exhibits, are defined as follows:
Agreement: To be considered synonymous with the term “Contract”.
Advanced Reservation: Describes the process of requesting trips and receiving trip confirmation before the day service is requested.
Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA): Federal civil rights legislation mandates accessibility for people with disabilities. Glendale Dial-A-Ride service is not ADA complementary paratransit service.
BAFO: Best and Final Offer
CHP: California Highway Patrol.
City: The City of Glendale, California.
Contractor: The individual, partnership, corporation, or other entity to which the agreement is awarded.
CNG: Compressed Natural Gas.
Curb-to-Curb Service: A type of paratransit service where the transit vehicle picks up and drops off passengers at the curb, sidewalk, or driveway on both the origin and destination ends of the trip.
DAR: Dial-A-Ride
Deadhead: For fixed route service, this refers to either miles or hours when a vehicle is operating without fare-paying passengers or not in revenue service, including travel from the yard to the start of a route and from the last stop on a route to the start of another route, to fueling, or back to the yard at the end of revenue service. For paratransit service, this refers to either miles or hours when a vehicle is not in revenue service, including travel from the yard to the first pick-up and from the last drop-off back to the yard when released by the dispatcher.
The travel between scheduled pick-ups and drop-offs, regardless of whether a passenger is on board, is not deadhead.
Dwell Time: For paratransit services, the time spent by vehicle and driver at each pick-up and drop-off waiting for the passenger(s) to appear during passenger boarding, deboarding, and wheelchair securement. Dwell time is included in the Vehicle Revenue Hour computation. For fixed routes, the time spent at each stop location is spent waiting for, boarding, and deboarding passengers.
Federal Transit Administration (FTA): A branch of the U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT) established to improve transportation throughout the nation. The FTA provides funding and assistance to regional transportation agencies and other programs. 732 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 6
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
Holiday Schedules: The City of Glendale transit services currently do not operate on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, July 4, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day.
Late Trip: For fixed route service, any arrival at a timepoint more than 5 minutes after the scheduled time. For Glendale Dial-A-Ride service, any trip in which the vehicle arrives for the pick-up more than 15 minutes after the pick-up window or not at all.
Marginal Rate: The cost per revenue hour for incremental costs incurred to deliver service in excess of the base service hours.
Metro: Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority.
Missed Trip: For fixed route service, any trip that departs its initial stop arrives at any time point more than 15 minutes after the scheduled time or does not operate a trip at all. For Dial-A-Ride service, any scheduled trip in which the bus arrives more than 45 minutes after the pick-up window or does not arrive.
No-Show: A scheduled passenger who does not appear at the designated location for vehicle boarding within 3 minutes of an on-time vehicle arrival or calls the reservation office to cancel the trip less than four (4) hours before the scheduled pick-up time.
On-Time Performance: For fixed route services, the bus departs a designated timepoint not earlier than or no more than 1 minute before or 5 minutes after the scheduled departure time.
For Glendale Dial-A-Ride, a vehicle shall be on-time if it arrives at the designated pick-up location no more than 5 minutes before the scheduled pick-up time or no more than 15 minutes after that time.
Pass-Through: This shall mean a process for payment of direct costs for fuel and any out of the ordinary activity not included in the RFP at the City's request and approval.
Passenger Trip: A one-way trip made on the paratransit service by a registered participant.
Project: Refers to the fixed route Beeline and Dial-A-Ride services.
Revenue Service: The operation of a revenue vehicle in transit service available to carry farepaying passengers. The term does not include deadhead time.
Revenue Vehicles: Vehicles used to transport passengers in transit and paratransit revenue service. It does not include Operations Supervisor vehicles that may transport passengers on an emergency or incidental basis. Revenue vehicles are any or all of the City-provided vehicles provided under this Contract for the provision of Glendale Beeline and Dial-A-Ride transit services.
Subcontractor: For purposes of this RFP and the subsequent contract, Subcontractor is synonymous with Subconsultant. A Subcontractor is an individual, partnership, corporation, or other entity hired by the Contractor to perform work under the Contractor’s direction.
Subscription Service: Paratransit trips to and from the exact origin and destination at the same time and day at least once a week. Subscription services do not require the passenger to call in their request for each trip, only to cancel for one or more days. 733 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 7
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
TAP: The regional electronic fare collection system "Transit Access Pass." TAP Bus Mobile Validators (BMV): TAP electronic fare collection equipment for TAP card holders paying passes, Stored Value, Access Services cards, and transfers.
Vehicle Revenue Hour (VRH): For the fixed route service, a vehicle revenue hour shall be defined as any sixty-minute increment of time, or portion thereof, that a vehicle is in revenue service, including layover/recovery time but excluding deadhead, training operators before revenue service, and road tests. For paratransit service, a vehicle revenue hour shall be defined as any sixty-minute increment of time, or portion thereof, that a vehicle is available for passenger transport within the established hours of service. A vehicle is available for passenger transport from when it arrives at its first pick-up address and ends when it has completed its last passenger drop-off. If the first scheduled pick-up is a no-show, the vehicle arrival time at that stop shall still be used for the computation of revenue vehicle hours; however, this rule shall not apply to late trip cancellations. Vehicle revenue hours are also known as "revenue vehicle hours" and "vehicle service hours."
Vehicle revenue hours for all services shall exclude meal breaks, service breaks, fueling time, mechanical breakdowns, and times a vehicle is down due to an accident. In addition, drive time to and from breaks and lunch breaks shall be excluded.
The City’s definition of Vehicle Revenue Hour is identical to those of the National Transit Database.
Vehicle Revenue Mile (VRM): The mileage incurred by a vehicle while operating a Vehicle Revenue Hour. The City’s definition of Vehicle Revenue Mile is identical to those of the National Transit Database.
Vendor: An individual or entity hired by the Contractor who sells, supplies, and/or delivers products, materials, or equipment.
B. INTRODUCTION AND SERVICE SUMMARY
B.1 Introduction
This RFP is issued by the City of Glendale to select, through a competitive process, a qualified firm to operate and maintain the Beeline fixed route and Dial-A-Ride (DAR) demand response transit services.
The selected firm must be well-managed and financially sound with demonstrated skills and technical ability— and high levels of customer service and satisfaction— to perform the services and fulfill the requirements outlined in this RFP.
A single contract will operate the Beeline and Dial-A-Ride services including operations, vehicle maintenance, facility maintenance, service administration and customer service functions at the City-owned Transit Facility located at 1759 Gardena Avenue, Glendale, California 91204. The contract term will commence on August 1, 2024, following the transition and start-up period, and will consist of a six-year base term and two (2) optional two-year terms. The first Contract Year will begin August 1, 2024 and end on June 30, 2025 and each subsequent Contract Year will begin on July 1 and end on June 30 of the following year. The last year of the initial six-year 734 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 8
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
service period will end on June 30, 2030. The total possible Contract Term will be for ten (10) years. Renewals are to be exercised at the discretion of the City only.
The contract objective is to retain a responsive contractor that performs with the highest degree of excellence in meeting the mobility needs of customers who use the Glendale public transportation services. The Contractor must 1) provide safe, efficient, and effective transit service, 2) provide state of the art maintenance of the City bus fleet, and 3) provide a professional and friendly ride experience for each passenger. Based on the selected proposal, the City intends to negotiate the most favorable combination of outcomes to meet the above objectives.
B.2 Schedule of Events
The following is a tentative schedule of events:
Issuance of Request for Proposals (RFP) October 12, 2023 Optional Pre-Proposal Meeting October 25, 2023
Optional Facility and Fleet Inspection October 28, 2023 Deadline for Receipt of Questions/Requests for Addenda November 8, 2023 Proposals Due December 20, 2023
Proposer Interviews and Discussions (if requested by City) January 22 – January 29, 2024 Anticipated Contract Award by City Council March 2024
Transition and Start-up Date July 2024
Service Commencement August 1, 2024
The City reserves the right to modify any of the dates shown above by written notice.
B.3 City of Glendale Background
The City of Glendale is a full-service city and the fourth largest in Los Angeles County. It encompasses 30.6 square miles and has a population of around 200,000. Incorporated in 1906, it operates as a Charter city with a Council-Manager form of government. Glendale prides itself on the quality of services it provides to the community and strives to fulfill its Mission Statement:
The City of Glendale delivers exceptional customer service through precision execution and innovative leadership.
The selected contractor must also embrace this philosophy and deliver safe, efficient and customer friendly transit services to the community.
B.4 Beeline Fixed Route Background
Glendale has operated the Beeline fixed route community circulator since 1984. There are nine (9) main routes that complement the regional transit services provided by Metro. One route has two branches off the main trunk line and provides an abbreviated Saturday route. The Beeline service area includes Glendale, La Canada Flintridge, and the Los Angeles County unincorporated communities of Montrose and La Crescenta. 735 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 9
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
The Beeline essentially provides a daytime-only service, operating from the early morning commute times to the end of the evening commute times. On weekdays, Beeline Route 1 and Routes 3 through 8 operate all day, and Routes 11 and 12 as peak-hour feeder shuttles to and from Metrolink service at the Glendale and Burbank train stations. All routes, except Routes 11 and 12, operate on Saturdays with slightly shorter hours of operation. Service on Sundays is limited to Routes 1 and 4. Service frequency is relatively consistent among routes. Beeline routes and schedules are included in Exhibit A.
The City of Glendale is responsible for managing its local system. The City is also responsible for the management of the service contract, maintenance of program records, and filing reports with regional, state, and federal agencies, including but not limited to the annual National Transit Database (NTD) report and numerous other applicable local, state and federal reporting requirements.
The information below provides a “snapshot” look at Beeline’s operating statistics for the last fiscal year submitted to the NTD, which ended June 30, 2023.
Table 1 – Beeline Operating Report Fiscal Year 2023
Total Vehicle Miles 918,041
Vehicle Revenue Miles 870,564
Total Vehicle Hours 103,011
Vehicle Revenue Hours 100,286
Passenger Trips 720,786
Passengers per VRH 7.19
Peak Vehicles/Spare 35/9
B.5 Dial-A-Ride Paratransit Background
Glendale Dial-A-Ride started serving Glendale residents in 1988, and the service was extended to serve La Canada Flintridge and the unincorporated County areas of La Crescenta and Montrose in 1996. Dial-A-Ride is a curb-to-curb reservation-based transportation service available to residents at least 65 years of age or persons with disabilities of any age. Additional information can be found in Exhibit B.
Residents from Glendale, La Canada Flintridge, La Crescenta, and Montrose may travel anywhere within the geographical service area. In addition, La Canada-Flintridge residents may travel to select locations in Altadena and Pasadena west of Lake Avenue and north of California Boulevard. A map of the service area is shown in Exhibit C.
The DAR system provides a daytime only service, operating Weekdays from 8:00 AM to 6:00 PM. Weekend service is offered on Saturdays from 9:00 AM to 4:00 PM and Sundays from 9:00 AM to 2:00 PM. The City may vary its span of Dial-A-Ride service to be provided under this Contract.
The current DAR fare is $1.50 for each one-way trip. The fare is waived for patrons traveling to a nutritional meal site and Club Maple, and for La Canada Flintridge residents.
The City of Glendale is responsible for the management of the service contract, all policy decisions and activities relative to Dial-A-Ride. The City is also responsible for maintenance of 736 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 10
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
program records and filing reports with regional, state, and federal agencies, including the annual National Transit Database (NTD) report and numerous other applicable local, state and federal reporting requirements.
The Contractor is responsible for operating service, vehicle maintenance, all scheduled software, non-revenue vehicles, and other equipment required to provide the service to the City of Glendale.
The following provides a 'snapshot' look at the Dial-A-Ride service for three completed fiscal years (FY20, FY21, FY 22, and FY 23) submitted to the NTD:
Table 2 – Dial-A-Ride Operating Information, Fiscal Years 2020-2023 FY 2020 FY 2021 FY 2022 FY 2023
Total Vehicle Miles 128,638 90,625 102,368 114,811
Vehicle Revenue Miles 109,612 78,629 89,874 100,956
Total Vehicle Hours 10,655 9,602 9,836 10,728
Vehicle Revenue Hours 9,443 8,248 8,668 9,491
Passenger Trips 30,710 13,875 16,994 20,976
Passengers (including PCAs) 33,158 14,524 17,839 23,068 Trips per Vehicle Revenue Hour 3.3 1.7 2.0 2.2
Peak Vehicles/Spares 6/4 6/4 6/4 6/4
Wheelchair/Lift Boarding 839 331 539 1,464
Table 3 – Number of Trips Generated in Each Service Area FY 2020 FY 2021 FY 2022 FY 2023
Glendale 25,995 11,958 14,677 18,167
La Canada Flintridge 2,102 1,283 1,825 1,500
Los Angeles County 2,613 634 489 1,309
Key Trip Generators and Special Paratransit Services
• Adult Recreation Center: 201 E. Colorado Street, Glendale 91205 • Sparr Heights Center: 1613 Glencoe Way, Glendale 91208 • Pacific Community Center: 501 S. Pacific Avenue, Glendale 91204 These three centers offer nutritional meals to seniors. The majority of trips to these locations are scheduled around lunch mealtimes. The City does not charge Dial-A-Ride patrons if they are traveling to or from a nutritional meal site.
• Club Maple: Maple Park Community Center, 820 East Maple Avenue, Glendale, CA 91205 The City offers the Club Maple program to developmentally disabled adults. Events include recreation, crafts, and other social activities. Club Maple meets every Thursday from 5:30 PM to 8:00 PM. The Dial-A-Ride service offers trips to and from Club Maple. The Contractor must provide return trips at 8:00 PM for all Club Maple participants using Dial-A-Ride. This is the only service which extends beyond the normal operating hours of the Dial-A-Ride service. 737 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 11
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
B.6 City Owned Revenue Vehicles
The City of Glendale will furnish the city-owned revenue vehicles as specified in the fleet list, Exhibit D. A vehicle replacement schedule is provided for information only. The Contractor shall use and operate all City vehicles and equipment only per the terms and provisions of the RFP and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations and solely to provide transit services on behalf of the City.
Vehicle titles and equipment are registered in the name of the City and shall remain the sole property of the City of Glendale. The Contractor shall not allow any vehicles to become subject to lien, charge, or encumbrance. The City shall retain duplicate sets of keys for all vehicles. The City shall have access to all Glendale vehicles at the City facility in the event of an emergency after hours.
The Contractor shall maintain all in-service and spare vehicles provided as part of this project.
The Contractor shall require that due care is taken in operating and maintaining the vehicles to ensure that the effective vehicle life is maximized, and that minimum required vehicle availability and road performance are attained.
The City will pay for or reimburse the Contractor for actual fuel (gasoline and CNG) costs and for utility charges for battery-electric bus charging incurred for all revenue service vehicles. The City does not supply non-revenue vehicles or their fuel.
Beeline Fixed Route
The current Beeline fleet is CNG fueled. The City is committed to transitioning to a zeroemission transit fleet and by 2030, will be mandated to purchase only zero-emission electric vehicles. For this Contract, any additional or replacement Beeline vehicles will be electricpowered. The Cities of Glendale and La Canada Flintridge are responsible for the scheduled replacement of the forty-four (44) Beeline revenue vehicles.
Dial-A-Ride Paratransit
The current Dial-A-Ride fleet is gasoline fueled. The City anticipates purchasing both gasoline and zero-emission electric replacement vehicles. The City currently provides three low-floor cutaways, five minivans, and two vans for its Dial-A-Ride services, with six used in peak weekday service. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring enough vehicles are available daily to meet the Dial-A-Ride service needs. Dial-A-Ride utilizes federally funded vehicles; therefore, the selected Contractor must meet all federal, state, and local operations, maintenance, and administrative reporting requirements.
B.7 City Owned Equipment and Facility
The City will furnish the city-owned equipment as specified in the equipment list, Exhibit E. As mentioned above, all replacement Beeline and LCF shuttle buses will be battery-electric buses.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the use, maintenance, and safekeeping of all Cityowned equipment. Repair of such equipment shall be the Contractor's responsibility unless City agrees that the equipment has met or exceeded its reasonable useful life, in which case City may bear the cost of replacement at its discretion.
738 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 12
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
At the end of this Contract or any extensions thereof, the Contractor shall return all Cityprovided vehicles and equipment in operable condition with no deferred maintenance, normal wear and tear excepted.
The Contractor is also responsible for the maintenance of the City-owned Beeline Maintenance Facility including landscaping and maintaining the facility assets as noted in Section D.5.
C. INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS
C.1 Restrictions on Lobbying and Contacts
Proposer’s sole contact during the RFP, proposal and awards process is Martha D’Andrea, Transit Manager, City of Glendale.
During the period beginning on the date of the issuance of the RFP and ending on the date of contract award to a Proposer, no person (or entity) submitting a proposal in response to this RFP, nor any officer, employee, representative, agent, or Contractor representing such a person (or entity) shall contact through any means or engage in any discussion concerning the award of the Contract with any member of the City Council of the City of Glendale or his or her personal staff, or with any candidate for election to the City Council of the City of Glendale. Any such contact shall be grounds for the disqualification of the proposal.
During the period beginning on the date of the issuance of this RFP and ending on the day after a contract is awarded to a Proposer, each person or entity described in the previous paragraph shall limit his or her communication with City staff to the written clarification and addendum process described in Section C.28, and interviews or discussions pursuant to evaluation and selection process described in Section F.5. At no time may any Proposer have any communication with a member of the City’s Evaluation Committee, other than communication initiated by such member during interviews.
Nothing herein shall be construed to limit or restrict any person or entity from communicating with the City Council in writing or at a meeting of the Council noticed under the Ralph M. Brown Act, Government Code section 54950 et seq., provided such communication is after the public release of the staff report to the Council recommending a proposer.
C.2 Optional Pre-Proposal Meeting
A virtual pre-proposal meeting is scheduled as designated in the Schedule of Events to enable prospective Proposers to clarify additional details considered pertinent for their evaluation prior to the proposal submittal date. Proposer attendance is optional. Interested parties may join at:
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-teams/join-a-meeting Meeting ID: 264 342 293 952
Passcode: ZtBfhu
Or call in (audio only)
+1 323-886-7427,,61017390# United States, Los Angeles
Phone Conference ID: 610 173 90#
739 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 13
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
C.3 Optional Facility and Fleet Inspection Meeting
An optional facility and fleet inspection is scheduled as designated in the Schedule of Events.
This is an opportunity to view the facility and make cursory inspections of the City-owned vehicles and equipment. The current contractor will provide access to a small number of Revenue Vehicles that are fully representative of the fleet promptly at 10:00 AM. Late arrivals will not be accommodated. The inspection will conclude by 11:30 AM. The meeting will be held at the Beeline Transit Facility, 1759 Gardena Avenue, Glendale, CA 91204. Visitor parking is available on-site with additional parking on-street and at the Glendale Transportation Center parking lot. Interested parties wanting to attend must RSVP to [email protected] by 4:00 PM the day before the inspection to gain admittance.
C.4 Disclaimers
The City reserves the right to extend the time allotted for the RFP submittal, to conduct interviews, and to request a best and final offer, should the City deem that it is in its best interest to do so.
This RFP does not commit the City to award a contract. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all RFPs received as a result of this request, to negotiate with any qualified firm, or to cancel this RFP in part or in its entirety. The City may require the selected firm to participate in negotiations and to submit such technical, price, or other revisions of their proposals as may result from negotiations.
Any costs incurred by the Proposer in responding to this Request for Proposals shall be the Proposer’s sole expense and will not be reimbursed by the City.
C.5 Limitations
All reports and pertinent data or materials provided in the RFP process shall be the sole property of the City of Glendale and may not be used or reproduced in any form without the explicit written permission of the City.
The Proposer should expect to have access to only the public records and files of local government agencies in preparing the proposal or reports. City staff assistance should not be anticipated by the Proposer in the preparation of responses to this RFP.
C.6 Proposal Submission
This RFP is issued by the City of Glendale to select, through a competitive process, a firm to operate and maintain the City’s transit services. This RFP is comprised of the following:
• Part A: Definitions and Acronyms
• Part B: Introduction and Service Summary
• Part C: Instructions to Proposers
• Part D: Scope of Work
• Part E: Liquidated Damages
• Part F: Proposal Submission Requirements
740 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 14
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
To be accepted and considered, Proposer must submit one (1) unbound original, five (5) bound copies in three-ring binders, and two (2) USBs containing electronic files of the completed proposal and all necessary requested documents, which must be enclosed in a sealed package.
The outside of the submitted package must be marked "Request For Proposals For Operation and Maintenance of Fixed Route and Dial-A-Ride Services 2024." Proposals are to be submitted to:
City of Glendale
Public Works Administration
633 E. Broadway, Room 209
Glendale, CA 91206-4388
Attn: Yazdan T. Emrani, P.E.
Director of Public Works
By 4:00 P.M. on December 20, 2023.
Proposals must include all forms (Forms A – P, Exhibit I Forms 1-2 or 3) and information required in the Statement of Work specifications. All documentation of unit pricing or other cost breakdowns as outlined in this proposal must be submitted to support the total proposal price.
No oral, electronic, facsimile, or telephone proposals or modifications will be considered. Late proposals, as well as any modifications, will not be accepted after the hour and date specified and will be returned unopened. The City will not be responsible for proposals not properly marked and delivered.
C.7 Default
In case of default by the contractor of any of the conditions of this proposal or contract resulting from this proposal, the contractor agrees that the City may procure the articles or services from other sources and may deduct from the unpaid balance due the contractor, or collect against the bond or surety, or may invoice the contractor for excess costs so paid, and prices paid by the City shall be considered the prevailing market price at the time such purchase is made.
C.8 Assignment
No assignment by the contractor of contract or any part hereof, or of funds to be received hereunder, is binding upon the City unless the City gave written consent before such assignment.
C.9 Subcontractors
The Proposer must list any subcontractors that will be used, the work to be performed by them, and total number of hours or percentage of time they will spend on the project. 741 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 15
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
C.10 Employees of Prior Operator
The Contractor shall be subject to and comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Sections 1070-1074 regarding retention of employees of the prior contractor and the provision of employee information in a future transition.
Nothing in this Section shall be construed as requiring the Contractor to recognize any union which represented the workforce of the prior contractor (except as may otherwise be required by applicable law); or requiring the Contractor to assume or otherwise be bound by the terms and conditions of any collective bargaining agreement between that prior service provider and any union.
Proposers are encouraged to honor the wages and benefits for those employees participating in the current collective bargaining agreement. Contractor information in compliance with California Labor Code Sections 1070-1074 and the current collective bargaining agreement is provided in Exhibit F.
C.11 Termination
The City may terminate any service or requirement contract, with or without cause, by providing thirty (30) days written notice. The precise terms of any such termination are contained in the draft contract with this RFP.
C.12 Indemnification
At its expense, a Proposer agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the City and its officers, agents, employees, and representatives from and against any and all liability, suits, actions, proceedings, judgments, claims, demands, liens, losses, damages, costs, and expenses (including attorneys’ fees, litigation, arbitration, mediation, appeal expenses) if a dispute, lawsuit, or other proceeding arises out of any one or more of the following:
• A Proposer’s submitting the Proposal;
• The City’s accepting a Proposer’s Proposal; or
• The City’s awarding a Contract to a Proposer in compliance with this RFP, or state, federal, or local laws.
C.13 Agreement
The Proposer to whom the Agreement is awarded shall be required to enter into a written Agreement with the City of Glendale in a form approved by the City Attorney. The RFP, or any part thereof, and the Proposer's responses, will be incorporated into and made a part of the final Agreement; however, City reserves the right to further negotiate the terms and conditions of the Agreement with the selected Proposer.
Neither the Agreement nor any interest herein nor claim hereunder may be assigned by Contractor, either voluntarily or by operation of law, nor may the Agreement be subcontracted by Proposer without the prior written consent of City. Penalty or possible termination may result for failing to procure written approval from the City. No such consent shall be deemed to relieve Proposer of its obligations to comply fully with the requirements hereof. 742 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 16
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
A draft City of Glendale contract titled, General Services Agreement (GSA) is shown in Exhibit G.
Before any services can commence, the selected Proposer will be required to execute the Contract, which is a standard form of agreement. To facilitate the Project’s smooth and timely implementation, Proposers responding to this RFP must review all the terms and conditions of the Contract, including, but not limited to, provisions relating to insurance, indemnity, and termination.
Table of Exceptions
The City’s policy is that the Contract be accepted as is. By submitting a Proposal to the City in response to this RFP, each Proposer is deemed to have provided its approval to theContract, accepting it without qualification. If a Proposer seeks limited modification of the contract, the Proposer must identify the proposed changes using the Table of Exceptions.
Proposer must use the provided Form M, “Table of Exceptions” to state whether its proposal does or does not fully comply with the requirements as defined in this RFP and will provide a detailed list of exceptions to the Scope of Services, Sample General Services Agreement, or any other requirements of the RFP, including all exhibits, forms, and appendices. The exceptions list will be in table form and identify the page, section number, provision and exception, non-conformance and/or substitute language proposed. Failure to identify any items of non-compliance will result in the City assuming compliance. Changes to the Sample General Services Agreement may not be considered or negotiated if not submitted as part of the proposal.
The City, at its sole discretion, may modify or reject any exception or proposed change. The exceptions list will be taken into consideration when evaluating the section that is most applicable to the exception listed.
The City reserves the right to negotiate further the terms and conditions of the Contract. The Proposer that the City Council selects must cooperate with the City in good faith to negotiate, sign, and deliver the final Contract. The City will draft the Contract and may require the selected Proposer to attend one or more Contract negotiation conferences to discuss possible:
• Revisions to the Contract’s service-related terms, conditions, requirements, specifications, or minimum performance standards, other than the insurance and the indemnity provisions; and
• Additions to the Contract, by the parties’ mutual agreement, or as a City Ordinance or Resolution, the City’s Charter or Municipal Code, or any other law that may be required.
At any time, and for any reason, if contract negotiations with the selected Proposer fail to progress, to the City’s reasonable satisfaction, the City reserves the right to not only end negotiations with the selected Proposer, but also cancel the award and reject the Proposal. At its discretion, the City may then: reopen the proposal process; choose fromamong the remaining, if any, qualified proposers; reissue the RFP; negotiate directly withany firm for services; or choose not to contract for services. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after the City issues the Notice of Intent to Award Contract, or within any extension that the City may allow, the selected Proposer must submit to the City all of the following items:
• Three (3) originals of the Contract, properly signed by the Proposer. • Insurance certificates and additional insured endorsements that fully conform tothe Contract’s requirements.
743 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 17
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
• Performance bond that fully conforms to the Contract’s requirements and is acceptable to City.
After the City receives the signed Contract, performance bond and insurance documents, the City Attorney’soffice will review the Contract. Additionally, the City Attorney’s office or the City’s Risk and Insurance Services Manager will review the required insurance. If the selected Proposer has not requested changes to any terms of the Contract, and if the insurance and the bond conform to the Contract’s requirements, the City will sign the Contract and return an original of the Contract to the Proposer.
C.14 Renewal of Agreement
Agreements entered into pursuant to this Request for Proposal may be renewed in accordance with the terms of the contract. If not otherwise stated, the contract may be renewed if the new pricing of the contract does not increase more than the increase in the Consumer Price Index - All Urban Consumers, Los Angeles Area and prevailing wage, if applicable, for the same time period since the last contracted price. If not renewed prior to the anniversary date, the contract may continue on a month-to-month basis until renewed or awarded to a new Contractor.
C.15 Bonds
Within ten (10) calendar days after notice of selection, the successful Contractor will be required to furnish, at Contractor's own expense (not as a cost incurred in the contract), a Performance Bond, or other security acceptable to the City of Glendale, in the amount of twenty-five percent (25%) of the estimated first year expense, as a guarantee of good faith on behalf of the Proposer that the terms of the contract will remain in full force and effect during the full term of the contract between the Contractor and the City of Glendale. This performance bond must remain in full force and effect during the full term of the contract and any extensions. A draft of the City Performance Bond is attached as Exhibit M.
C.16 Insurance
Before commencing performance under the Agreement, and at all other times the Agreement is effective, Contractor will procure and maintain the required types of insurance with coverage limits complying, at a minimum, with the limits set forth in the Sample Draft General Services Agreement (GSA), Exhibit G, [GSA Exhibit F - Insurance Requirements]. Failure to procure and continuously maintain such coverage may result in termination of this agreement.
C.17 Proposal Rejection
The City may reject the proposal of any proposer who has previously failed to perform properly, or complete on time, contracts of a similar nature, or to reject the proposal of a proposer who is not in a position to perform such a contract satisfactorily. The City may reject the proposal of any proposer who is in default of the payment of taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City of Glendale. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and to waive any informality in any proposal.
Failure to meet the requirements of the Request for Proposals will be cause for rejection of the proposal. The City may reject the proposal if it is incomplete, contains irregularities of 744 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 18
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
any kind, or is offered conditionally. The City reserves the right to reject any and all proposals without cause.
C.18 Errors and Omissions
Proposer and/or the Contractor shall not be allowed to take advantage of any errors in or omissions from the Request for Proposals. Full instructions will be given if such error or omission is discovered and called to the attention of the City in a timely manner.
C.19 Contract Pricing
Except as otherwise provided, price proposals must remain consistent throughout the term of the contract. The City does not pay “surcharges” of any type unless identified in the response to the proposal. All costs will be included in the pricing provided to the City.
C.20 Non-Appropriation of Funds
The City’s obligation is payable only and solely from funds appropriated for the purpose of this agreement. All funds for payment after June 30 of the current fiscal year are subject to City’s legislative appropriation for this purpose. In the event the governing body appropriating funds does not allocate sufficient funds for the next succeeding fiscal year’s payments, then the affected deliveries/services may be (1) terminated without penalty in their entirety, or (2) reduced in accordance with available funding as deemed necessary by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor in writing of any such non-allocation of funds at the earliest possible date.
C.21 Compliance with Laws
Contractor warrants that it will comply with all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to its performance under this Contract, including, without limitation, the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, the Equal Employment Opportunity Clause prescribed by Executive Order 11246 dated September 24, 1965 as amended, the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (or latest revision), the State of California Safety Orders, and any rules, regulations or orders issued or promulgated under such Acts and Orders. Contractor shall indemnify and save and hold City from and against any and all claims, damages, demands, costs and losses which the City may suffer in the event that Contractor fails to comply with said Act, Order, rules, regulations or orders. Any clause required by any law, ordinance, rule or regulation to be included in a contract of the type evidenced by this document shall be deemed to be incorporated herein.
C.22 Federal Requirements
Each Proposer shall submit all components of the Federal Requirements outlined in Exhibit H, Federal Contract Clauses.
C.23 Race Conscious Disadvantaged Business Enterprises
In conformance with title 49 CFR Part 26, the City of Glendale has established a project specific goal of 3.6% for Race Conscious Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (RC-DBEs). The Proposer is required to meet this goal or demonstrate Good Faith Efforts as a condition of the award of this Contract. Proposer shall complete and submit the following forms in Exhibit I, RC745 of 1291 Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 19
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
DBE Instructions (Metro Subrecipients): Form 1, “Bidders List” and Form 2, “Local Agency Proposer RC-DBE Commitment” at the time of proposal submittal. Form 3, “RC-DBE Information - Good Faith Efforts” is required if the Proposer is unable to meet the established DBE project specific goal and is to be submitted in a sealed envelope with the proposal. [Forms 1-4 are contained in Exhibit I to this RFP.]
The City, as a recipient of federal financial assistance, is required to implement the Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority’s (Metro’s) Disadvantaged Business Program in accordance with federal regulation 49 CFR Part 26 issued by the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT). Contractor shall furnish all documentation satisfactory to City that the work committed to RC-DBE’s was actually performed by RC-DBE’s. Requests for progress payments shall include a summary of payments actually made to RC-DBE’s during the invoice period (Form 4), which includes a total of all payments made to all subcontractors under this Contract. RC-DBE participation shall be credited toward the overall RC-DBE goal only when payments are actually made to the RC-DBE firms. Contractor shall be prepared to submit with its monthly report, Form 4.
As there is a RC-DBE goal on this Contract, the Proposer, in order to be considered responsible and responsive, must meet the contract specific RC-DBE goal identified or make Good Faith Efforts to meet the goal established for the Contract. If the goal is not met, the Proposer must document adequate Good Faith Efforts. Only RC-DBE firms certified through the CUCP will be counted towards the contract. Please refer to Exhibit I to this RFP for further information and instructions.
Contractor shall carry out all applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of this DOT-assisted contract. Failure by Contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this Contract, which may result in the termination of this Contract or such other remedy, as City may deem appropriate.
C.24 Safety
Contractor agrees to comply with the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (or latest revision), the State of California Safety Orders, and regulations issued thereunder, and certifies that all items furnished under this proposal will conform and comply with the indemnity and hold harmless clause for all damages assessed against buyer as a result of suppliers failure to comply with the Act and the standards issued thereunder and for the failure of the items furnished under this order to so comply.
C.25 Declared Emergency Operation
In the event of a declared emergency by the City, the Contractor shall deploy vehicles in a manner described by the City or, should the City be unavailable, as directed by the Incident Commander.
The City shall be obligated to compensate the Contractor, during such period of declared emergency, for services which significantly exceed the normal expense of operating services under this Agreement.
C.26 Gratuities
The City may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed under this agreement, if it is found that gratuities in the form of entertainment, gifts, or 746 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 20
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
otherwise were offered or given by the Contractor, or any agent or representative of the Contractor, to any officer or employee of the City with a view toward securing an agreement or securing favorable treatment with respect to the award or amending, or the making of any determinations with respect to the performance of such agreement; provided, that the existence of the facts upon which the City makes findings shall be in issue and may be reviewed in any competent court. In the event of such termination, the City shall be entitled to pursue the same remedies against the Contractor as the City could pursue in the event of default by the Contractor.
C.27 Invoices
The Contractor will submit a detailed service invoice to the City by the fifteenth (15th) day of each month for service performed the previous month. The City will pay the Contractor within forty-five (45) working days from the date of submission, provided that the invoice is complete and contains all necessary backup information, data, reports and other required documents. For June service performed, the Contractor must submit the invoice and all necessary required backup documents by July 10th to accommodate the City’s fiscal year end.
The Contractor will deduct from the invoice any liquidated damage payments due, based upon City’s determination of performance in relation to the liquidated damage clauses of the Agreement. The Contractor will also deduct from the invoice amount any credits and discounts owed to the City. All fares collected by the Contractor during the billing period will be provided to the City by electronic fund transfer or check. Fare collection documentation such as the bank statement will be provided with the invoice as part of the necessary backup documents.
Invoices must be submitted electronically on the City’s Vendor Invoice Submittal webpage:
https://www.glendaleca.gov/government/departments/finance/accounts-payable/invoicesubmittal Invoices will reflect the purchase order number and goods or service delivered in accordance with the terms of the contract. Invoice processing begins on receipt of the material or invoice, whichever is later.
C.28 Requests for Clarification/Addendum
A Proposer may submit to the City a written request by e-mail to [email protected] for an interpretation or clarification of, or addendum to this RFP. Any such written request must be received by the City no later than the date designated in the Schedule of Events.
The City will review and prepare a written response to each request made pursuant to this section. The City’s written determination will be posted on the City website, e-mailed or otherwise furnished to all prospective Proposers by the date designated in the Schedule of Events.
The City will issue Addenda in writing. A copy of each Addendum (if any) will be posted on the City’s website. It is the proposer’s responsibility to check the City’s web site for any Addenda and to ensure that it has received the said Addenda. Each proposer must provide a signed acknowledgement confirming receipt of all issued Addenda to this RFP, as part of their proposal submittal.
747 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 21
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
At any time before the proposal deadline, the City may issue Addenda withdrawing the RFP or postponing the Proposal Deadline. However, if any Addendum results in material change to this RFP, or the proposed Agreement, or both, the City will extend the Proposal Deadline by not less than seventy-two (72) hours. The City will treat transmittal of Addenda to potential Contractor by U.S. mail, or e-mail as sufficient notice of thechanges made by the City.
The City reserves the right to make modifications or issue addenda to this RFP. If the City determines it is appropriate to revise any portion of this RFP, either at the request of a Proposer or upon the City’s own initiative, the City will issue, and make available to all prospective Proposers, a written addendum setting forth this revision. The Proposer shall acknowledge receipt of addenda by written notice thereof returned to the City. Where addenda require changes in the work to be performed under the Agreement, the date set for receipt of proposals may be postponed by such number of days as the City determines appropriate in order to enable prospective Proposers to revise proposals.
The City is not bound by any oral interpretations, clarifications, or changes made to this RFP by any City staff member. Any clarification or change to the RFP must be provided in writing pursuant of this section.
C.29 Acceptance of Proposals
Each proposal shall be submitted with the understanding that it is subject to the evaluation procedure set forth in Section F.5 and to negotiation at the option of the City. Upon acceptance in writing by the City of the final offer to furnish any and all of the services described herein, the parties shall promptly execute the final contract documents. The written Agreement shall bind the Proposer to furnish, deliver, maintain, operate or compensate in accordance with conditions of said accepted proposal and this Request for Proposals, as negotiated. The City reserves the right to make the award under this RFP based upon the initial proposals submitted. The City has the right to reject any and all proposals and to waive any informality in any proposal.
C.30 Required Qualifications
The selected contractor must meet all the qualifications for the firm and individual team members described in this RFP. At a minimum, the successful contractor will have multi-year experience operating the types of services described in the RFP and a proven track record of implementing all the technical requirements of the RFP.
C.31 Protests
Protests regarding any aspect of this Request for Proposals, the solicitation process, or the proposed award of a contract must be submitted in accordance with the following procedures.
1. Types of Protests
There are three basic types of protests, based on the time in the procurement cycle when they occur. Differences in the protest process between these three types, if any, are noted.
a. Solicitation Phase Protest is received prior to the proposal due date. A Solicitation Phase Protest must be received by the City prior to the published time and date for receipt of proposals or bids following the content and 748 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 22
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
submission procedures specified herein. Depending upon when the protest is received and the agency’s review, the City may or may not delay the bid opening or proposal due date.
b. Pre-award Protest is a protest against making an award and is received after receipt of proposals or bids, but before award of a contract. A Pre-award Protest must be submitted to the City following the content and submission procedures specified herein within three (3) working days of the date the protester learned or should have learned of the basis of appeal. Pre-award Protests must be received by the City prior to the agency’s formal action on the contract award. Depending upon when the protest is received and the agency’s review, the City may or may not delay the contract award.
c. Post-award Protest is received after award of a contract. A Post-award Protest must be submitted to the City following the content and submission procedures specified herein within five (5) working days of the date the protester learned or should have learned of the basis of appeal.
2. Content and Submission of Protests
Protests must contain the following information:
• Description of the solicitation or contract and number; • Name of protestor with address, contact individual, phone numbers, and email addresses;
• Statement of the grounds for protest; and
• Statement of the proposed relief or remedy.
Protests must be submitted in writing via email to [email protected] or via USPS, FedEx or other package delivery service, or hand-delivered to:
City of Glendale
Public Works Administration
633 E. Broadway, Room 209
Glendale, CA 91206-4388
Attention: Yazdan T. Emrani, P.E.
Director of Public Works
3. Evaluation and Decision on Protest
Upon receipt of a protest, the City of Glendale will review the grounds for the protest and within ten (10) working days provide a written response addressing in detail each substantive issue raised in the protest. A copy of the protest and the City’s decision will be transmitted to the protester and to each firm or individual who has received a copy of the RFP or solicitation. The Transit Manager for the City of Glendale is the responsible official for evaluation of protests and has the authority to make the final determination in matters of protest. With the exception of a reconsideration as noted below or direction by FTA, the decision of the City of Glendale will be final.
Should material information become available subsequent to the Manager’s decision on a protest or the protester believes that an error has been made of law or regulation, the protester may request reconsideration of that decision by formal notice to the Manager within five (5) working days of the date of the original protest decision. 749 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 23
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
C.32 Identifying Proprietary Information; Public Records Act A Proposer must identify and list in Form L, Public Records Exempt Information, all copyrighted material, trade secrets, or other proprietary information (“protectable documents”) that the Proposer included in its Proposal, which Proposer believes should be exempt from disclosure under California’s Public Records Act, Government Code Section 6250, et seq.
By listing the documents, the Proposer agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold harmlessthe City and its officers, agents, employees, and representatives from and against any action, claim, lawsuit, or proceeding, including costs and expenses, arising out of or connected with the City’s refusal to disclose the protectable documents to any party making a request for those items.
The City will treat any Proposer, who fails to identify documents that the Proposer believes should be exempt from disclosure, as having waived its right to an exemptionfrom disclosure, as the Public Records Act provides.
All Proposals and other material submitted become the property of the City and may bereturned only at the City’s option. The City reserves the right to use any ideas presented in any response to the RFP. Selection or rejection of the Proposal does not affect this right.
D. SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for Beeline fixed route, Dial-A-Ride, and any optional services as directed by City. The Contractor shall manage service following the guidelines and parameters established herein and the attachments hereto. The omission of a duty or responsibility below shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to perform such duty or accept such responsibility so long as it is usual, customary, and generally accepted within the public transportation industry as an integral element of operating a fixed route and paratransit service. All aspects of the RFP and Scope of Work will be incorporated into the service operator’s contract by reference.
The Contractor shall coordinate, manage, and control all activities necessary to perform the Scope of Work and carry out its responsibilities under the Agreement, which include, but are not limited to, the following: maintaining all revenue vehicles and the City provided operations and maintenance facility; providing any support vehicles needed; providing operators, mechanics, technicians, and all other project personnel; training all personnel as necessary for their duties; developing and implementing administrative procedures, providing data, and financial controls, records, and reporting; participating in service planning; and developing methods to improve effectiveness and maximize service efficiency.
Utilizing the City-furnished revenue vehicles, facility, and equipment specified herein, the Contractor shall provide all other equipment, supplies, insurance, services, and personnel necessary to operate Beeline and Dial-A-Ride service unless specifically identified in this document.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of all equipment and supplies necessary for performance of services under the Agreement (other than equipment specifically identified as provided by City), as well as for the cost of maintaining, repairing, and replacing such equipment, parts and supplies and for maintaining and repairing the revenue vehicles. Major vehicle components are limited to engines, transmissions, and differentials or other major 750 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 24
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
mechanical components as determined by the City will be repaired or replaced at City cost as a direct pass through as long as all vehicles have received appropriate on time preventive maintenance as documented in the third-party vehicle inspections.
In operating services, emphasis will be placed on providing outstanding customer service to passengers, conducting adequate training, implementation of policies designed to minimize employee turnover and maximize on-time performance, providing well maintained and mechanically safe vehicles, and providing readily available spare vehicles in an expeditious manner in the event of breakdowns and other service-related items that affect the reliability of service and otherwise carrying out all contractual obligations in a safe and reliable manner.
D.1 General Requirements
D.1.1 Service Start Up
Service will commence on August 1, 2024, or such other date specified by City, whichever is later.
Any start-up costs to be paid by the City must be documented in an invoice that clearly identifies agreed to start-up costs. For approved equipment purchases, a copy of the supplier’s invoice identifying make, model and serial number must accompany Contractor’s invoice. All equipment purchased by the Contractor and paid for by the City for start-up becomes property of the City.
As part of the transition plan, the City will have a third party inspection of the fleet. The current contractor will be responsible for repairing all “A” and “B” defects or negotiating those repairs with the next contractor. Both contractors as well as the City will be present for the inspection.
This inspection will provide the “base” for the new contract.
The Contractor will be staffed and able to perform all contractual obligations by service commencement.
The Contractor is subject to liquidated damages for delay in service start-up.
D.1.2 Adherence to City Requirements
As an integral part of providing fixed route and DAR services, the Contractor shall at all times:
• Comply with all City service standards and all provisions outlined in this RFP, • Take all steps necessary to ensure the safety and reasonable comfort, and convenience of the public utilizing these services,
• Charge only such fares as may be directed by the City, • Comply with all policies, practices, procedures, terms, and conditions as may be directed by the City concerning the collection, security for, and disposition of fares, and any other service revenues,
• Comply with all policies, practices, procedures, terms, and conditions as may be directed by the City about matters such as tickets, passes, coupons, transfers, transfer systems, interconnections between different modes of transportation, and interconnections between different transportation agencies,
• Comply with all policies, practices, procedures, terms, and conditions as may be directed by the City concerning the availability and distribution of printed material related to the 751 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 25
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
fixed route, DAR, and related transportation services, including distribution of such printed materials on vehicles or by mail,
• Conduct such services and its business and operations as they relate to such services in a safe, sound, economical, and efficient manner and comply with all City efforts to improve efficiency,
• Assure that all Contractor personnel are responsible for knowledge of both the fixed route and DAR transit services and Metro services within the service area, • Maintain a courteous attitude, answering to the best of their ability any questions from the public regarding service provision. Customer service training must include a focus on passenger relations, and
• Comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law.
D.1.3 Personnel and Staffing Levels
The Contractor shall provide the necessary management, administrative, operations, maintenance, and customer service personnel with expertise to customary industry standards, ensuring the professional and efficient operation of the fixed route and DAR services. The Contractor shall manage services in accordance with the guidelines and parameters established herein. The Contractor's personnel policies will be in conformance with local, state and federal and laws. The City reserves the right to approve the final staffing plan submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor will provide the City with an updated staffing plan per format approved by the City at the beginning of each quarter and as requested.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the satisfactory work performance of all employees providing service. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for payment of all employees and/or subcontractor’s wages and benefits. Without any additional expense to the City, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of employee liability, worker’s compensation, unemployment insurance, and social security. The Contractor shall hold City harmless from any liability, damages, claims, costs, and expenses of any nature arising from alleged violations of personnel practices. The Contractor shall exercise complete management and sole control of its employee workforce in the performance of the operation. The City reserves the sole right to require the removal of the Contractor’s employee from the service or from City property.
D.1.4 Key Personnel
As the full-time management of the transit services and day-to-day operations shall be vested in the Contractor, the Contractor shall assign individuals who show by decision and action to be competent in all aspects of fixed route and DAR services. The General Manager, Assistant General Manager, Operations Manager, Safety and Training Manager, and Maintenance Manager or equivalent are defined as Key Personnel and will be individually approved in writing by the City before assuming these positions. These individuals are of critical importance to a successful service operation and are a significant component of the contractor selection process. All Key Personnel must be assigned solely to this Agreement and may not be reassigned to any other operation internally or to an associated firm of contractor without prior written approval of the City. This paragraph shall not apply in the event said individuals either voluntarily or involuntarily terminate employment with Contractor.
Should the services of these Key Personnel become no longer available to the Contractor, the resume and qualifications of the proposed replacement shall be submitted to the City or its 752 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 26
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
representative for approval as soon as possible, but in no event later than ten (10) working days before the departure of the incumbent Key Personnel, unless Contractor is not provided with such notice by the departing employee. The City or its representative shall respond to the Contractor within five (5) working days following receipt of these qualifications concerning the candidate and conduct an interview with the candidate before the City issues a written approval or rejection of the proposed Key Personnel replacement.
The City may, at its sole discretion, accept or reject any individual proposed by the Contractor both during the contract startup and for any replacement during the life of this contract. The City may also, at its sole option, require the replacement of any key personnel.
Should the General Manager, Assistant General Manager, Operations Manager, Safety and Training Manager, or Maintenance Manager remain unfilled for 30 days or more, the City may assess liquidated damages and deduct the wages and benefits of the Key Personnel without prior approval by the City. It may also be subject to other remedies up to and including termination of the Agreement.
The Contractor is subject to liquidated damages for making changes to Key Personnel without prior written approval by the City and may also be subject to other remedies up to and including termination of the Agreement.
D.1.5 Administrative Personnel
There must be adequate administrative staffing to conduct all daily operations, investigate complaints or service requests, assure compliance with contract specifications and assure quality control of systems and collected and reported data.
General Manager
The Contractor must provide adequate project leadership and staff supervision to assure a quality transit program. The General Manager shall oversee the proper operation of services under this Agreement and overall performance of the Scope of Work. In addition, the General Manager shall work cooperatively with the City’s Transit Manager or designee in matters relating to service quality, providing operational and other data as described in the Agreement, responding to comments from the City, passengers, and the general public, and responding to specific requests for other assistance as the need arises. The General Manager must have at least ten (10) years of progressive management experience providing public transit services of which no less than three (3) years is as a General Manager of a system of similar size and complexity to the services herein described.
Assistant General Manager
Contractor shall designate and provide the services of a full-time Assistant General Manager who shall assist the General Manager in the overall management and supervision of operations under the terms of the Agreement. The Assistant General Manager must have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in public transportation operations including at least three (3) years supervisory experience.
Transit Analyst
The Contractor must provide a full time Transit Analyst or Management Analyst to assure data quality, maintain customer service systems including real-time passenger information, implement quality control, perform internal audit functions, investigate route or service issues, 753 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 27
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
and support contract compliance efforts. The Analyst may work directly with City staff and may investigate and respond to customer service issues and/or delays in service. As a primary point of contact with customers, this person must have a depth of customer service experience in public transit and stellar customer service skills.
D.1.6 Operations Personnel
At a minimum, supervision for vehicle operations must be provided no later than 20 minutes before first bus/vehicle operator sign in and 20 minutes after last bus/vehicle operator sign out each service day. There must be at least one manager level staff on site Monday – Friday from 4:00 a.m. to 9:30 p.m., Saturday & Sunday from 8:30 a.m. to 6:30 p.m. All operations staff must be fully qualified and licensed to operate all vehicles used in Beeline and DAR service.
Operations Manager/Supervisor
The contractor must provide adequate supervision and on-the-job training of operations staff to assure quality service. The Manager/Supervisor must have at least five years of full-time management experience in operations, safety, or training.
Safety & Training Manager/Supervisor
The contractor must provide an adequate safety program and training of operations staff to assure quality service. The Manager/Supervisor must have at least three years of full-time management experience in operations, safety, or training.
The Manager/Supervisor must have the current training/certifications:
• Transit Safety Institute (TSI) Instructor’s Course in Bus Operator Training, • California Department of Motor Vehicles (DMV) Employer Testing Program with certification to administer road tests.
• National Transit Institute (NTI) Advance Mobility Device Securement Skills, and • Federal Transit Administration (FTA) compliant Post Accident and Reasonable Suspicion Drug and Alcohol training.
Road Supervision/Dispatch
There must be at least one road supervisor in the field to monitor the services Monday – Friday from 4:45 a.m. to 9:30 p.m., Saturday & Sunday from 8:30 a.m. to 6:30 p.m. The Contractor must provide a minimum of three (3 FTE) road supervisors in the staffing plan. Qualified road supervisors may be scheduled to cover dispatch shifts. Contractor may have a classification of dispatch supervisor for employees qualified to perform in both dispatch and road supervision assignments.
Dispatch/Road Supervisor
There must be at least one dedicated dispatcher Monday – Friday from 4:30 a.m. to 9:00 p.m., and Saturday and Sunday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. The Contractor must provide a minimum of 2.5 FTE dispatch staff in the staffing plan. Qualified dispatchers may be scheduled to cover road supervisor shifts. Contractor may have a classification of dispatch supervisor for employees qualified to perform in both dispatch and road supervision assignments.
Bus/Vehicle Operators
Regularly assigned Beeline bus and DAR vehicle operators and extra board operators must be available daily to ensure consistent and reliable service under this Agreement. All operators 754 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 28
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
must be fully trained and licensed in accordance with California DVM regulations and all federal, state and City regulations.
Reservationists
The Contractor shall provide any necessary staff to ensure efficient and timely administration of reservations and scheduling of DAR trips in accordance with the service schedules and policies as set forth by the City.
D.1.7 Maintenance Personnel
Maintenance staff must be scheduled on site to provide services prior to daily pull out and during all Revenue Vehicle Hours of operation. All maintenance staff, with the exception of the maintenance clerk position, must be fully qualified and licensed to operate all vehicles used in Beeline and Dial-A-Ride service. Refer to D.4.2 to see certifications required for maintenance personnel.
Maintenance Manager/Supervisor
The Contractor must provide adequate supervision and on-the-job training of maintenance staff to assure a quality maintenance program. The Manager/Supervisor must have at least five years of full time experience managing a CNG bus fleet of similar size and complexity and be a working manager.
Mechanics
There must be adequate maintenance staff to ensure daily pull-out, on time PMs, and minimal daily hold list. The Contractor must provide at least six FTE mechanics in the staffing plan.
Technician/Mechanic
There must be adequate technical staff to assure daily operations of farebox, DriveCam, Mobil View, headsign, and voice enunciation and other technology systems on each bus. Contractor must provide at least one FTE technician/mechanic in the staffing plan.
Maintenance Clerk
There must be adequate staff support to provide accurate record keeping, parts ordering, and maintenance of vehicle files. The Contractor must provide at least 0.50 FTE of a clerk in the staffing plan.
D.1.8 Employee Standards
The Contractor shall employ only such persons as are competent and qualified to provide all services in accordance with the requirements of this RFP and City policies, practices, procedures, and standards. All employees shall meet all applicable qualifications established by federal, state and local laws and regulations. The City reserves the right to request removal of employees from service for the Glendale contract at its sole discretion.
Any employee providing service under this Contract will at all times:
• Be alert, careful, courteous and competent in their performing their job assignment and human relations habits;
• Be neat and clean in appearance, wear the designated uniform that is clean, wrinkle free and not showing signs of wear; and
755 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 29
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
• Speak, read and write and understand English adequately as solely determined by the City.
• In addition to the above, all employees assigned to drive will at all times:
• Be legally licensed and qualified to operate the vehicles to which they are assigned; • Have no reckless driving convictions;
• Have no more than one moving violation during any twelve (12) month period preceding or during assignment to contract;
• Have never been convicted of a felony; and
• Have no conviction of a drug or alcohol offense or had his or her license suspended due to a drug or alcohol offense during the five (5) year period preceding assignment to contract or during assignment to the contract.
D.1.9 Permits and Licenses
The Contractor and their employees will hold, and provide copies of, valid permits, licenses, certificates and other documents as are required by Federal, State, County, City and other governmental or regulatory bodies to legally engage in the services to be provided under this Contract. Contractor will notify the City of any suspension, termination, lapses, non-renewals or restriction of required licenses, certificates, or other documents which may be cause for termination of this Contract. The Contractor is responsible for payment of all related permit and licensing fees.
D.1.10 Background Check
Contractor shall use appropriate employee screening and selection criteria to ensure the employment of the best qualified applicants available, emphasizing competence, courtesy, reliability, and good customer service skills. It is also important to the City that employees can communicate properly with customers and complete written reports in a clear, concise, and legible manner. These criteria shall include but not be limited to checking an applicant's driver's license records through the California Department of Motor Vehicles, preemployment physical examinations, and drug/alcohol screening tests.
Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to ensure that all employees in the course of their duties are of good moral character. Any such employee who is convicted of a felony or of a crime involving moral turpitude shall be removed from this contract. Contractor shall not knowingly hire any individual with a felony conviction or other offense that makes such individual unsuitable for work on services under this Agreement. Contractor shall conduct pre-employment DMV checks on all employees. Contractor shall check DMV records at least every 6 months for accidents, Vehicle Code violations, and valid driver’s licenses of all employees and validity of driver’s licenses of all employees whose job required them to operate vehicles for this project. Contractor shall conduct pre-employment a “Live Scan” DOJ and FBI check to determine criminal background of employees. The background checks must be completed prior to hiring and every three (3) years by the Contractor.
Contractor is responsible for the costs of background checks and Live Scan. Contractor shall notify City of any results of such checks that could have an adverse effect on service operations and the corrective actions taken, if any. Contractor is responsible for all record keeping and maintenance of all background checks.
756 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 30
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
At change of Contractor, or at any point during the contract term, the City reserves the right to ask that Contractor staff be removed from this Agreement if they have violated any federal, state or City policies and regulations, have shown poor performance in dealing with the public, and/or if they are not well-suited for this Agreement. City will not unnecessarily make these requests.
D.1.11 Drug Free Workplace and Drug and Alcohol Program The Contractor must provide a program for drug testing of operations, maintenance, and other personnel in compliance with the US Department of Transportation Procedures for Transportation Workplace Drug and Alcohol Testing Programs (49 CFR Part 40).
The Contractor will provide the City with a copy and any subsequent updates of the following:
• Drug Free Workplace policy;
• Drug and Alcohol Testing policy;
• Copy of certificate of DHHS collection and processing facility; • Copy of DAMIS and MIS reports; and
• Copy of reports requiring post-accident determinations.
The Contractor’s Drug and Alcohol program will be audited annually through a third party contractor.
The Contractor is subject to liquidated damages for failure of program to comply with any FTA regulations, failure to submit program documents as required above, or for material findings as a result of an audit.
D.1.12 Employment Contracts and Labor Agreements
The contractor shall be solely responsible for payment of all its employees and sub-contractors’ wages and benefits. The Contractor may deal with and enter into written agreements with its employees. Contractor shall notify the City of any labor negotiations being conducted with its employees and shall keep the City fully informed of the status and progress of such negotiations. The City shall not negotiate with collective bargaining agents.
D.1.13 Replacement Services
In the event that the Contractor is unable, due to a strike, work stoppage, or other event not caused by the City and not covered by force majeure in the Agreement, to provide services in full compliance with the requirements of the Agreement, then the City may, in lieu of finding the Contractor in default, obtain the services of a replacement operator or provide the services with its own resources (collectively referred to as “replacement services”). The City may utilize such replacement service as a substitute for all or any part of the Contractor’s services, and may maintain such replacement services in effect until the Contractor is able to resume performance in full compliance with the Agreement. Prior to implementing replacement services, the City shall notify the Contractor in writing and provide the Contractor with 3 days to cure its noncompliance.
If the City utilizes replacement services under this Section, the Contractor shall be liable to the City for the actual amount by which the cost of such replacement services exceeds the amount 757 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 31
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
that would have been payable under this Agreement for comparable services including any expenses (including internal administrative costs) incurred by the City in soliciting and obtaining those replacement services. In addition, the only compensation due and payable to the Contractor by the City during any period in which replacement services are being provided shall be for any hours of service actually provided by the Contractor. Any actions taken by the City pursuant to this Section by reason of the Contractor’s failure to perform shall not preclude the City from subsequently finding the Contractor in default for the same or any related failure to perform. Liquidated damages may be assessed.
D.1.14 Inventory
The City will conduct an annual inventory of City property. The Contractor shall be responsible for returning to the City at the termination of this Agreement, whether for cause or expiration of its term, property and equipment of equivalent type, value (as of the date acquired), and condition as that identified in the updated initial inventory list is subject to normal wear and tear.
The City shall conduct a final inventory during the last month of the contract term. If any property or equipment is determined, based on a comparison of the updated initial inventory list to the final inventory list, to be missing, damaged, otherwise unavailable for use, or in a condition that is over ordinary wear and tears, the Contractor shall be responsible for either replacing such property or equipment or compensating the City for its replacement value.
The City may deduct any amount due for the replacement of property or equipment from the final monthly payment due to the Contractor. However, if the amount due for replacement exceeds the final payment amount, the Contractor shall pay the City that excess amount within 30 days after notification.
D.1.15 Compensation for Services
Beeline Fixed Route
The City will pay the Contractor on a Revenue Vehicle Hour basis for fixed route service. The calculation of these rates is made using Form O, Fixed Route Base & Marginal Rate Price Proposal. Revenue Vehicle Hours are defined in Section A Definitions and Acronyms.
The “base rate” is the cost per Revenue Vehicle Hour based on 100,500 annual revenue hours which reflects the current level of service. The “marginal rate” is the cost per Revenue Vehicle Hour for incremental costs incurred to deliver service in excess of 100,500 service hours.
The City, through the service change process, may decrease the number of Revenue Vehicle Hours by up to fifteen percent (15%) during the life of the contract without renegotiation of the base rate per Revenue Vehicle Hour set forth in Form O. Up to a thirty percent (30%) increase to Revenue Vehicle Hours during the life of the contract should be anticipated and reflected in the marginal rate per Revenue Vehicle Hour set forth in Form O. Increases to service levels should assume the current span of service. A proposed increase in excess of thirty percent (30%) or decrease in excess of fifteen percent (15%) in Revenue Vehicle Hours during the life of the contract will give rise to negotiations between the City and the Contractor, which may result in the base and/or marginal rates increasing, decreasing, or remaining the same. 758 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 32
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
Dial-A-Ride Paratransit
The City will pay the Contractor on a “Passenger Trip” basis for the service. The calculation of the passenger trip rate is made using Form P, Dial-A-Ride Base and Marginal Rate Price Proposal. Passenger Trips are defined as one-way trips made on the paratransit service by registered participants, excluding attendants.
The “base rate” is the cost per revenue service hour based on 21,000 annual passenger trips.
The “marginal rate” is the cost per revenue service hour for special service orders outside of the regular DAR service. The marginal rate will be applied to additional transit services above the base service, as negotiated.
Cost is being determined on total modal expenses per the price proposal – Form P. Contractor will estimate his own revenue hours based on his own efficiencies and historical data as provided in Section B.5 to obtain a cost per revenue hour. Per trip costs (billable cost per trip) are calculated by dividing the total modal expenses by the 21,000 annual trips.
D.2 Beeline Fixed Route Operations
The Contractor shall ensure that Contractor employees meet all applicable laws, codes, and safety standards as set by Federal, State, and local governments. The Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, shall provide labor, supplies, and all other usual and customary equipment required for the operation of the transit services.
D.2.1 Operating Description
The Contractor will provide safe, efficient, and effective fixed route transportation to the general public within the prescribed service area including Glendale, La Canada Flintridge, Montrose, and La Crescenta (unincorporated Los Angeles County).
Service Level Hours
The Contractor will provide a base service volume of 100,500 annual Revenue Vehicle Hours during the hours of operation. Actual deployment of hours will be based on service demand.
Service Schedule
Service shall be provided as scheduled or according to any adjusted schedule, established by the City, including route modifications required as a result of a declared emergency per Section C.25. Additional or modified scheduled times and service areas will be established pursuant to the procedures in Section D.2.2.
Holidays
Glendale Beeline does not operate on the following holidays:
• New Year’s Day (first day of January)
• Memorial Day (last Monday of May)
• Independence Day (July 4)
• Labor Day (first Monday of September)
• Thanksgiving Day (fourth Thursday of November)
• Christmas Day (December 25)
759 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 33
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
D.2.2 Adjustments to Service
Glendale Beeline service may be adjusted throughout the term of the contract to better serve our clients. The City may elect, at its discretion, to modify or change the service criteria.
Modifications may include, but are not limited to adding or deleting service areas; and increasing, decreasing, or changing operating hours, service hours or days of operation.
Any service change proposed by the City shall be transmitted to the Contractor in writing, identifying the change and specifying the effective date. Within 15 days after receipt of a written service change notice from the City, the Contractor shall provide a written response identifying any feasibility problems the Contractor believes would be created by the proposed change. The proposed change shall thereafter be accepted or modified through negotiations between the Contractor and the City. If there is a failure to agree, the matter shall be resolved in accordance with the Disputes section in the Federal Contract Clauses in Exhibit H.
The Contractor shall be provided schedule changes 30 days in advance of their effective date for service that will change by more than three trips or more than one bus line, provided that a period of shorter notice may be provided in the event of a declared emergency.
The Contractor may suggest alternatives to any service changes proposed by the City and may also propose service changes it believes are appropriate for more efficient or improved services under this Agreement.
D.2.3 Special Service Orders
Special Service Orders (SSO) may be requested by the City as additional service above and beyond the contracted service. SSO operational data must be recorded and billed separately at the marginal rate per Revenue Vehicle Hour.
D.2.4 Service Quality
The Contractor shall adhere to the following standards:
• Vehicles shall be operated with due regard for the safety, comfort, and convenience of passengers and the general public.
• On-Time Performance
The Contractor shall maintain a minimum of 90% on-time performance in accordance with published schedules.
• Missed Trips
The Contractor will complete 99% of all scheduled trips in accordance with published schedules.
• Proper Service at Bus Stops
The Contractor will have bus operators properly service all bus stops and stations during all revenue hours. Proper service of a stop means that when any person is standing at or near a bus stop, the bus operator will properly stop the bus in the bus zone with the front door at an ADA compliant boarding area and open the doors for any person whether or not they board the vehicle. Buses on Discharge Only are exempted from servicing stops up until the point that standing room for one person becomes available on the vehicle. 760 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 34
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
At rail stations, proper service of a stop means that operators must wait the designated wait time to board passengers from all the assigned arriving trains for that trip. • ADA Bus Equipment/Features will be fully operable during all revenue hours. Operability includes adequate sound levels of interior and exterior voice announcements and correct headsign language.
• Bus Stop Announcements
Unless otherwise being appropriately done by an automated bus stop announcement system, it is the responsibility of the Operator to announce the following, as required by the ADA (Section 37.167(b)):
o Transfer points with other fixed routes, both interagency, and City-operated; o Other major intersections and destination points;
o Intervals along the route sufficient to permit individuals with visual impairments or other disabilities to be oriented to their location; and o Stops as requested by an individual with a disability.
Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.2.5 Non-Revenue Support Vehicles
All support vehicles for bus operator relief and field supervision may be no more than five years old at the start of the contract. Vehicles may be no more than 12 years old during the term of the contract. All vehicles will have an identifying number visible from the side and rear, and be identified with the Beeline logo and Contractor identification.
D.2.6 Required Bus Operator Services
In addition to taking the passenger to and from their destination, Beeline bus operators are required to perform the following functions:
• Smile and greet passengers as they board,
• Operate kneeling bus features as often as practical to assure ease of boarding for and always upon request of any passenger,
• Operate wheelchair ramp upon request except at designated stops where the ramp may be damaged by deployment, secure wheelchair passengers, and, as needed, guide wheelchair passengers to curb area when alighting,
• Collect appropriate fares,
• Distribution and collect on-board passenger surveys as needed, • Distribution of printed transit materials, service notifications, and other promotional materials as needed,
• Complete and submit an “Incident Report” on each occasion that an out-of-ordinary incident arises during service, and accurately and completely submit any other required operating reports each day, and
• Maintain interior cleanliness of the bus during revenue service. The bus operator’s area shall be clean at all times and not used to store personal items. Other than an approved beverage container, each bus operator’s personal items should be kept in a secure area and out of sight. Bus operator must walk through bus on each layover to remove large pieces of litter and make sure passenger seating area is clean for service. 761 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 35
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
D.2.7 Bus Operator Uniforms
The Contractor will ensure that each bus operator will visually reflect the high quality of Beeline service and respect for the public transit profession by wearing the prescribed uniform as described in “Exhibit J Bus/Vehicle Operator Uniform Requirements.” D.2.8 Pre-Trip Inspection
The Contractor will require each bus operator to inspect each vehicle with regard to safety, function and appearance of the vehicle prior to the start of service. A daily pre-trip inspection/daily vehicle inspection (DVI) form shall be completed prior to start of service and upon change of bus operator(s). DVI’s will be collected for each bus at the end of each day and submitted to Maintenance for review. The Contractor will immediately repair or replace, prior to start of service, any vehicle with a safety problem. DVI records on retained on each bus will be signed off daily by a mechanic or technician noting status of any needed repair.
D.2.9 Bus Operator Training
New bus operators: Contractor shall provide all prospective bus operators with a minimum fifty (50) hours of formal structured classroom training and a minimum of sixty (60) hours of structured behind the wheel training.
Annual Bus Operator Training: A minimum of twelve (12) hours of refresher training is required per operator per year. In addition, each bus operator will receive a minimum one-hour on-board ride check to evaluate their skills and habits and will result in a written evaluation that may indicate additional training requirements.
Electric Vehicle Training
Contractor shall provide appropriate training for the use of battery electric buses and vehicles.
Post-Collision Training: Additional retraining for operators must be provided after each nonpreventable collision.
City staff will work with the Contractor training staff to ensure that necessary topics are included in new employee orientation and, if requested by the Contractor, may participate on a periodic basis in the orientation sessions and/or safety meetings to review such policies or present changes in policies that impact bus operators.
D.2.10 Revenue Vehicle Fueling
Fixed routes vehicles are fueled at the City’s expense on a direct billing basis with Clean Energy. The Contractor is responsible for the assignment and security of Clean Energy-issued fuel cards issued to Beeline. Only the City’s Revenue Vehicles will be fueled using Beeline fuel cards. The Contractor is responsible for all CNG fueling training for fuelers, including quality data entry for each bus identification number into the fueling system.
Fixed route revenue vehicles must be fueled on-site at the Beeline Transit Facility. To be prepared for any after-hour emergencies, the Contractor shall ensure that each vehicle has a total fuel fill at the end of each service day.
762 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 36
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
In the rare event that the on-site station is out of service, Beeline revenue vehicles may be fueled at any other Clean Energy station. The closest stations are as follows:
Table 3 – Clean Energy Stations
City of Glendale 711 Gardena Avenue Glendale 91204
City of Burbank 810 N Lake Street Burbank 91502
City of Pasadena 3528 E Foothill Boulevard Pasadena 91107 Future battery electric vehicles will be charged on site at the Transit Facility at the City’s expense.
D.2.11 Fare Collection
The fixed route vehicles have GFI Genfare Odyssey fareboxes. The Contractor will collect and deposit all fare revenues. Total farebox revenues (cash receipts) are to be deposited intact into a separate bank account, for fixed route farebox revenues only, maintained by the Contractor.
Farebox revenue shall be documented. Fare revenue and its documentation shall be submitted to the City on a monthly basis.
The City is planning to purchase new Genfare Fast Fare fare collection equipment by the end of 2023. This is currently tentative and is subject to change.
The Contractor is responsible for accurate passenger counting using mobile data terminals (MDT) and paper hand counts. Passenger counts should be properly categorized by fare type and must be submitted to the City on a monthly basis.
The City will review any and all procedures relating to the collection, recording, depositing, and reporting of all cash receipts. The Contractor shall maintain copies of all deposit slips listing all currency and coin by type and denomination and shall provide a copy of the monthly bank statement. Contractor shall be responsible for providing security over collected funds, equipment in service, and all inventoried fareboxes and associated equipment. Contractor shall develop, place into service, and monitor procedure controls and security devices that will prevent theft or expose pilferage. Should there be any discrepancies between the actual revenue counts and the estimated revenue counts from the ridership data, and an investigation proves failure to adequately protect the City’s revenues by the Contractor, the Contractor is responsible for monetary reimbursement to the City.
On a monthly basis, the Contractor will audit farebox functionality to assure quality fare collection and data processing. The City reserves the right to audit fare revenue collection and accounting at reasonable times without prior notification to the Contractor.
The City is a participating member of the Transit Access Pass (TAP) system, a contactless fare media program in Los Angeles County. All fixed route buses are equipped with a TAP Bus Mobile Validator (BMV). The Proposer is responsible for coordinating directly with LA Metro, the regional TAP system owner; Cubic, the TAP system vendor and the City in a timely manner to maintain the BMV devices.
Periodically the City will conduct special programs allowing individuals to board its services for free. The City will notify the Contractor in advance of the program’s parameters. 763 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 37
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
The Beeline operates fare free on the following days:
• Federal and State Election Days,
• Transit Equity Day,
• Earth Day,
• Bike to Work Day,
• California Clean Air Day.
D.2.12 Vehicle Collisions and Transit Service Incidents Collision Reporting: In the event of a collision involving a City vehicle, the Contractor will notify the City within 10-minutes and submit all necessary reports to the City within a twenty-four hour period. If the collision is severe, the Contractor must phone and speak directly to City staff. The Contractor shall respond in person to any emergency or accident involving extensive property damage or passenger injuries or as requested by the City during or after the operational hours of the system. Emergencies or incidents involving injuries, significant damage, or media coverage must be reported to City immediately upon occurrence.
Incident Reporting: In the event of an incident during Beeline service, the Contractor will notify the City within 1 hour. The City will determine any additional reporting required on a case-bycase basis depending on severity of incident.
D.2.13 Operational Reporting
The Contractor will maintain dispatch and service records that enable the Contractor to provide necessary data to the City upon request. The Contractor will readily produce a variety of operational reports to City as required by different regulatory agencies, as well as other reports the City may, from time to time, request related to service operations. The following reports must be submitted as shown:
Incident Report Summary (Daily, as Needed) – An Excel spreadsheet indicating nature of any passenger incident, roadcall where vehicle is delayed or pulled from service, or minor collision (i.e., mirror) within one hour of incident or as requested. Spreadsheet will be maintained cumulatively on an annual basis.
Vehicle Collisions (Daily, as Needed) – Verbal report to City staff of any collision within 10 minutes of collision; followed up with written accident report and police report number within 24- hour period.
Bus Assignment List (Daily) – Listing of buses, run assignment or maintenance assignment, and bus operators for daily service.
Bus Equipment List (Daily) – Reports operability of critical bus components at time of pullout.
Operations Staffing Schedule (As Needed) – Weekly schedule of managerial, road supervisor and dispatcher staffing showing required daily coverage.
Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
764 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 38
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
D.3 Dial-A-Ride Paratransit Operations
D.3.1 Operating Description
The Contractor will provide safe, efficient, and effective paratransit transportation to the general public within the prescribed service area including Glendale, La Canada Flintridge, Montrose, and La Crescenta (unincorporated Los Angeles County). Vehicles may also travel into a portion of Pasadena and Altadena for La Canada Flintridge residents.
Service Level – Trips
It is anticipated that the Contractor will provide 21,000 passenger trips per year during the hours of operation. Monthly passenger trips will vary. Actual deployment of hours will be based on service demand and vehicle resources. For proposal purposes, the Contractor should anticipate the number of trips will not change from year to year.
Service Schedule
Service shall be provided as scheduled or according to any adjusted schedule established by the City, including route modifications required as a result of a declared emergency per Section C.25. Additional or modified scheduled times and service areas will be established pursuant to the procedures in Section D.3.2 Adjustments to Service.
Published Hours of Operation
Glendale DAR operates during the following hours:
Monday-Friday: First pickup 8:00 A.M. – Last pickup 6:00 P.M.
Saturday: First pickup 9:00 A.M. – Last pickup 4:00 P.M.
Sunday: First pickup 9:00 A.M. – Last pickup 2:00 P.M.
Holidays
Glendale DAR does not operate on the following holidays:
• New Year’s Day (first day of January)
• Memorial Day (last Monday of May)
• Independence Day (July 4)
• Labor Day (first Monday of September)
• Thanksgiving Day (fourth Thursday of November)
• Christmas Day (December 25)
Glendale DAR may operate a modified weekday schedule (fewer vehicles) on the following holidays based on demand:
• President’s Day (third Monday of February)
• Veterans Day (November 11)
• Friday after Thanksgiving Day
D.3.2 Adjustments to Service
Glendale DAR service may be adjusted throughout the term of the contract to better serve our clients. The City may elect, at its discretion, to modify or change the service criteria.
Modifications may include but are not limited to adding or deleting service areas; and increasing, decreasing, or changing operating hours, service hours or days of operation. 765 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 39
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
Any service change proposed by the City shall be transmitted to the Contractor in writing, identifying the change and specifying the effective date. Within 15 days after receipt of a written service change notice from the City, the Contractor shall provide a written response identifying the impact of such change on operations, estimating any resulting cost increase or savings, and identifying any feasibility problems the Contractor believes would be created by the proposed change. The proposed change shall thereafter be accepted or modified by negotiations between the Contractor and the City.
Upon agreement on a service change, the City will issue an administrative change order, which shall be executed by both parties. If there is a failure to agree, the matter shall be resolved in accordance with the Disputes clause in Exhibit H.
The Contractor agrees that the City may increase or decrease the number of Passenger Trips by 15 percent or less during any contract year (as compared to the prior year’s revenue hours) without renegotiation of the base Passenger Trip rate or marginal rates per Revenue Hour set forth in Form P – Price Proposal. A proposed increase or decrease in allotted Passenger Trips or Revenue Hours in excess of 25% in any contract year shall give rise to negotiations between the city and the Contractor, which may result in the Passenger Trip rate and/or marginal rates increasing, decreasing, or remaining the same.
the Contractor shall be provided schedule changes 30 days in advance of their effective date for service, provided that a period of shorter notice may be provided in the event of a declared emergency per Section C.25. The Contractor may suggest alternatives to any service changes proposed by the City and may also propose service changes it believes are appropriate for more efficient or improved services under the Agreement.
D.3.3 Special Service Orders
Special Service Orders (SSO) may be requested by the City as additional service above and beyond the contracted service. SSO operational data must be recorded and billed separately at the marginal rate per Revenue Vehicle Hour.
D.3.4 Service Quality
The Contractor shall adhere to the following standards:
Passenger per Vehicle Revenue Hour Performance
Regardless of how trips are to be provided on the DAR system, the Contractor must meet or exceed the City’s standard of 3.75 passengers per vehicle revenue hour.
Liquidated damages may be assessed every month service falls below the standard.
On-Time Performance
The wait-time window for DAR trips will be from 10 minutes before the pickup reservation time to 20 minutes after the pickup reservation time (total of 30 minutes). Trips not meeting this window will be deemed as late.
Liquidated damages may be assessed if the monthly on-time performance falls below 95%.
Missed Trips
The Contractor will complete 100% of all scheduled one-way passenger trips. 766 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 40
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
Liquidated damages may be assessed on each occurrence of a missed trip.
D.3.5 Registration Database
Registration for the DAR service is handled by City staff. The registration process includes determination of applicant eligibility and entering approved applicant data into the Contractor provided on-line reservation/scheduling/dispatch software program. The current electronic database of DAR registrants will be provided by the incumbent Contractor.
The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the integrity of the database and making a daily backup copy. The Contractor shall provide the City web-based access to the database so that registrant records may be reviewed, added or modified.
D.3.6 DAR Reservations, Scheduling, and Dispatch
The Contractor shall provide the necessary staff to ensure efficient and timely administration of reservations, scheduling and dispatch of DAR trips in accordance with the service schedules and policies set forth by the City.
Glendale DAR currently uses Trapeze 16 for reservations, scheduling, dispatching, and reporting. The City desires Proposers to utilize updated or new software systems that can be documented as meeting or exceeding the performance of the current system. Proposals for other software systems must identify the Contractor’s other DAR systems that use the software being proposed, at least three (3) similar services using the proposed software, and a comprehensive description of how the software will operate in Glendale.
The Contractor shall provide and submit the specifications for a computer aided dispatch system using an automated scheduling system to develop, deploy and support customer information solutions for paratransit services. The installed software shall at a minimum, provide:
• Real time, paratransit On-Time Performance (OTP) tracking and monitoring, with ability to drill down into non-compliant occurrences (i.e., profiling call data to include address mapping, passenger data, driver assigned, vehicle assigned, etc.); • Automated monitoring and advisement of “late trips”, with ability to drill down into noncompliant occurrences (i.e., profiling call data to include address mapping, passenger data, driver assigned, vehicle assigned, etc.);
• Monitor and alert of passenger/trips that meet certain criteria; and • Reports that are accessible to the City through the internet including, at a minimum: OnTime by Hour, On-Time by Operator, On-Time by Daily Pullouts and Routes, On-Time Return to Yard Report, On-Time Performance Exception (i.e., highlighting trips not performing within City established performance requirements).
Liquidated damages may be assessed if these requirements are not met.
D.3.7 Automated Vehicle Tracking System
The Contractor shall provide and submit specifications for a global positioning system (GPS) that offers Automated Vehicle Tracking (AVT) capabilities for all vehicles. The proposed system should be capable of:
767 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 41
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
• Interfacing with Computer Aided Dispatch system to provide real time updates to routes in no more than 30 second intervals;
• Interfacing with mapping software to identify exact location of the vehicles at any time; • Providing on time performance data in real time, accessible to the City via internet at any time;
• Offering daily, weekly, monthly, and annual, automated on-time performance reporting; and
• Ability to effectively manage large group trips.
Liquidated damages may be assessed if these requirements are not met.
D.3.8 Accepting Trip Requests and Scheduling
Registered Dial-A-Ride customers may schedule pickup and return trips from 24 hours to 14 days in advance. No more than 80% of the trips during any hour can be subscription-based service. The Contractor will make every effort so that no passenger is abandoned after a missed return trip. Same day trips may be scheduled based on availability.
D.3.9 Reservation and Dispatch Record Keeping
The reservation and dispatch functions will maintain records that enable the Contractor to provide necessary data to the City monthly and upon request. This record keeping will include but not be limited to:
• Call center reporting to include monthly and annual counts for reservation requests, information requests, trips denied/refused, reason for trip denial/refusal, trips scheduled, and subscription trips scheduled. A monthly report including cumulative year to date data will be submitted with each invoice.
• Trip information including customer name, vehicle used, trip origin and destination, scheduled pickup time, actual pickup time, actual arrival time at destination, wait time, and deadhead time.
• Daily incident log to report collisions, down revenue vehicles, and unusual occurrences.
Incident log will be electronic and emailed to City upon each incident occurring.
D.3.10 Fixed Route Notification
Reservation staff must be trained about the local fixed-route services (both Beeline and Metro) within the DAR service area. Reservation staff is required to give fixed route transit information to registrants who request to make trips which could be served using the Beeline or Metro services.
Reservation staff will offer to mail fixed route schedules to customers who are interested in these services. The Contractor will stock current Beeline and Metro schedules and will mail schedules within 24 hours of a customer request.
D.3.11 Required Driver Services
In addition to driving the passenger to and from their destination, DAR drivers are required to perform the following functions:
768 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 42
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
• Smile and greet passengers as they board;
• Assist passengers with boarding and deboarding as needed; • Carry up to three (3) shopping bags per passenger into vehicle as needed; • Provide reasonable accommodations/modifications as requested or needed; • Operate wheelchair lift or ramp upon need or request, secure wheelchair passengers, and, as needed, guide wheelchair passengers to curb area when alighting; • Collect appropriate fares;
• Hand-out and collect on-board passenger surveys;
• Hand-out printed transit materials, service notifications, and other promotional materials. • Complete and submit an “Incident Report” on each occurrence that an out-of-ordinary incident arises during service, and accurately and completely submit any other required operating reports each day, and
• Maintain interior cleanliness of the vehicle during revenue service. The driver’s area shall be clean at all times and not used to store personal items. Other than an approved beverage container, each driver’s personal items should be kept in a secure area and out of sight. Drivers must check the vehicle when coming into and on leaving service, removing large pieces of litter and making sure the passenger seating area is clean for service.
D.3.12 Driver Uniforms
The Contractor must provide uniforms to all drivers. Uniforms will be subject to City approval and must ensure the drivers visually reflect the high quality of the Glendale DAR service. Driver name identification easily visible to passengers is required above the right shirt pocket. Uniform descriptions are provided in Exhibit J Bus/Vehicle Operator Uniform Requirements.
D.3.13 Pre-Trip Inspection
The Contractor will require each driver to inspect each vehicle with regard to safety, function and appearance of the vehicle prior to the start of service. A daily pre-trip inspection/daily vehicle inspection (DVI) form shall be completed prior to start of service, and submitted to the Maintenance Supervisor for all vehicles. The Contractor will immediately repair or replace, prior to placement in service, any vehicle with a safety problem. The Contractor will repair any nonsafety items within 72 hours. DVI records retained for each vehicle shall be signed off by mechanic or technician noting status of repairs.
In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that sufficient spare vehicles are inspected and ready to place into revenue service for both fixed route and DAR services, if needed, to ensure no delays in scheduled revenue service.
D.3.14 Drivers and Operations Personnel Training
The Contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a formal training and retraining program that shall be subject to review and approval by City. An outline of the training program, including periodic updates, shall be on file with the City. All drivers, dispatchers, telephone information personnel, and supervisors shall participate in the program.
The driver training program must provide a fixed minimum number of hours of training for new employees, including classroom instruction, behind the wheel training under supervision of a 769 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 43
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
certified instructor, and in-service training. The program shall include, but not be limited to, the following topics:
• instructions covering applicable laws and regulations and defensive driving practices; • City operating policies and procedures;
• employee work rules;
• vehicle safety inspection;
• equipment care and maintenance;
• fare policies and cash handling procedures;
• customer relations;
• passenger assistance techniques including operation of lift/ramp and securement equipment;
• ADA requirements; and
• Sensitivity training for working with seniors and persons with disabilities.
Drivers shall be trained to operate Class B vehicles, wheelchair lifts/ramps and securement systems, and other equipment that may be expected to be used in the Glendale Dial-A-Ride services to competency.
All drivers shall be certified as having completed the Contractor’s formal training course for new drivers or experienced drivers as approved by the City. At minimum, 50% of all drivers must be licensed with a valid California Class B operator’s license with appropriate certification(s) and medical card. Drivers shall meet all applicable requirements as established by the California Highway Patrol (CHP).
Dispatchers, telephone operators, supervisors, and any other personnel who may from time to time be assigned to provide telephone information on the Dial-A-Ride telephone reservation lines shall be trained in customer relation skills; telephone manners; accident/incident procedures; fares; Dial-A-Ride reservation procedures; Access Services, Glendale Beeline and Metro information and numbers; and operating policies. Operations control personnel assigned to Dial-A-Ride trip scheduling and vehicle dispatching duties shall have a detailed knowledge of applicable procedures and professional techniques.
D.3.15 Vehicle Fueling and Cleaning
All revenue vehicles are fueled at the City’s expense on a direct pass through basis. It is understood that revenue vehicle fuel costs included in the monthly invoice are for the sole and exclusive provision of the City’s DAR services. The City shall not reimburse the Contractor for fuel used in non-revenue vehicles.
The Contractor shall utilize a dispensing system, approved by the City, which accurately records all fueling purchases to allow City to reconcile all fuel transactions by date and vehicle number.
The City expressly reserves the right in its sole discretion to establish fueling procedures as determined by the City to be in the City’s best interest. Contractor and all of its employees shall adhere to any and all operating, administrative, and accounting procedures required by City in connection with all fueling operations.
The allowable rate for reimbursement will be based on the Energy Information Administration (EIA) (www.eia.gov) weekly retail gasoline prices (+/-5%) for Los Angeles, California. The Contractor will provide a fuel sales report or itemized receipts that show the date, time, 770 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 44
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
vehicle/license number, gallons dispensed, cost per gallon, and total sales price. The Contractor will provide the EIA pricing report along with copies of itemized fuel receipts subject to reimbursement as back up with monthly invoice.
Fueling and cleaning must be performed after the end of service and before service the next day. To be prepared for any after hour emergencies, the Contractor shall ensure that each vehicle has a full tank of fuel before the close of each day.
D.3.16 DAR Fare Collection
Regardless of actual fare receipts, the Contractor will provide all scheduled revenue to the City on a monthly basis. Fare revenue documentation showing “fare paying” categorized passengers shall be submitted to the City on a monthly basis as back up.
All passengers are expected to pay the full fare for each one-way trip with the exception of:
• passengers traveling to and from a nutritional meal site; • passengers traveling to and from Club Maple;
• personal care attendants (PCA) traveling with a passenger; and • La Canada Flintridge residents.
The fare is waived for those noted as exceptions. The Contractor will collect fares only as prescribed.
The Contractor is highly encouraged to follow industry guidelines and established procedures that will provide adequate controls over the collection, processing, and depositing of fare revenue. Minimal handling of cash by a driver is highly recommended. Customer perception of misappropriation can adversely affect both the Contractor and the City. The Contractor will provide a copy of its cash handling procedures for fare collection to the City.
At the City’s discretion, the City may develop and implement a form of fare media that will be accepted in lieu of cash fares. The City shall prepare, print, and provide to the Contractor all schedules, passes, tickets, and like materials required by Dial-A-Ride operations. The Contractor shall distribute and disseminate such materials in accordance with the City provisions provided and any supplemental directions.
D.3.17 Vehicle Collisions and Transit Service Incidents Collision Reporting: In the event of a collision involving a DAR vehicle, the Contractor will notify the City by phone and email within 10 minutes and prepare all necessary reports to the City within a twenty-four hour period. If the collision is severe in nature, the Contractor must phone and speak directly to City staff. The Contractor shall respond in person to any emergency or accident involving extensive property damage, passenger injuries or as requested by City during or after the operational hours of the system. Emergencies or incidents involving injuries, major damage, or media coverage must be reported to the City immediately upon occurrence.
Incident Reporting: In the event of an incident during DAR service, the Contractor will notify the City within one hour of incident. The City will determine any additional reporting required on a case by case basis depending on severity of incident.
771 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 45
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
D.3.18 Operational Reporting
The Contractor will maintain dispatch and service records that enable the Contractor to provide necessary data to the City upon request. The Contractor will readily produce a variety of operational reports to the City as required by different regulatory agencies, as well as other reports the City may, from time to time, request related to service operations. The following reports must be submitted:
Incident Report (daily, as needed) – an Excel spreadsheet indicating nature of any passenger incident, roadcall where vehicle is delayed or pulled from service, and collision provided within two hours of incident or as requested. Spreadsheet will be maintained cumulatively on monthly and an annual basis.
Vehicle Collisions (daily, as needed) – Verbal report to City staff of any collision within 10 minutes of collision; followed up with written accident report and police report number within 24- hour period.
Operations Staffing Schedule (as needed) – Weekly staffing schedule showing required daily coverage of managerial, operations supervisor, dispatcher, and reservationists with language competencies.
Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4 Maintenance
The Contractor shall ensure that Contractor employees, City vehicles and Contractor equipment meet all applicable laws, codes, and safety standards as set by Federal, State, and local governments. The Contractor is responsible to maintain and keep all City vehicles in excellent mechanical condition. All maintenance and repair of vehicles shall be completed to original equipment manufacturers’, final stage vehicle manufacturer, and/or City’s specification and standards, and shall be subject to approval by City.
The Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, shall provide labor, lubricants, parts, replacement materials, repairs, paint, supplies, towing services, and all other necessary equipment required for the maintenance and operation of the vehicles and equipment utilized in providing the transit services, with the exception of major bus components as described in Section D. All parts, materials, and supplies will be OEM or approved equals.
D.4.1 Vehicle Requirements
The City will supply 44 fixed route vehicles and 10 DAR paratransit vehicles for Contractor use.
The vehicles are listed in the Fleet List, Exhibit D. The Contractor will also propose the number and type of support vehicles required to meet the contract performance requirements. Support vehicles may be shared with other services as long as they are available when needed for Glendale DAR. The City requires the Contractor to provide support vehicles that are also ADA accessible.
All support vehicles for operator relief and field supervision may be no more than five years old at the start of the contract. Vehicles may be no more than 12 years old during the term of the contract. All vehicles will have an identifying number visible from the side and rear, and be 772 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 46
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
identified with the Beeline logo and Contractor identification. The Contractor shall not remove any revenue vehicle from service without prior written approval from the City.
D.4.2 Mechanic ASE Certifications
Within 15 months of the contract, the Contractor must have at least one mechanic, maintenance supervisor, or maintenance manager as part of the dedicated Glendale team who maintains an ASE Master Transit Bus Technician certification.
Within 3 years of the contract, the remaining maintenance staff jointly will have the following ASE certifications, or equivalent, as determined by the City: Engine Repair (A1), Automatic Transmission/Transaxle (A2), Manual Drive Train and Axles (A3), Brakes (A5), Electrical/Electronic Systems (A6), Heating and Air Conditioning (A7), Engine Performance (A8), Compressed Natural Gas Engines (H1), Drive Train (H3), Brakes (H4), Suspension and Steering (H5), Electrical/Electronic Systems (H6), and Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (H7), and Preventive Maintenance and Inspection (H8).
In addition, within 15 months of the contract, the Contractor must have appropriate maintenance staff that will maintain the battery-electric buses be certified for National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace and Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 1910.269 Electric Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution.
The Contractor will provide the City with copies of certificates as often as necessary to demonstrate full compliance with this requirement. Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4.3 Scheduled and Preventive Maintenance
The Contractor will be responsible for providing precise scheduled maintenance and preventive maintenance inspections as specified by the original equipment manufacturer or as required by law. All scheduled and preventive maintenance must be completed on a timely basis and within the established mileage interval.
The City will randomly inspect vehicle and equipment records for compliance. Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4.4 Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance Records
The Contractor will be required to keep an accurate record of all repair and work orders performed by, or for, the Contractor on all vehicles and equipment. • The Contractor shall maintain a separate file for each vehicle containing all maintenance records in sequential order pertaining thereto. Vehicle inspection records for each vehicle must include the following:
o Inspection Date;
o Vehicle Mileage;
o Description of Work Performed;
o Parts and Supplies Used;
o Name of mechanic performing the work; and
773 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 47
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
o Signature of the Contractor’s Maintenance Manager/Supervisor indicating that the work was performed to the standards specified herein.
• The Contractor will assure that Daily Vehicle Inspection (DVI) forms for each Revenue Vehicle are collected and reviewed by maintenance staff on a daily basis. Repairs performed in response to a DVI issue will be signed and dated by the mechanic on the onboard DVI record.
The City will randomly inspect vehicle and equipment records for compliance. Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4.5 Warranty Maintenance
Provided that the City or the manufacturer has supplied required warranty documents to the Contractor, the Contractor shall take all actions required to preserve any and all manufacturers' warranties regarding the City’s equipment. The Contractor is required to accomplish all warranty repairs during the warranty period.
D.4.6 ADA Equipment
The Contractor will ensure that all ADA equipment on each Revenue Vehicle is complete and fully operable each day prior to pullout. ADA equipment includes destination signs, wheelchair ramps/lifts and annunciator system. Operability includes adequate sound levels of interior and exterior voice announcements, functioning interior digital displays and correct destination/headsign language.
For all revenue vehicles, the Contractor will ensure that wheelchair ramps are clean, and walking surface is not worn. Liquidated damages may be assessed if the automated operation of a wheelchair ramp fails while in service and is not repaired within 48 hours.
The City will randomly inspect daily vehicle inspection reports and/or random physical inspection for compliance. Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4.7 Climate Control Systems
The Contractor shall maintain the heating and air conditioning units in proper working condition so that they are available at any time during the service hours and offer the most comfortable environment inside the vehicle regardless of the outside climatic conditions. Contractor shall require that bus operators continually monitor climate control units during the day to ensure that they are operating properly. In-service vehicles without working heating or air conditioning will be exchanged within one round trip or sooner for fixed route service and within 2 hours or sooner for DAR service.
Liquidated damages may be assessed if heating or air conditioning fail while in service and are not fixed within 24 hours.
D.4.8 Other Vehicle Equipment and Systems
The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the functionality of all other systems onboard the vehicles and their related support equipment including all hardware and software. Systems on fixed route vehicles include: farebox system, public address system, destination/tail/dash signs, 774 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 48
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
surveillance equipment and cameras, voice annunciator system, fire suppression equipment, real-time bus arrival information system, schedule racks, and bike racks.
From time to time, the Contractor will revise destination sign readings and voice announcement script to reflect route changes or other relevant service information.
The Contractor will provide and maintain video event recording system such as DriveCam, SmartDrive or approved equal for all revenue vehicles at Contractor cost. The video event recorder must capture sights and sounds inside and outside the vehicle when triggered by exceptional forces (e.g. hard braking, swerving, collision, etc.) causing the recorder to save the critical seconds immediately before and after the triggered event. Saved events will be analyzed by the Contractor and used in ongoing driver coaching programs to improve behavior and mitigate driver risk. The Contractor will make available the event recordings upon City’s request.
D.4.9 Vehicle Interior Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain the interior passenger compartment and related equipment in good repair. It shall be free of exhaust fumes and deposits from the engine or engine compartment. The Contractor will ensure that all interior surfaces, corners and seams are securely fastened and any cracked or incomplete material will be replaced. The Contractor shall ensure that the doors are working properly. The driver’s area shall be clean at all times. Each driver’s personal items should be kept in a secure area and out of sight. The driver’s seat shall be maintained in accordance with the standards stated below for passenger seats. The interior will be checked for damage and cleared of trash at hourly intervals each day. The Contractor or any of its staff may not attach or place any markings on the interior of the vehicle unless directed by the City to do so or as required by federal, state, and local regulations. • The Contractor shall perform the following maintenance daily:
o Remove all trash, gum, sticky substances, foreign objects, dirt, and dust from entire interior;
o Clean bus operator’s area and dashboard so it is free of dust, stains, or grease; o Clean all interior and exterior windows; removing dust, fingerprints, smudges, writing, water spots, and streaks;
o Clean passenger seats to the extent that they are dust free and free of all foreign substances;
o Clean all ledges, stanchions, handrails, modesty panels, and remove dust, grease, gum or sticky substances; and
o Assure all interior bus cards and service alerts are properly installed and secured, and are promptly removed when out of date.
• The Contractor shall perform the following interior maintenance each week:
o Replace protective window film or inserts if ANY markings are present; o Shampoo fabric seats inserts as necessary to remove any foreign substances; o Replace seat inserts if ANY markings or stains are present, or if seat material is worn, ripped or torn;
o Remove graffiti and etching from ALL interior services of the vehicle; o Replace window glass if scratched, broken, or cracked; o Replace any decals if torn or damaged; and
775 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 49
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
o Repair or replace bus operator’s seat if torn or damaged.
The City will randomly inspect daily vehicle inspection reports and/or random physical inspection for compliance. Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4.10 Vehicle Exterior Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that all of the vehicle body components, appurtenances, and frame shall be sound and undamaged and retain original colors. The exterior body shall be free of cracks, dents, scrapes, graffiti, and any other markings not approved by the City. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the proper placement of exterior advertising on the Revenue Vehicles with the advertising vendor so the ad panel does not to interfere with the vehicle decals. The Contractor or any of its staff may not attach or place any markings on the exterior of the vehicle without written permission from the City or unless required by federal, state, or local regulations.
The Contractor shall wash vehicles a minimum of three days per week. The Contractor shall wax each vehicle at regular intervals twice each calendar year.
The City will randomly inspect daily vehicle inspection reports and/or random physical inspection for compliance. Liquidated damages may be assessed for non-compliance.
D.4.11 City Inspections
The City shall have the right to inspect any and all vehicles or cause same to be inspected at any time, with or without prior notice to Contractor, provided, however, that unless City determines in its sole discretion that emergency conditions or factors affecting safety or security require otherwise, the City shall give at least 24 hours notice of any such inspection. The City shall also have the right to demand from time to time a written statement from the Contractor setting forth the condition of the City equipment or any part of it. The Contractor shall furnish such a statement to the City within 10 days after receipt of the City’s demand. Should the City or its designee determine, in its sole discretion that any City equipment has not been maintained in accordance with the Agreement, the City or its designee shall report all deficiencies to the Contractor in writing.
The City, through a third party contract, will perform quarterly inspections on city vehicles.
Safety-related “A” deficiencies shall be corrected as soon as reasonably possible and prior to placing the vehicle in service. The Contractor shall have 30 days to correct the reported “B” deficiencies and 60 days for “C” deficiencies. The Contractor must furnish repair documentation for all corrections.
“Exhibit K Third Party Maintenance Inspection Reports” contains the most recent third party inspection reports, titled “Quarterly Fleet Maintenance Audit,” The audits combined cover the entire fleet, provide sample oil analysis, and comments regarding overall condition of the fleet.
The FTA, State of California, and Metro or their designees shall have the right to conduct periodic inspections for the purpose of confirming the existence, condition, and proper maintenance of the City supplied vehicles. No alternations may be made to the project equipment in its as-received condition without first receiving written approval from the City. 776 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 50
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
Liquidated damages may be assessed per vehicle on each occurrence that a vehicle fails any third party or City inspection or re-inspection for safety deficiencies.
D.4.12 California Highway Patrol Inspections
The Contractor must make the bus terminal and all vehicles available for inspection by the California Highway Patrol (CHP) as necessary. The Contractor must also follow CHP maintenance record guidelines and make all records available for inspection. The Contractor must notify the City within 2 hours of an inspection failure.
Liquidated damages may be assessed per vehicle on each occurrence that a vehicle fails or is placed out of service as a result of a California Highway Patrol inspection or re-inspection.
Liquidated damages may be assessed per occurrence that the bus terminal fails to meet a satisfactory rating as a result of a California Highway Patrol inspection or re-inspection.
D.4.13 Vehicle Out-of-Service Criteria
The Contractor shall not operate any vehicle that is unsafe for service. The following is the list of criteria used by the City to determine if a vehicle is unsafe for service:
• Failing a CHP inspection;
• Any violation of the North American Standard Out-of-Service Criteria; • Any lift, ramp, or securement device that is inoperable; • Any fuel leak;
• Overfilling of engine or transmission fluid;
• Any liquid leakages beyond a minor seepage;
• Removal of any component, without replacement, that has not been approved by the City; and
• Identification of any sub-standard repair or condition that could put the City, their employees, or the public at risk of health hazard or injury.
Liquidated damages may be assessed.
D.4.14 Mechanical System Failures (Roadcalls) and Reporting In the event of a vehicle failure while in revenue service, the Contractor shall deploy a vehicle, immediately upon notification, to replace the failed vehicle. The failed vehicle shall display “Out of Service” on the front and side destination signs. For DAR service only, an ADA-accessible supervisor vehicle is an acceptable means of providing travel when a revenue vehicle breaks down.
The Contractor shall track “Major Mechanical System Failures” and “Other Mechanical System Failures” as defined by FTA’s National Transit Database (NTD) reporting system. Mileage and mechanical failures must be recorded for each vehicle used in revenue service. The Contractor will capture miles between Major Mechanical and Other Mechanical failures and the nature of the roadcalls and report by month including YTD data report to the City.
Liquidated damages may be assessed for excessive mechanical system failures. 777 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 51
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
D.4.15 Major Bus Components for Revenue Vehicles Exceeding Useful Life The City will provide the replacement or rebuild cost of engines, transmissions, and select major vehicle components on a direct cost pass through basis for any fixed route Revenue Vehicle that meets the 12 year or 500,000 mile vehicle life and continues in active revenue service. The City will determine if the major component will be rebuilt or will be purchased new. The Contractor will incur the costs to remove and reinstall these components.
D.4.16 Return of City Vehicles and Maintenance Files
In the event the initial contract term or any extension thereafter is terminated, the Contractor shall immediately surrender and deliver all City vehicles and vehicle records. The Contractor is responsible for returning vehicles in an acceptable appearance and mechanical condition as specified in Section D.4. Vehicle records must be up to date and provided in vehicle file format in file cabinets.
If a government agency must take possession of the federal 5310 grant funded vehicles, as a result of the City’s or Contractor’s non-compliance with contract terms or by mutual agreement between the governmental agency and the City, the City shall sign off as registered owner and return the 5310 vehicles to the governmental agency.
If the Contractor fails to abide by the conditions, any payments due will be held and if necessary, amounts may be deducted to cover the cost of providing vehicles, making necessary repairs, or compiling or assembling a vehicle maintenance filing system.
D.4.17 Tires
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing (through purchase or lease) all tires and spares for all revenue vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible, at the termination of this Agreement, for returning the Revenue Vehicles with tires that meet the following standards:
• Front axle: Tires shall have a tread depth of 12/32” minimum. Recapped or re-grooved tires are not acceptable.
• Rear axle: Tires should have a tread depth of 8/32” minimum. The tire height between two tires on the same hub should not vary more than 3/32”.
• Tires with cuts, grooves, or evidence of curb damage (past the manufacturer’s rub bars) are not acceptable.
If the Contractor fails to abide by the conditions, any payments due will be held and if necessary, amounts may be deducted to cover the cost of providing new tires.
D.4.18 Maintenance Reporting
The Contractor will readily produce a variety of maintenance reports to the City as required by different regulatory agencies, as well as other reports the City may request related to service operations. The following reports must be submitted as shown:
• Mechanical System Failures (Monthly): Report miles between Major Mechanical and Other Mechanical failures and the nature of the roadcalls in an electronic report by vehicle, by month including YTD totals.
778 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 52
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
• Maintenance Staffing Schedule (as needed): Weekly schedule of maintenance staffing showing required daily maintenance coverage.
• Quarterly, semi-annually or as needed reporting of vehicle service data for governmental agencies.
D.5 Facilities and Equipment
D.5.1 Bus Maintenance Facility
The Beeline Maintenance Facility is located at 1759 Gardena Avenue, Glendale, California 91204, on approximately 2.6 acres of land. The city-owned facility includes:
• 24,000 square foot two-story transit administration and maintenance facility. The Contractor will operate and maintain transit services on the first floor of the facility with the City of Glendale Beeline administration offices on the second floor. • Four maintenance bays
• CNG fueling island
• Bus wash with chassis wash capabilities
• Bus parking for 60 buses and 10 vans
D.5.2 Facility Agreed Use
The Contractor shall use the facility solely for the purposes of operating service and maintaining vehicles and equipment as outlined in this RFP and resulting Agreement. The Contractor’s right to use the facility may not be transferred or assigned. The Contractor shall be deemed to have a revocable license to use the Facility during the term on the contract. This right shall not be construed as creating a lease (express or implied) or as giving rise to any of the legal rights or interests associated with a leasehold interest in the property.
The Contractor shall use and occupy the Facility only for the agreed use, and for no other purpose. Contractor shall not use or permit the use of the Facility in a manner that is unlawful, creates damage, waste, or a nuisance, or that disturbs occupants of or causes damage to neighboring premises or properties.
D.5.3 Facility Move-In Condition
The City shall deliver the Facility to the Contractor broom clean and free of debris on the start date of the contract term. The City warrants that the existing electrical, plumbing, fire sprinklers, lighting, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems (HVAC), loading doors, and all other elements in the Facility, other than the those supplied by the Contractor, shall be in good operating condition on move-in date.
D.5.4 Facility Maintenance, Repairs, Trade Fixtures, and Alterations Contractor Obligation
Contractor shall keep the Facility, utility installations, and alterations in good order, Contractor will maintain the Facility and all equipment as prescribed by the Facility maintenance manual, Exhibit L. The City is responsible for maintaining the major building systems. The contractor will submit Facility Service Requests to the City for items related to building system repair requests. 779 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 53
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
The Contractor shall, at its sole expense, repair, maintain in good condition, and replace (as necessary) the equipment used at the Facility. The Contractor shall maintain all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s preventable maintenance program. Any equipment replacements made by the Contractor must be of like size, kind, and quality to the items replaced, as such items existed when originally installed, and shall be subject to the City’s approval.
The City will design and construct a Parking Deck above the bus parking area in the next two years. The Parking Deck will allow for the electrification of the Beeline fleet and provide on-site employee parking. Once the Parking Deck is complete, additional Facility equipment will be added for the Contractor to maintain.
The Contractor shall not make any structural modifications to the Facility without the City’s prior written approval.
If Contractor fails to satisfy its obligations regarding the maintenance of the Facility, fails to implement and comply with its Facility Maintenance Plan, fails to comply with the Facility Maintenance Manual, or fails to properly exercise and enforce all warranties relating to the Facility and the Equipment therein, Contractor shall be subject to liquidated damages per occurrence.
Maintenance Area
The Contractor shall keep the Facility equipped with all necessary to safely fuel, operate, and maintain gasoline, CNG and electric vehicles. The Contractor shall fully equip the maintenance area with all equipment required to maintain all vehicles in accordance with the specifications and the manufacturer’s warranty and PM programs. The maintenance area will include, but not be limited to, parking lot, garage floor, work benches, an oil drain area, parts room, restroom/washroom, shop tools, etc. The maintenance area shall be kept clean and safe throughout the term of the contract. The Contractor will be responsible for obtaining and complying with all required building, occupancy, or other governmental permits and must abide by OSHA safety standards.
Bus Wash System
Contractor must maintain the facility bus wash system in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Contractor must perform monthly preventative maintenance on the bus wash system to ensure the bus wash station remains in operating condition.
Facility Landscaping
The Contractor is responsible for the maintenance of all Facility landscaped areas. The Contractor shall provide landscape services including maintaining the current Facility landscaping, replacement plants and trees as needed, and maintaining the irrigation system including replacing irrigation components as needed.
Contractor shall keep landscaped areas and premises free from weeds, litter, pests, and debris.
Contractor shall pay particular attention to entryways, focal points, and high-traffic areas.
Deadheading and weeding will be performed one time per week during active growing periods, and as often as required during slow periods of growth to maintain a neat and manicured appearance, weather permitting.
780 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 54
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
All sidewalks, curb lines, concrete slabs, tree circles, and bed edges will be edged as often as necessary to maintain a neat and manicured appearance. Contractor shall perform string trimming around all trees, shrubs, and other obstacles.
Contractor shall perform complete trimming, edging, and weeding of all shrubs and ground cover areas on a regular basis. Major pruning, dead-heading will be done following flowering or during plants’ dormant season.
Contractor shall prune groundcover as required to “contain” perimeter growth to within bed areas adjacent to walkways, curbs, and structures.
Contractor shall remove leaves and debris from planter beds and walkways to maintain a clean appearance.
Contractor shall prune trees to remove weak, dead, damaged, and diseased portions of the plant for natural growth development.
Contractor is responsible for fertilizing shrubs, trees, and groundcover to maintain proper nutrient levels and provide a consistent, healthy appearance.
Contractor shall replace trees and plants upon death. Contractor shall provide recommendations for replacement trees and plants for City’s written approval prior to planting.
Contractor shall schedule all irrigation controllers to maximize existing irrigation system efficiency. Contractor shall clean, repair, and adjust the sprinkler system to provide the best coverage possible from the existing system. Contractor shall test the sprinkler system by turning on each zone, repairing leaks or malfunctioning parts, and adjusting for proper spray arc and maximum system efficiency on a bi-monthly schedule. During weather exceeding 80 degrees Fahrenheit, the Contractor shall test the sprinkler system no less than every four days.
Facility Cleaning
The Contractor is responsible for the cleaning of both the interior and exterior of the Facility including both floors of the Administration building. The Contractor must provide daily janitorial services Monday thru Friday. The janitorial services include but are not limited to cleaning ceilings, walls, seats, floors, driver area, kitchens and breakrooms, bathrooms, dispatch rooms, maintenance offices, offices, and other general housekeeping services. Contractor shall ensure the cleanliness of the facility prior to the commencement of each service day. Contractor must submit to the City for review and approval of the janitorial plan and reserves the right to alter when needed.
All supplies required for the Facility Cleaning and janitorial supplies must be provided by the Contractor.
Hazardous Substances
During the term of the Contract, the Contractor will be responsible for the proper handling, use, storage and disposal of all waste oil and hazardous materials produced at the facility, and shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, regulations and requirements. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemicals used on site shall be available from Contractor upon City request.
781 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 55
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
D.5.5 Return of City Facility
In the event the initial contract term or any extension thereafter is terminated, the Contractor shall vacate the facility. The City Facility shall be returned to the City with any and all improvements, parts, and surfaces thereof broom clean and free of debris, and in good operating order, condition, and state of repair, ordinary wear and tear excepted. Ordinary wear and tear shall not include any damage or deterioration that would have been prevented by good maintenance practice.
Contractor shall repair any damage occasioned by Contractor’s installation, modifications, maintenance or removal of Contractor-owned machinery, equipment, utility installations, and furnishings.
If the Contractor fails to abide by the conditions, any payments due will be held and if necessary, amounts may be deducted to cover the cost of repairing the facility.
D.6 Administration
D.6.1 Office Equipment and Computer System
The Contractor will provide equipment for administrative and supervisory employees that provides them the functional resources to perform their assigned duties.
Computer Network: The Contractor will provide a computer network for use by all office staff. All computer hardware may be no more than one year old at the beginning of the contract and shall be replaced prior to its 10
th anniversary of manufacture. The computer network must have a server with ample file storage for large amounts of data and shared documents. All individual workstations will be on the network and City staff shall have access to Beeline and Dial-A-Ride operating data and records. The programs and data will be backed up daily and stored in a remote location.
The current full version of Microsoft Office is required for each workstation at the start of the contract. The Contractor will load other transit specific or City furnished software applications and historical data into the new network. Internet access must be provided to all management and administrative workstations.
Phone System: The Contractor will provide a landline or VoIP phone system for use by office staff. All phone hardware may be no more than one year old at the beginning of the contract.
Each workstation must be provided a phone. Phones for key staff must be able to accept and retrieve voice mail.
The Contractor will provide a designated phone number for general incoming calls and lost and found inquiries. The designated phone number must accommodate an outgoing after hours recording.
• Beeline Fixed Route
For fixed route service, the Contractor will assume financial and operational responsibility for all telecommunications requirement and the existing telephone number 782 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 56
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
818-409-3387 for general incoming calls and lost and found inquiries. The designated phone number must accommodate an outgoing after-hours recording.
Dial-A-Ride Paratransit
The Contractor will assume financial and operational responsibility for all telecommunications equipment and the existing Dial-A-Ride customer service/reservations telephone number 818-247-0691 which provides local telephone service to residents of Glendale, La Cañada-Flintridge, and the LA County unincorporated areas of La Crescenta and Montrose.
The DAR reservation/customer service phone number shall be attended 30 minutes before first published daily pickup and 60 minutes after last published daily pickup. All reservations, scheduling, and dispatch staff must be able to clearly communicate in English. There must always be one staff member immediately available who is fluent in Spanish and Armenian. Additionally, the Contractor shall provide the capability for dispatch staff to communicate with callers speaking other languages through a translation service.
The City and Contractor will arrive at a mutually agreed upon protocol for answering the phone, including, but not limited to, the standard verbal greeting and how to handle placing customers on hold. The general service inquiry telephone lines shall remain open during all hours of operation. All telephone calls must be answered within three rings. Customers shall not be put on hold for longer than three minutes.
D.6.2 Customer Comments and Complaints
Customer comments or complaints received by the Contractor or the City will be documented in the City of Glendale Customer Service Request System. Results of investigations undertaken will be submitted by email noting the Customer Service Request Form number; however additional information may be submitted in any format as needed.
The Contractor will return to the Customer Service Center and the City the results of the Contractor's investigation of such requests and complaints within the following time frames, unless otherwise instructed by the City: Priority 1 - to be submitted to the City within 24 hours from the date and time on the Customer Service Form; and Priority 2- to be submitted to the City within 3 working days from the date and time on the Customer Service Form. The priority of each service request or complaint shall be designated by the City. The Contractor will follow up with customer if requested.
The City may invoke liquidated damages for failure to respond within the specified time as indicated above, and also for excessive quantity of verified complaints received.
D.6.3 Advertising/Promotion
The City will be responsible for advertising and promoting Beeline and DAR and will provide the funds and materials necessary to carry out this responsibility. The Contractor shall cooperate in the City’s marketing and advertising (such as through the installation and removal of all interior and exterior signage and decals, including interior bus cards, advertising signs, rider alerts, newsletters, and bus scheduling information) at no additional expense to the City. 783 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 57
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring proper care, protection, handling, storage, and maintenance of the Beeline maps and schedules, and for ensuring that there is an adequate supply of maps and schedules on-board each Revenue Vehicle at all times during Revenue Service.
The Contractor will distribute promotional materials or assist in public relations activities from time to time and only at the request of the City.
D.7 Reporting Requirements
The Contractor will collect all operational data for Beeline and Dial-A-Ride with a process that provides an auditable data trail. The process must enable the Contractor to readily produce a variety of data reports to the City as required by different regulatory agencies, as well as other reports the City may, from time to time, request related to operating performance. All reports shall be submitted in formats acceptable to the City. The Contractor shall meet deadlines established by the City. The standards described should be considered minimums. The following reports must be submitted.
D.7.1 Service Data Report (Monthly)
The Contractor will provide service data by producing a monthly and YTD cumulative electronic report that includes service data by route, by service day, i.e., Weekday, Saturday, and Sunday/Holiday, for the following data categories:
Fixed Route Reporting:
• Number of passengers boarded by fare category
• Number of wheelchair boardings
• Total vehicle miles and hours
• Deadhead miles and hours
• Revenue vehicle miles and hours
• Scheduled route miles
• Passengers per revenue vehicle hour
• Total passenger miles
DAR Reporting:
• Number of passengers boarded by fare category
• Number of wheelchair boardings
• Total vehicle miles and hours
• Deadhead miles and hours
• Revenue vehicle miles and hours
• Passengers per revenue vehicle hour
• Total passenger miles
D.7.2 Federal NTD Report (Monthly and Annual)
The Contractor shall collect and produce data for reporting in a format consistent with the annual National Transit Database (NTD) report for fixed route and DAR service. The Contractor will provide monthly data and year-to-date (YTD) data no later than the tenth (10th) of each 784 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 58
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
following month for the previous month (for example July 2023 data must be provided by August 10, 2023). Contractor reporting must be completed by August 1 for each City fiscal year. The City will complete and submit the final NTD report.
At a minimum, the Contractor is required to provide data for the following NTD forms:
• Transit Agency Service Non-Rail (S-10)
• Revenue Vehicle Inventory, Vehicle Miles (A-30)
• Operating Expenses by Function (F-30)
• Monthly Ridership Form (MR-20)
• Safety and Security Reporting (S&S-40 and S&S-50)
The Contractor must provide its Profit and Loss Statement for July 1-June 30, to support operating expenses provided in price proposal and subsequently reported in annual NTD forms.
The Contractor is subject to liquidated damages per report for late or inaccurate reporting.
D.7.3 Federal NTD Safety and Ridership Report (Monthly) The Contractor will collect, report, and submit data to the City for the monthly NTD Ridership Report and Safety and Security Report for fixed route and DAR reporting. Reporting is conducted through the Federal NTD web portal by City staff. Monthly reports are due by the last day of the subsequent month. The Contractor may be granted access for direct reporting to NTD.
D.7.4 Federal NTD Passenger Mile Random Survey Report (Monthly) The Contractor will collect, report, and submit data for the monthly Passenger Mile Traveled Random Survey Report for fixed route service. The number of passenger mile random surveys requested monthly shall be designated by the City. The Contractor will collect 100% count DAR Passenger Miles Traveled data through the dispatching software.
D.8 Recordkeeping and Audit Controls
The Contractor will retain and provide access to or copies of all service records or any other operational records deemed necessary or requested by the City.
All financial and data records directly related to the work performed in this contract shall be subject to audit or inspection by duly authorized representatives of the City, County, State or Federal agencies and Metro upon request.
The Contractor shall maintain financial records and reports relating to funds received during the contract. The Contractor shall maintain books, records, documents, and other accounting procedures and practices which reflect all costs of any nature expended in the performance during the contract.
The Contractor shall maintain all books, records, and other relative documents related to the contract for four (4) years after completion or termination of the Agreement. Upon termination of the contract and any extensions thereof, Contractor shall deliver to City, either electronically or physically, all operating records for the prior three (3) years. All Revenue Vehicle maintenance 785 of 1291
Glendale RFP 2023-100 Page 59
Operation of Beeline & Dial-A-Ride Transit Services
records shall be provided to the City coincident with the transfer of City-owned vehicles back to the City.
E. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The relationship between the City and the Contractor is one of partnership. There is an expectation that both parties will provide exceptional support and service to each other and the public. There is an expectation on the City’s part that the Contractor has taken due care in preparing its estimate of costs so as not to degrade the quality of any one aspect of the contract provisions during the life of the contract.
The Contractor will always strive to provide service in a manner that will ensure responsive service to transit customers while simultaneously maximizing service reliability and safety. To identify key areas of concern to the City, various performance standards are described below for which liquidated damage fines may be assessed when service falls below the standard.
Any breach of this Agreement by the Contractor could result in substantial damages and injury to the public and City in amounts that are difficult to ascertain with specificity at this time.
Therefore, specific dollar amounts are established here for the identified standards. The Parties intend and agree that the liquidated damages amount is a fair estimate of the actual damages suffered in the event of the type of breach in question.
Liquidated damages will be waived if a manufacturer defect exists in a vehicle or series of vehicles. The City may institute the liquidated damage clauses described below no sooner than two months after the service initiation, except for the Service Start-up and the Service Failure liquidated damage clauses described below.
The City reserves the right to impose additional penalties as it deems necessary in order to enforce provisions of the RFP.
E.1 General Requirement Liquidated Damages
E.1.1 Service Start-Up
Service will commence on August 1, 2024, or another date specified by City, whichever is later.
The liquidated damages to be paid hereunder will not be required where City determines that a failure to commence timely service is solely due to actions by the City, as solely determined by City.
DAR Liquidated Damage: Ten thousand dollars ($10,000) for each day service is delayed on DAR until the service is started.
Fixed Route Liquidated Damage: Twenty thousand dollars ($20,000) for each day service is delayed on Beeline until the service is started.
E.1.2 Key Personnel Retention
The Key Personnel are crucial to the day-to-day operations provided under this contract.